Skip to main content

Full text of "Lebanon Valley College Catalog"

See other formats


/ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

LYRASIS  IVIembers  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://www.archive.org/details/lebanonvalley197980leba 


LEBANON  VALLEY  COLLEGE 

bulletin 


THE  BULLETIN  is  pub- 
lished quarterly  except 
semi-quarterly  in  Summer 
[5  issues).  USPS  Number 
308-480.  Second  Class 
postage  paid  at  Annville, 
PA  17003.  Office  of  Pub- 
lic Relations,  Lebanon 
Vail^.y  College,  Annville, 
PA  1/003. 


Volume  13,  Number  5 
Winter  1980 


m 

i 

The   college   reserves   the 

right  to  change  any  provi- 

sions  or  requirements   at 

any  time  within  the  stu- 

dent's term  of  residence. 

!.ebanon  Valley  College  admits  students  and  appoints  em- 
3loyees  of  any  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  sex. 
ige,  and  religion  to  all  rights,  privileges,  programs,  and 
ictivities  accorded  or  made  available  to  students  and  em- 
3loyees  at  the  College.  The  College's  administration  of  its 
3mployment  policies,  educational  policies,  and  all 
"ollege-administered  programs  is  conducted  without  re- 
gard to  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  sex,  age  and 
eligion. 


Second  class  postage  paid 
at  Annville,  Pennsylvania 
17()()3. 


COLLEGE  CALENDAR  1979/1980 


First  Semester 

1979 

Aug.       25  Saturday,  5:45  p.m Faculty-Administration  reception  and  dinner 

26  Sunday,  12:00  noon Residence  halls  open  for  new  students 

27-28  Monday.  Tuesday     Orientation  for  new  students 

28  Tuesday,  8:30  a.m Registration  by  new  students 

28  Tuesday,  1:00  p.m Registration  by  upperclassmen 

29  Wednesday,  10:00  a.m.   .  .Opening  College  Convocation 
29  Wednesday,  1:00  p.m.     .  .Classes  begin 

Sept.        8  Saturday    Board  of  Trustees  Retreat 

18  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Religion  and  Life-Balmer  Showers  Lecture 

22  Saturday    Homecoming  Day 

Oct.        12  Friday,  5:00  p.m Long  weekend  begins 

17  Wednesday,  8:00  a.m.    .  .  .Classes  resume 

17  Wednesday     Mid-Semester  grades  due 

20  Saturday    Church  Day 

23  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Balmer  Showers  Lecture 

Nov.    6-13  Tuesday  through 

Tuesday    Pre-Registration  for  second  semester 

10  Saturday    Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

21  Wednesday,  1:00  p.m.     .  .Thanksgiving  vacation  begins 
26  Monday,  8:00  a.m Classes  resume 

Dec.        11  Tuesday,  5:00  p.m First  semester  classes  end 

12-13  Wednesday,  Thursday     .  .Reading  period 

14-15  Friday,  Saturday  First  semester  examinations 

16  Sunday    Reading  period 

17-20  Monday  through 

Thursday    Pirst  semester  examinations 

20  Thursday,  5:00  p.m First  semester  ends 

Second  Semester 


Jan.         13  Sunday,  12:00  noon 


.  .Residence  halls  open 


.  .Registration 

.  .Classes  begin 

.  .Religion  and  Life-Balmer  Showers  Lecture 

.  .Founders'  Day 

.  .Spring  vacation  begins 

.  .Concert  Choir  tour 
.  .Classes  resume 
.  .Religious  Emphasis  Day 
.  .Phi  Alpha  Epsilon  Day 


14  Monday,  8:00  a.m. 

15  Tuesday,  8:00  a.m.   . 
Feb.          5  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m. 

19  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m. 

29  Friday,  5:00  p.m.     .  . 
Mar.    5-14  Wednesday  through 

Friday    

10  Monday,  8:00  a.m.    . 

18  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m. 
25  Tuesday    

2  5- Apr.  1  Tuesday  through 

Tuesday    Pre-registration  by  current  students  for  first 

semester,  1980-1981,  and  1980  summer 
session 

30  Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival,  Wind  Ensemble 

3  Thursday,  5:00  p.m Easter  vacation  begins 

8  Tuesday,  8:00  p.m Classes  resume 

13  Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival,  College  Chorus  and 

Symphony  Orchestra 

19  Saturday   Orientation  I  for  incoming  students 

20  Sunday,  3:00  p.m Spring  Music  Festival,  Symphonic  Band 

25-27  Friday  through  Sunday     .Tenth  Annual  Spring  Arts  Festival 

29  Tuesday,  11:00  a.m Awards  and  Recognition  Convocation 

May  1  Thursday,  5:00  p.m Second  semester  classes  end 

2-4  Friday  through 

Sunday    Peading  period 

3  Saturday    Alumni  Day 

5-10  Monday  through 

Saturday    Second  semester  examinations 

10  Saturday,  5:00  p.m Second  semester  ends 

16  Friday    Board  of  Trustees  meeting 

17  Saturday    Orientation  II  for  incoming  students 

18  Sunday,  9:00  a.m Baccalaureate  service 

18  Sunday,  11:00  a.m 111th  Annual  Commencement 

1980  summer  session:  June  9- August  1 


Contents 


College  Profile  5 

College  History    5 

Accreditation  7 

Statement  of  Purpose  7 

Support  and  Control 8 

Enrollment  Statistics 11 


Information  For  Prospective  Students 13 

Admission    13 

Student  Finances 15 

Financial  Aid 18 


Academic  Programs  and  Procedures  21 

Requirements  For  Degrees 21 

General  and  Distribution  Requirements    24 

The  College  Honors  Program   25 

Auxiliary  Schools  25 

Germantown  Metropolitan  Semester 26 

International  Studies  Program   27 

Marine  Biology  Program   27 

Merrill-Palmer  Institute  Semester 27 

Washington  Semester  Program 28 

Academic  Procedure 28 

Administrative  Regulations 31 


Student  Activities  35 

The  Religious  Life 35 

Campus  Organizations 36 

Cultural  Opportunities 37 

Student  Government 37 

Athletics  and  Recreation  39 


Courses  of  Study  by  Departments 40 

Special  Plans  of  Study 95 


Directories  107 

Faculty  and  Administrative  Staff 107 

Board  of  Trustees    117 

Correspondence  Directory  122 

Index   126 

3 


COLLEGE  PROFILE 

COLLEGE  HISTORY 

Officials  of  the  East  Pennsylvania  Conference  of  the  Church  of  the  United 
Brethren  in  Christ  were  acutely  embarrassed  in  the  spring  of  1866.  Five  public- 
spirited  citizens  of  the  town  of  Annville  had  come  to  Conference  on  February  22 
and  offered  as  a  gift  the  Annville  Academy  building  on  Main  Street,  which  they 
had  bought  for  $4,500,  providing  that  the  C^onference  would  establish  and 
maintain  there  forever  an  institution  of  learning  of  high  grade.  The  gift  was 
accepted.  The  name  Lebanon  Valley  College  was  chosen.  It  was  decided  to  lease 
the  property  to  someone  qualified  to  operate  a  school.  The  opening  date  was 
set — May  7.  Planning  then  came  to  a  stop,  for  they  could  find  no  one  to  take  the 
lease. 

That  was  the  situation  seven  weeks  before  the  opening  date,  according  to 
George  Washington  Miles  Rigor,  whose  short  account  is  the  earliest  extant  history 
of  Lebanon  Valley  College.  There  was  no  college  graduate  in  the  whole  Confer- 
ence, and  a  poll  of  Otterbein  College  graduates  failed  to  turn  up  a  prospect.  Rigor, 
a  United  Brethren  minister  who  had  attended  college  for  only  three  years,  stepped 
into  the  breach.  He  enlisted  the  cooperation  of  a  neighbor,  Thomas  R.  Vickroy,  a 
Methodist  minister  and  graduate  of  Dickinson  College.  They  took  over  the  lease  as 
partners  for  the  next  five  years.  Vickroy  to  run  the  school  and  Rigor  to  act  as  agent. 
The  building  was  readied  and  Lebanon  Valley  College  opened  on  May  7,  as 
scheduled,  with  49  students  enrolled.  From  its  first  day  it  was  coeducational. 

President  Vickroy's  term  was  marked  by  action.  Eleven  acres  were  added  to 
the  "lot  and  a  half  of  ground"  conveyed  by  the  original  deed.  A  spacious 
four-story  building  was  erected.  A  charter  was  granted  by  the  Commonwealth  of 
Pennsylvania.  A  faculty  was  hired.  A  complete  college  curriculum,  based  on  the 
classics  but  including  music  and  art,  was  established,  and  two  classes  were 
graduated  before  Vickroy  gave  up  his  lease  in  1871.  The  college  was  not  leased 
again  but  continued  operations  through  a  Board  of  Trustees. 

The  five  presidents  during  the  next  25  years  had  great  difficulty  in  keeping 
the  college  financially  afloat,  due  to  lack  of  support  ranging  from  apathy  to  open 
opposition.  There  was  some  progress.  A  library  was  established  in  1874,  and  a 
college  newspaper  appeared  in  1888.  However,  in  the  fall  of  1896,  the  school  was 
debt-ridden,  living  from  hand  to  mouth,  with  an  enrollment  of  only  80. 

The  administration  of  President  Hervin  U.  Roop,  starting  in  1897,  marked  the 
first  real  period  of  expansion.  Under  his  leadership,  five  new  buildings  were 
erected,  including  a  library  donated  by  Andrew  Carnegie,  and  the  Administration 
Building  was  re-built  after  a  disastrous  fire  on  Christmas  Eve,  1904.  By  1905, 
enrollment  had  soared  to  470,  with  a  faculty  of  23. 

Loss  of  public  confidence  and  financial  support  prompted  Roop's  resignation 
in  1905,  and  the  college  faced  its  darkest  days.  Bankruptcy  was  averted  by  the 
keen  business  sense  and  personal  generosity  of  President  Lawrence  Keister,  who 
served  from  1907  to  1912. 

President  George  D.  Gossard  finally  gave  the  college  stability  when  he 
achieved  for  it  accreditation  and  a  million-dollar  endowment  fund,  the  income 
from  which  was  to  form  the  financial  cushion  dreamed  of  by  all  the  presidents 
before  him.  By  the  end  of  his  20-year  term  in  1932,  there  were  653  students  and  32 
faculty  members.  Most  important,  the  Conservatory  of  Music  was  accredited  by 
the  Commonwealth  for  its  program  in  public  school  music,  marking  the  start  of  an 
outstanding  academic  department. 

Following  Dr.  Gossard's  death  in  1932,  Dr.  Clyde  A.  Lynch  faced  a  series  of 
external  crises  which  lasted  throughout  his  18  years  as  president.  The  stock 
market  crash  shrank  the  handsome  endowment  raised  by  his  predecessor.  The 
depression  of  the  1930's  reduced  the  enrollment,  and  World  War  II  lowered  it  still 


further;  the  post-war  influx  of  veterans  then  stretched  it  to  more  than  capacity.  In 
spite  of  these  trials,  Dr.  Lynch's  administration  began  buying  property  adjacent  to 
the  campus  to  allow  for  further  expansion.  It  also  raised  over  a  half-million 
dollars,  part  of  which  was  to  be  used  for  a  new  physical  education  building.  This 
building,  still  unfinished  at  the  time  of  Lynch's  death  in  1950,  was  named  in  his 
honor  upon  completion. 

The  twelfth  president  of  the  college,  Frederic  K.  Miller,  served  for  almost  17 
years.  During  his  term,  inflation  caused  mushrooming  costs,  but  the  so-called 
"tidal  wave  of  students"  made  possible  selective  admissions.  The  greatest  physical 
expansion  in  the  history  of  the  college  occurred,  with  seven  new  buildings  erected 
and  several  renovated.  Two  major  fund-raising  drives  were  concluded  success- 
fully. Enrollment  increased  60%,  with  a  corresponding  increase  in  faculty  and 
administrative  staff.  The  centennial  of  the  founding  of  the  college  was  observed  by 
a  year-long  series  of  events. 

On  April  1,  1967,  Dr.  Miller  retired,  and  Allan  W.  Mund,  president  of  the 
Board  of  Trustees,  became  acting  president.  It  was  not  until  February  3,  1968,  that 
Frederick  P.  Sample  was  elected  by  the  board  to  become  thirteenth  president  of 
Lebanon  Valley  College.  When  Dr.  Sample  assumed  office  on  September  1,  1968, 
Lebanon  Valley  College  faced  its  second  century  as  a  fully-accredited,  church- 
related,  coeducational  college  of  the  liberal  arts,  occupying  a  35-acre  campus  of  26 
buildings,  and  supporting  an  enrollment  of  900  and  a  full-time  faculty  of  58.  In  the 
years  since  then,  the  college  has  continued  to  grow  in  acres  and  buildings,  in 
students  and  faculty.  This  growth  is  reaching  its  culmination  in  the  1970's  with 
the  multi-million  dollar  ambitions  of  the  Fund  for  Fulfillment. 

Just  as  the  college  has  changed  through  the  years,  so  has  the  Church  of  the 
United  Brethren  in  Christ  which  gave  it  birth  and  offered  its  support.  Organized  in 
1800  as  the  first  Christian  church  indigenous  to  the  United  States,  the  denomina- 
tion merged  with  the  Evangelical  Church  to  become  the  Evangelical  United 
Brethren  Church  in  1946.  In  April,  1968,  this  body  joined  with  the  Methodist 
Church  to  form  the  United  Methodist  Church. 

In  looking  to  its  second  century,  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  conscious  of  the 
dream  of  its  forefathers  that  it  be  "an  institution  of  learning  of  high  grade."  It  aims 
to  be  essentially  what  it  is  now,  a  relatively  small  college  of  the  liberal  arts  and 
sciences  that  takes  its  Christian  origins  seriously. 


Presidents  of 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Rev.  Thomas  Rees  Vickroy,  Ph.D. 

1866-1871 
Lucian  H.  Hammond,  A.M. 

1871-1876 
Rev.  D.  D.  DeLong,  A.M. 

1876-1887 
Rev.  E.  S.  Lorenz,  A.M.,  B.D. 

1887-1889 
Rev.  Cyrus  J.  Kephart,  A.M. 

1889-1890 
E.  Benjamin  Bierman,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

1890-1897 
Rev.  Hervin  U.  Roop,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 
LL.D. 

1897-1906 
Rev.  Abram  Paul  Funkhouser,  B.S. 

1906-1907 


Rev.  Lawrence  Keister,  S.T.B.,  D.D. 

1907-1912 
Rev.  George  Daniel  Gossard,  B.D.,  D.D. 
LL.D. 

1912-1932 
Rev.  Clyde  Alvin  Lynch,  A.M.,  B.D. 
D.D.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 
1932-1950 
Frederic  K.  Miller,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Litt.D. 
D.H.L.,  D.Pd.,  LL.D. 

Acting  President  1950-1951 
President  1951-1967 
Allan  W.  Mund,  LL.D. 

Acting  President  1967-1968 
Frederick  P.  Sample,  B.A.,  M.Ed.,  D.Ed. 
Pd.D. 
1968- 


6 


ACCREDITATION 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  on  the  approved  lists  of  the  Regents  of  the 
State  University  of  Nev^  York  and  the  American  Association  of  Univer- 
sity Women. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  accredited      Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  member  of 
by  the  following  bodies:  the  following  bodies: 

Middle  States  Association  of  Colleges         College  Entrance  Examination  Board 

and  Secondary  Schools  College  Scholarship  Service 

Department  of  Education  of  Pennsyl-         Eastern  College  Athletic  Conference 

vania  National   Association   of  Indepen- 

National   Association   of  Schools  of         ,,  ^.^^*  Colleges  and  Universities 

Music  National  Collegiate  Athletic  Associa- 

A         •         ^1        ■     ^  r^     .  tion 

American  Chemical  Society  Por,r,c.ri,.or..-o    a  •   *•  c  r^  ^ 

y  rennsylvania   Association   of  Col- 

leges and  Universities 
Pennsylvania  Foundation  for  Inde- 
pendent Colleges 


LEBANON  VALLEY  COLLEGE 
Annville,  Pennsylvania 

STATEMENT  OF  PURPOSE 

Lebanon  Valley  College  affirms  its  Christian  origins  by  maintaining  affiliation 
with  the  United  Methodist  Church  and  by  recognizing  the  Christian  faith  as  the 
perspective  for  its  policies.  Both  the  Christian  spirit,  which  encourages  the 
unhampered  search  for  truth,  and  the  academic  program,  which  gives  form  to  the 
search  for  truth,  combine  to  generate  free  and  responsible  inquiry  by  students  and 
faculty. 

In  accordance  with  the  purposes  of  its  founders,  Lebanon  Valley  College  seeks 
to  provide  an  atmosphere  in  which  the  student  can  respond  creatively  to  the 
contemporary  world.  Each  person  is  encouraged  (1)  to  develop  a  genuine  concern 
for  cooperative  living  and  community  service;  (2)  to  attain  a  heightened  sense  of 
moral  and  spiritual  values  through  a  deepened  awareness  of  how  people  have 
thought  of  themselves  in  relation  to  nature,  to  society,  and  to  God;  (3)  to  appreciate 
the  close  and  unmistakable  relationship  among  rational  thought,  creative  imagi- 
nation, and  moral  commitment;  and  (4]  to  deal  candidly  and  intelHgently  with  the 
past,  the  present,  and  the  future  and  their  interrelationship. 

The  programs  of  the  College  are  designed  to  provide  a  demanding  as  well  as  a 
rewarding  encounter  with  the  means  necessary  to  achieve  the  discovery  of  self 
and  society:  consideration  of  humanity's  most  significant  ideas  and  accomplish- 
ments; development  of  logical  thought  and  clear  communication;  practice  in 
precise  analysis  and  effective  performance.  The  academic,  social,  religious,  and 
aesthetic  experiences  blend  to  create  the  atmosphere  of  the  College  in  a  way  that 
fosters  enlivened  curiosity,  discipline  of  self,  and  excitement  about  ideas  that  are 
the  hallmark  of  the  educated  individual. 

Lebanon  Valley  College,  with  approximately  one  thousand  students  and  a 
low  student-faculty  ratio,  in  giving  life  to  the  concept  of  liberal  arts  as  expressed 
in  the  preceding  paragraphs  has  chosen  to  maintain  an  educational  institution 
which  is  academically  strong,  guided  by  the  Christian  faith,  and  small  enough  to 
give  personal  attention  to  all  students. 

Adopted  February  1,  1975 
Lebanon  Valley  College  Board  of  Trustees 


SUPPORT  AND  CONTROL 

Lebanon  Valley  College  receives  support  authorized  by  the  General  Confer- 
ence of  the  United  Methodist  Church,  individual  congregations  of  the  denomina- 
tion in  the  Eastern  Pennsylvania  Conference  and  the  Central  Pennsylvania 
Conference,  endowments,  and  the  Pennsylvania  Foundation  for  Independent 
Colleges.  Also,  since  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  as  at  most  other  institutions  of 
higher  learning  the  tuition  and  other  annual  charges  paid  by  the  student  do  not 
cover  the  total  cost  of  his  education,  additional  income  is  derived  through  the 
Lebanon  Valley  College  Fund.  The  Fund  is  supported  by  industry,  alumni,  the 
Board  of  Trustees,  parents  of  students,  and  other  friends  of  the  college. 

Total  assets  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  are  approximately  $20,000,000, 
including  endowment  funds  of  about  $3,600,000.  Aside  from  general  endowment 
income  available  for  unrestricted  purposes,  there  are  a  number  of  special  funds 
designated  for  specific  uses  such  as  professorships,  scholarships,  and  the  library. 

Control  of  the  college  is  vested  in  a  Board  of  Trustees  composed  of  49  elected 
members,  24  of  whom  represent  church  conferences;  5  of  whom  represent  the 
alumni  of  the  institution;  5  of  whom  represent  the  faculty;  and  15  of  whom, 
including  3  students,  are  elected  at  large. 


POLICY  OF  NONDISCRIMINATION 

Lebanon  Valley  College  admits  students  and  appoints  employees  of  any  race, 
color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  sex,  age,  and  religion  to  all  rights,  privileges, 
programs,  and  activities  accorded  or  made  available  to  students  and  employees  at 
the  College.  The  College's  administration  of  its  employment  policies,  educational 
policies,  and  all  College-administered  programs  is  conducted  without  regard  to 
race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  sex,  age,  and  religion. 


ENDOWMENT  FUNDS  (June  30,  1977) 

RESTRICTED  Lectureship  Funds 

For  educational  and  general  purposes        Bishop  J.  Balmer  Showers  Lectureship 


Professorship  Funds 


Fund 

^1    .      r^     1UOU1         J  r-      1^    .  Staley  Distinguished  Christian  Scholar 

Chair  of  English  Bible  and  Greek  Testa-  Lectureship  Fund 

ment 

Joseph   Bittinger  Eberly   Professorship  Library  Funds 

of  Latin  Language  &  Literature  Library  Fund  of  Class  of  1916 

John   Evans   Lehman   Chair  of  Mathe-  Class  of  1956  Library  Endowment  Fund 

n^^tics  Or    Lewis  J.  and  Leah  Miller  Leiby 

Rev.  J.  B.  Weidler  Endowment  Fund  Library  Fund 

The  Ford  Foundation  Robert  B.  Wingate  Library  Fund 

Butterwick  Chair  of  Philosophy  Maintenance  Funds 

Karl  Mihon  Karnegie  Fund  ^iram   E.    Steinmetz   Memorial    Room 

The  Batdorf  Fund  Fund 

E.  N.  Funkhouser  Fund  Williams    Foundation    Endowment 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  C.  H.  Horn  Fund  Fund 

Mary  I.  Shumberger  Fund  Equipment  Funds 

Woodrow  W.   Waltermyer  Professor-  Dr.  Warren  H.  Fake  and  Mabel  A.  Fake 

ship  Fund  Science  Memorial  Fund 

8 


Publicity  Funds 

Harnish-Houser  Publicity  Funds 

Restricted — Other 

Unger  Academic  Assistance  Fund 

C.   B.   Montgomery   Memorial  Room 

Fund 
A.I.M.  Fund 


NON-EDUCATIONAL 
PURPOSES 

Scholarship  Funds 

Ministerial  Scholarship  Trusts — 
United  Methodist  Church 

1.  Western  Conference 

2.  Central  Pennsylvania  Conference 

3.  Eastern  Pennsylvania  Conference 

4.  General  Conference 

5.  Baltimore  Conference 
Alumni  Scholarship  Fund 

Dorothy  Jean   Bachman  Scholarship 

Fund 
Lillian   Merle   Bachman   Scholarship 

Fund 
E.  M.  Baum  Scholarship  Fund 
Andrew  and  Ruth  E.  Bender  Scholar- 
ship Fund 
Cloyd   and   Mary   Bender   Scholarship 

Fund 
Biological  Scholarship  Fund 
Eliza  Bittinger  Scholarship  Fund 
Mary  A.  Bixler  Scholarship  Fund 
I.  T.  Buffington  Scholarship  Fund 
Alice  Evers  Burtner  Memorial  Award 

Fund 
Oliver  P.  Butterwick  School  Fund 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  D.  Clark  Carmean  Schol- 
arship Fund 
Isaiah  H.  Daugherty  and  Benjamin  P. 

Raab  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund 
Senator  James   J.   Davis   Scholarship 

Fund 
Derickson  Scholarship  Fund 
William  E.  Duff  Scholarship  Fund 
Samuel  F.  and  Agnes  F.  Engle  Schol- 
arship Fund 
M.  C.  Favinger  and  Wife  Scholarship 

Fund 
Fred  E.  Foos  Scholarship  Fund 


C.  C.  Cingrich  Scholarship  Fund 
Gossard,   Plitt   and   Monteith   Scholar- 
ship Fund 

Margaret  Verda  Graybill  Memorial 

Scholarship  Fund 
Peter  Graybill  Scholarship  Fund 
Jacob  F.  Greasley  Scholarship  Fund 
Hilda  Hafer  Scholarship  Fund 
Alice  M.  Heagy  Scholarship  Fund 
J.  M.  Heagy  and  Wife  Scholarship  Fund 
Bertha  Foos  Heinz  Scholarship  Fund 
Harvey  E.  Herr  Memorial  Scholarship 

Fund 
Edwin  M.  Hershey  Scholarship  Fund 
Merle  M.  Hoover  Scholarship  Fund 
Katherine  S.  Howard  Scholarship  Fund 
Judge  S.  C.  Huber  Scholarship  Fund 
Cora    Appleton    Huber   Scholarship 

Fund 
Reynaldo    Rovers   Memorial   Scholar- 
ship Fund 

Germaine  Benedictus  Monteaux  Music 
Award 

Germaine  Benedictus  Monteaux  Me- 
morial Scholarship  Fund 

H.  S.  Immel  Scholarship  Fund 

Henry  G.  and  Anna  S.  Kauffman  and 
Family  Scholarship  Fund 

John  A.  H.  Keith  Fund 

Barbara  June  Kettering  Scholarship 
Fund 

Dorothea  Killinger  Scholarship  Fund 

Rev.  and  Mrs.  J.  E.  and  Rev.  A  H. 
Kleffman  Scholarship  Fund 

A.  S.  Kreider  Ministerial  Scholarship 
Fund 

D.  Albert  and  Anna  Forney  Kreider 
Scholarship  Fund 

W.  E.  Kreider  Scholarship  Fund 
Maud  P.  Laughlin  Scholarship  Fund 
Lebanon  Steel   Foundry  Foundation 

Scholarship  Fund 
The  Lorenz  Benevolent  Fund 
Mrs.  Edwin  M.  Loux  Scholarship  Fund 
F.  C.  McKay 

Medical  Scholarship  Fund 
Elizabeth  Meyer  Endowment  Fund 
Elizabeth  May  Meyer  Musical  Scholar- 
ship Fund 


Elizabeth  H.  Millard  Memorial  Schol- 
arship Fund 
Harry  E.  Miller  Scholarship  Fund 
Bishop  J.  S.  Mills  Scholarship  Fund 
Elizabeth  A.  Mower  Beneficiary  Fund 
Laura  Muth  Scholarship  Fund 
Gene  P.  Neidig  Memorial  Scholarship 

Fund 
Philadelphia  Lebanon  Valley  College 

Alumni  Scholarship  Fund 
Rev.  H.  C.  Phillips  Scholarship  Fund 
Pickwell  Memorial  Music  Award 
Quincy  Evangelical  United  Brethren 
Orphanage  and  Home  Scholarship 
Fund 
Ezra  G.   Ranck  and  Wife  Scholarship 

Fund 
Levi  S.  Reist  Scholarship  Fund 
Dr.  G.  A.  Richie  Scholarship  Fund 
Emmett  C.  Roop  Scholarship  Fund 
Mary  Sachs  Foundation  Scholarship  Fund 
Harvey  L.  Seltzer  Scholarship  Fund 
Paul  Shannon  Scholarship  Fund 
Special  Fund 
Mary  Ann  Ocker  Spital  Scholarship 

Fund 
Rev.  and  Mrs.  Cawley  H.  Stine  Schol- 
arship Fund 
Dr. Alfred   D.    Strickler  and   Louise 
Kreider  Strickler  Pre-Medical  Schol- 
arship Fund 
Robert  L.  Unger  Scholarship  Fund 
Henry  J.  Wilder  Scholarship  Fund 
J.  C.  Winter  Scholarship  Fund 

Student  Loan  Funds 

Mary  A.  Dodge  Loan  Fund 
Daniel  Eberly  Scholarship  Fund 


Glant-Gibson-Glunt   Educational   Loan 

Fund 
Esther  and  Frank  Ligan  Fund 
International  Student  Loan  Fund 

Prize  Funds 

Bradford  C.  Alban   Memorial  Award 

Fund 
Class  of  1964  Quittie  Award  Fund 
The  L.  G.  Bailey  Award  Fund 
Henry  H.  Baish  Award 
Andrew   Bender   Memorial   Chemistry 

Fund 
Governor  James  H.  Duff  Award 
Florence  Wolf  Knauss  Memorial  Music 

Award 
LaVie  Coiiegienne  Award  Fund 
Max  F.  Lehman  Fund 
The  David  E.  Long  '00  and  Abram  M. 

Long  '17  Memorial  Fund 
People's  National  Bank  Achievement 

Award  in  Economics 
The  Rosenberry  Award 
Francis  H.  Wilson  Biology  Award 

Annuity  Funds 

Ruth  E.  Bender 

Ruth  Detwiler  Rettew 

Paul  F.  Fulk  and  Margaret  M.  Fulk 

Rev.   A.    H.    Kleffman   and   Erma   L. 

Kleffman 
E.  Roy  Line  Annuity 
Mary  Lutz  Mairs 
Esta  Wareheim 

Unitrust  Agreements 

Richard  L.  and  Ruth  W.  Davis  Fund 

Parke  H.  and  Cecil  B.  Lutz  Fund 

Dr.  Elizabeth  K.  Weisburger  Trust  Fund 


10 


ENROLLMENT  STATISTICS 


SUMMARY  OF  COLLEGE  YEAR,  1977-1978-CUMULATIVE 

DAY-TIME  FULL-TIME  PART-TIME                           TOTAL 

Men  Women  Total                 Men  Women  Total  Men  Women  Total 

Degree  Students 

Seniors 106  109  215                5  11  16  111  120  231 

Juniors Ill  103  214                2  8  10  113  111  224 

Sophomores   118  112  230                2  2  4  120  114  234 

Freshmen 180  155  335                4  3  7  184  158  342 

Non-degree 3  _12  15             r7_  29^  46^  _^  ^  61 

Day-Time  Total   .518  491  1009              30  53  83  548  544  1092 

Evening-Campus 

Classes 50  73  123  50  73  123 

Weekend  College .  .      2  3  5              42  48  90  44  51  95 

University  Center 

at  Harrisburg    ... 101  148  249  101  148  249 

Grand  Total  ... 520  494  1014             223  322  545  743  815  1559 
Names 

repeated  .... -22  -18  -40  -22  -18  -40 

Net  Total 520  494  1014             201  304  505  721  798  1519 

1977  Summer 

Session 103  133  236  103  133  236 


SUMMARY  OF  HRST  SEMESTER  1978-1979 


DAY-TIME 


Degree  Students 

Seniors 115 

Juniors 89 

Sophomores  .  .  .  .108 
Freshmen 172 

Non-degree 2 

Day-Time  Total   .486 
Evening-Campus 

Classes  

Weekend  College  . .      1 
University  Center 

at  Harrisburg    .  .  . 

Grand  Total.  .  .487 
Names 

repeated  .... 

Net  Total 487 


FULL- 

TIME 

PART-TIME 

TOTAL 

Women 

Total 

Men 

Women 

Total 

Men 

Women 

Total 

106 

220 

6 

9 

15 

121 

114 

235 

102 

191 

2 

4 

6 

91 

106 

197 

108 

216 

2 

1 

3 

110 

109 

219 

135 

307 

2 

3 

5 

174 

138 

312 

2 

4 

12 

21 

33 

14 

23 

37 

452 

938 

24 

38 

62 

510 

490 

1000 

31 

52 

83 

31 

52 

83 

1 

2 

54 

96 

150 

55 

97 

152 

62 

79 

141 

62 

79 

141 

453 

940 

171 

265 

436 

658 

718 

1376 

-12 

-20 

-32 

-12 

-20 

-32 

453 

940 

159 

245 

404 

646 

698 

1344 

11 


INFORMATION  FOR 
PROSPECTIVE  STUDENTS 

ADMISSION 

Students  are  admitted  to  Lebanon  Valley  College  on  the  basis  of  scholarly 
achievement,  intellectural  capacity,  character,  personality,  and  ability  to  profit  by 
college  experience. 

General  Information 

1.  All  communications  concerning  admission  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director 
of  Admissions,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  Annville,  Pennsylvania  17003. 

2.  Applications  should  be  submitted  as  early  as  possible  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
junior  or  the  beginning  of  the  senior  year  of  high  school  or  preparatory  school. 

3.  Applications  must  be  filed  on  forms  provided  by  the  office  of  admissions. 

4.  Each  application  must  be  accompanied  by  an  application  fee  of  $15.00.  This  fee 
is  not  refundable. 

5.  A  transcript  of  the  secondary  school  record  must  be  sent  by  the  principal  or 
counselor  to  the  director  of  admissions.  May  1  is  the  deadline  for  receiving  ap- 
plications. 

6.  A  student  transferring  from  another  collegiate  institution  must  present  an 
official  transcript  of  his  scholastic  record  and  evidence  of  honorable  dismissal. 

7.  All  new  students  are  required  to  present  on  or  before  August  15  the  official 
health  record  showing  a  physician's  report  of  medical  examination,  and 
previous  immunization  records. 

8.  All  applicants  shall  be  considered  for  admission  without  regard  to  their  race, 
color,  handicap,  sex,  religion,  creed,  or  ethnic  and  national  origin. 

Admission  is  based  on  total  information  submitted  by  the  applicant  or  in  his 
behalf.  Final  decision,  therefore,  cannot  be  reached  until  all  information  has  been 
supplied  by  the  applicant. 

Factors  Determining  Admission 

Each  candidate  for  admission  will  be  considered  individually  and  the 
decision  with  respect  to  admission  will  be  based  on  the  following  factors: 

1.  The  transcript  of  the  applicant's  secondary  school  record. 

2.  Recommendation  by  the  principal,  teachers,  and  other  responsible  persons  as 
to  the  applicant's  special  abilities,  integrity,  sense  of  responsibility,  serious- 
ness of  purpose,  initiative,  self-reliance,  and  concern  for  others. 

3.  A  personal  interview,  whenever  possible,  with  the  director  of  admissions  or  his 
designate. 

4.  College  Entrance  Examination  Board— test  results:  (a)  The  Scholastic  Aptitude 
Test  is  required  of  all  candidates  for  admission,  (b)  The  Achievement  Test  in 
Foreign  Languages,  while  not  required;  is  recommended,  especially  for  stu- 
dents who  wish  placement  in  higher  level  courses.  Those  seeking  entrance  in 
September  are  advised  to  take  these  tests  no  later  than  in  the  preceding 
December  and/or  January.  In  exceptional  cases  the  requirement  of  the  CEEB 
Tests  may  be  waived  at  the  discretion  of  the  Director  of  Admissions.  Full 
information  concerning  dates  and  locations  of  these  test  administrations  may 
be  obtained  by  writing  to:  College  Entrance  Examination  Board.  P.O.  592, 
Princeton,  NJ  08540. 

5.  Applicants  for  admission  may  submit  the  results  of  the  American  College  Test 
Program  in  lieu  of  the  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test. 

6.  Additional  test  results  may  be  required  in  special  cases. 

13 


Admission  to  the  Department  of  Music 

An  applicant  for  the  music,  sacred  music  or  music  education  major  is 
expected  to  satisfy  the  general  requirements  for  admission.  In  addition,  the 
candidate  must  appear  for  an  audition  before  members  of  the  music  faculty  and 
show  evidence  of: 

1.  An  acceptable  singing  voice  and  a  fairly  quick  sense  of  tone  and  rhythm; 

2.  Ability  to  sing  at  sight  hymn  and  folk  tunes  with  a  fair  degree  of  accuracy  and 
facility; 

3.  Ability  to  sing  or  to  play  the  piano,  organ  or  some  orchestral  instrument  at 
an  acceptable  level. 

Recommended  Units  for  Admission 

It  is  recommended  that  all  candidates  offer  16  units  of  entrance  credit  and 
graduation  from  an  accredited  secondary  school  or  submit  an  equivalency 
certificate  acquired  through  examination. 

Ten  of  the  16  units  offered  for  admission  must  be  from  the  following  subjects: 
English,  foreign  language,  mathematics,  science,  and  social  studies. 

An  applicant  for  admission  whose  preparatory  courses  do  not  coincide  with 
the  distribution  of  subject  units  (see  below]  may  be  considered  if  his  academic 
record  is  of  high  quality  and  if  he  appears  to  be  qualified  to  do  college  work 
satisfactorily.  All  entrance  deficiencies  must  be  removed  before  sophomore 
academic  status  will  be  granted. 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  SUBJECT  UNITS 

English   4  units 

Foreign  Language  (in  one  language]*   2 

Mathematics 2 

Science  (laboratory]    1 

Social  Studies     1 

Electives  6 

Total  required 16 

Transfer  Credit 

A  student  applying  for  advanced  standing  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  after 
having  attended  another  accredited  institution  of  higher  education  shall  submit 
an  official  transcript  of  his  record  and  evidence  of  good  standing  to  the  director  of 
admissions.  If  requested,  he  must  provide  copies  of  the  appropriate  catalogs  for 
the  years  of  attendance  at  the  other  institution  or  institutions. 

Credits  are  accepted  for  transfer  provided  that  the  grades  received  are  C-(1.7] 
or  better  and  the  work  is  equivalent  or  similar  to  work  offered  at  Lebanon  Valley 
College.  Grades  thus  transfered  count  for  hours  only,  not  for  quality  points. 

A  candidate  for  admission  holding  an  associate  degree  from  a  regionally 
accredited  college  can  be  admitted  with  full  acceptance  of  course  work  at  the  other 
institution.  Course  work  in  the  major  field,  however,  for  which  the  applicant  has 
received  a  D  will  not  be  accepted  on  transfer. 

Because  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  liberal  arts  institution,  consideration  of 
full  acceptance  of  the  associate  degree  will  be  granted  with  the  understanding  that 
the  candidate  has  followed  a  basic  course  of  study  compatible  with  the  academic 


*If  an  applicant  cannot  present  the  two  units  of  foreign  language,  he  will  be  required  to 
take  a  minimum  of  one  year  of  one  language  in  college.  His  credits  for  this  work  will  be 
counted  toward  graduation  requirements.  See  p.  24,  General  Requirements  concerning  the 
foreign  language  requiren^ent. 


14 


programs  and  curriculum  of  the  College.  Generally,  it  is  assumed  the  candidate 
has  followed  the  liberal  arts  curriculum  of  the  other  institution. 

Students,  with  the  exception  of  those  in  the  medical  technology  and  nursing 
programs,  who  transfer  from  two-year  institutions  are  required  to  earn  at  least  60 
hours  of  credit  from  a  four-year  institution  for  graduation.  A  minimum  of  30  hours 
must  be  taken  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  by  all  students  to  meet  the  residence 
requirement. 

Transfer  students  may  be  required  to  take  placement  examinations  to  demon- 
strate adequate  preparation  for  advanced  courses  at  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

Subject  to  the  conditions  listed  in  the  second  paragraph,  Lebanon  Valley 
College  will  recognize  for  transfer  credit  a  maximum  of  15  hours  of  USAFl  or 
DANTES  course  work  provided  such  credit  is  recommended  by  the  American 
Council  on  Education's  publication,  A  Guide  to  the  Evaluation  of  Educational 
Experiences  in  the  Armed  Services. 

Credit  will  not  be  granted  for  correspondence  courses. 


COLLEGE  LEVEL  EXAMINATION  PROGRAM  (CLEP) 

Credit  is  granted  for  acceptable  achievement  on  such  Subject  Examinations  of 
the  College  Level  Examination  Program  (CLEP)  as  are  approved  by  the  appropriate 
College  department  and  the  Curriculum  Committee.  Students  shall  have  achieved 
a  scaled  score  of  50  or  better  on  the  objective  section  and  shall  have  earned  a  grade 
of  C  or  better,  as  determined  by  the  appropriate  department,  on  the  essay  section  of 
the  examination. 

Six  (6]  semester  hours  credit  each  is  granted  for  achievement  of  a  composite 
score  in  the  50th  percentile  or  above  in  the  following:  General  Examinations  and 
English  Composition,  Humanities,  Mathematics,  Natural  Sciences  and  History. 
Three  (3)  hours  credit  will  be  applied  to  the  appropriate  distribution  in  the 
humanities,  natural  sciences,  and/or  social  sciences.  For  the  English  Composition 
Examination,  the  student  is  given  credit  for  English  111.  For  the  Mathematics 
Examination,  the  student  is  given  credit  for  Mathematics  100.  Request  for  credit 
must  be  submitted  to  the  Assistant  Dean  of  the  College  for  Weekend  College 
students,  and  to  the  Assistant  Dean  of  the  College  and  Registrar  for  other  students 
prior  to  the  student's  completion  of  30  semester  hours  credit. 

Examinations  may  be  taken  prior  to  admission  or  after  a  student  has 
matriculated  at  the  College.  Credit  is  given  only  to  students  who  have  matricu- 
lated at  the  College.  Applicants  for  admission  interested  in  receiving  credit  should 
consult  with  the  Office  of  Admissions;  current  students  should  consuh  with  the 
Vice  President  and  Dean  of  the  College.  Applicants  interested  in  the  CLEP 
Program  should  write  to  the  Program  Director,  College  Level  Examination 
Program,  P.  O.  Box  1821.  Princeton.  N.  J.  08540,  for  a  CLEP  Bulletin  of  Information 
for  Candidates,  which  provides  information  on  examinations  and  the  dates  and 
locations  of  test  administrations. 

Advanced  Placement 

Advanced  placement  in  appropriate  courses  and  credit  will  be  granted  to 
entering  students  who  make  scores  of  4  or  5  on  the  College  Board  Advanced 
Placement  examination.  For  scores  of  3,  final  determination  is  made  by  the 
appropriate  department. 

Advanced  Placement  without  credit  may  be  granted  on  the  basis  of  the 
Achievement  Tests  of  the  College  Board  examinations  or  such  other  proficiency 
tests  as  may  be  determined  by  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar  and  by 
the  chairman  of  the  department  in  which  advanced  placement  is  sought. 

15 


STUDENT  FINANCES 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  private,  non-profit  institution.  It  derives  its 
financial  support  from  endow^ment  and  gifts  from  the  United  Methodist  Church, 
alumni,  industry,  friends,  and  from  the  tuition,  fees,  and  other  charges  paid  by  the 
students.  The  cost  to  the  student  is  maintained  at  a  level  consistent  with  adequate 
facilities  and  high  quality  instruction. 

Fees  and  Deposits 

An  application  fee  of  $15.00  which  is  not  refundable  is  charged  each 
applicant  against  the  cost  of  processing  his  application  for  admission. 

An  admission  deposit  of  $100.00,  payable  within  thirty  days  of  notification 
of  acceptance,  is  required  of  all  new  (including  transfer]  students.  Until  this 
deposit  is  paid  the  student  is  not  guaranteed  a  place  in  the  entering  class.  The 
admission  deposit  is  not  refundable;  it  will  be  applied  to  the  student's  account 
upon  registration. 


1979-1980  Fee  Structure  for  Full-Time  Students 

Per  Year 

Comprehensive  Fee  $3720.00 

Fee  includes  the  following: 

Tuition         $3610.00 

Fees  110.00  

Total  Charges  for  Commuting  Student  $3720.00 

Room  (other  than  single)  690.00 

Single  in  a  single  occupancy — 110%  of  above  room  rate 

Single  in  a  double  occupancy — 150%  of  above  room  rate 
Dining  Hall  1050.00 

Total  Charges  for  Resident  Student  $5460.00** 

Private  Music  Instruction  (V2  hour  per  week) 

*Beyond  the  First  Half  Hour   $100.00  per  semester 

Transcript  in  Excess  of  One $2.00 


*The  first  half  hour  of  private  music  instruction  is  included  in  the  basic  tuition  charge 
of  all  full-time  majors  in  the  department  of  music. 

**The  fee  structure  (student  charges)  as  published  in  this  catalog  are  subject  to  change 
or  revision  at  the  discretion  of  the  college. 


A  health's  service  fee  is  collected  in  the  first  semester  of  the  student's  enroll- 
ment and  a  pro-rata  charge  applies  to  the  student  who  first  enrolls  in  the  second 
semester. 

The  contingency  deposit  in  the  amount  of  $50.00  must  be  made  before 
registration  and  is  required  of  all  full-time  students  and  will  be  refunded  upon 
graduation  or  withdrawal  from  college  provided  no  damage  has  been  caused  by 
the  student.  All  student  breakage  that  occurs  in  college-operated  facilities  will  be 
charged  against  this  deposit  and  the  amount  must  be  repaid  to  the  college  within 
30  days  of  notice  to  the  student. 

A  fee  of  $10.00  is  charged  each  student  who  does  not  register  for  classes 
during  any  prescribed  pre-registration  or  registration  period.  A  fee  of  $5.00  is 
charged  for  every  change  of  course  made  at  the  student's  request  after  registration. 

The  fee  for  part-time  students  (less  than  12  credit  hours  per  semester)  is 
$100.00  per  semester  credit  hours  plus  a  $5.00  registration  fee. 

16 


Auxiliary  School  Fee  Structure  (Evening,  Summer  and  Weekend) 

Tuition,  $75.00  per  semester  credit  hour 
Registration  fee.  $5.00 

Fee  for  registration  at  other  than  prescribed  time,  $5.00 
Change  of  registration  fee,  $5.00 

Payment  of  Fees  and  Deposits 

Semester  charges  are  due  and  payable  in  full  on  August  10  (first  semester)  and 
January  2  (second  semester)  as  a  condition  for  registration.  Those  preferring  to  pay 
semester  charges  in  monthly  installments  are  invited  to  consult  with  the  office  of 
the  controller  regarding  deferred  payment  plans  offered  by  various  financial 
institutions.  Arrangements  for  deferred  payment  plans  shall  be  completed  early 
enough  to  assure  payment  of  bills  no  later  than  the  date  that  semester  charges  are 
due  and  payable  (August  10  and  January  2). 

A  satisfactory  settlement  of  all  college  accounts  is  required  before  grades  are 
released,  transcripts  are  sent,  honorable  dismissal  granted,  or  degree  conferred. 

Refund  Policy 

Refunds,  as  indicated  below,  are  allowed  only  to  students  who  officially 

withdraw  from  the  college  by  completing  the  clearance  procedure: 

Period  after  registration    %  refunded  of  tuition 

Within  2  weeks 75% 

Within  3rd  week 50% 

Within  4th  week 25% 

After  4  weeks 0% 

The  above  refund  schedule  also  applies  to  part-time  students,  and  to  full-time 

students  who  withdraw  from  a  course  or  courses  so  as  to  reduce  the  remaining 

course  load  to  less  than  12  semester  credit  hours. 

A  refund  on  board  charge  is  allowed  for  the  period  beginning  after  honorable 

official  withdrawal.  No  refund  is  allowed  on  room  charges. 

No  refund  is  allowed  on  student  charges  when  a  student  retains  his  class 

standing  during  his  absence  from  college  because  of  illness  or  for  any  other 

reason. 

No  refund  is  allowed  on  room  deposit  except  when  withdrawal  results  from 

suspension   or  dismissal  by   college   action   or  when  withdrawal   results  from 

entrance  into  active  military  service. 

Residence  Halls 

Residence  hall  rooms  are  reserved  only  for  those  continuing  students  who 
make  an  advance  room  reservation  deposit  of  $50.00  (Receipt  must  be  presented  at 
the  time  of  room  sign-up  which  occurs  during  April.) 

Occupants  must  pay  for  any  breakage  or  loss  of  furniture  or  any  other  damage 
for  which  they  are  responsible.  Damage  not  assignable  to  an  individual  occupant 
may  be  prorated  to  accounts  of  occupants  within  the  responsible  area  (wing,  hall, 
floor,  dorm,  etc.). 

Each  room  in  the  men's  residence  halls  is  furnished  with  chests  of  drawers, 
book  case,  beds,  mattresses,  chairs,  and  study  tables.  Drapes  are  provided  in 
Funkhouser,  Hammond,  and  Keister  Halls.  Students  must  provide  bedding,  rugs, 
lamps,  and  all  other  furnishings. 

Each  room  in  the  women's  residence  halls  is  furnished  with  beds,  mattresses, 
chairs,  dressers,  book  case,  and  study  tables.  Drapes  are  provided  in  Mary  Green 
and  Vickroy  Halls.  Other  desired  furnishings  must  be  supplied  by  the  student. 

Students  rooming  in  residence  halls  may  not  sublet  their  rooms  to  commuting 
students  or  to  others. 

17 


Since  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  primarily  a  boarding  institution,  all  students 
are  required  to  live  in  college-owned  or  controlled  residence  halls.  Exceptions  to 
the  above  are:  married  students,  students  living  v^^ith  immediate  relatives,  or  those 
living  in  their  own  homes  who  commute  daily  to  the  campus. 

Should  vacancies  occur  in  any  of  the  residence  halls,  the  college  reserves  the 
right  to  require  students  rooming  in  the  community  to  move  into  a  residence  hall.. 

The  college  reserves  the  right  to  close  all  residence  halls  during  vacations  and 
between  semesters. 

The  college  reserves  the  right  to  inspect  any  student's  room  at  any  time. 
Periodic  inspection  of  residence  halls  will  be  made  by  members  of  the  administra- 
tion. 

The  college  is  not  responsible  for  loss  of  personal  possessions  by  the  students. 
It  is  recommended  that  each  student  consider  the  need  to  provide  private 
insurance  coverage. 


Meals 

All  resident  students  are  required  to  take  their  meals  in  the  college  dining 
rooms.  Commuting  students  may  arrange  for  meals  Monday  through  Friday,  on  a 
semester  basis,  if  space  is  available. 


Financial  Aid 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  financial  aid  to  deserving  students  who  have 
been  accepted  for  admission  insofar  as  aid  funds  permit.  With  the  exception  of 
Presidential  Scholarships,  which  are  awarded  on  merit,  financial  assistance  is 
granted  on  the  basis  of  need.  The  College  subscribes  to  the  philosophy  that  it  is  the 
responsibility  of  the  student  and  his  or  her  parents  to  bear  the  burden  of  the 
educational  costs  to  the  extent  possible,  but  realizes  that  it  is  extremely  difficult 
for  many  families  to  meet  these  expenses.  Lebanon  Valley  attempts  to  meet 
financial  need  by  allocating  available  funds  (from  federal,  state.  College,  and 
other  sources)  in  an  aid  package  which  usually  consists  of  grant,  loan,  and 
employment. 

Lebanon  Valley  College  does  not  have  its  own  financial  aid  application;  the 
Financial  Aid  Form  (FAF)  of  the  College  Scholarship  Service  is  used  in  determin- 
ing the  applicant's  financial  need.  It  is  not  necessary  to  await  acceptance  to  the 
College  before  applying  for  financial  aid.  Students  applying  for  assistance  through 
any  of  the  campus-based  federal  programs  (Supplemental  Education  Opportunity 
Grants,  National  Direct  Student  Loans,  College  Work-Study)  or  directly  from 
Lebanon  Valley  College  must  submit  the  FAF  to  the  College  Scholarship  Service, 
Box  176,  Princeton,  N.J.  08540  as  soon  as  possible  after  January  1.  Students 
applying  for  state  aid,  such  as  Pennsylvania  Higher  Education  Assistance  Agency 
(PHEAA)  Grants,  must  file  separate  applications  to  the  specific  state  agency.  Stu- 
dents may  apply  for  Basic  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  (BEOG)  by  completing 
the  appropriate  section  of  the  FAF  or  (for  Pa.  residents)  the  appropriate  section  of 
the  PHEAA  Grant  Application. 

Students  often  receive  assistance  from  sources  outside  the  College.  The 
amounts  and  sources  of  outside  aid  must  be  reported,  and  the  College  reserves  the 
right  to  adjust  the  total  financial  aid  package  accordingly. 

Financial  Aid  is  granted  for  one  year  and  is  reviewed  annually.  Eligibility  for 
renewal  is  based  upon  need  as  established  by  the  renewal  FAF  and  satisfactory 
academic  performance. 

The  following  is  a  brief  description  of  the  types  of  financial  aid  available  at 
Lebanon  Valley  College. 

18 


Presidential  Scholarships 

Awards  to  entering  students  by  the  President  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  based 
on  superior  high  school  performance  and  test  results.  A  cumulative  2.5  grade 
point  average  is  required  for  reneu^al  of  the  award.  This  is  the  only  grant  aid 
offered  by  LVC  which  is  not  based  on  financial  need. 

Grants-in-Aid 

LVC  grant  funds  awarded  to  students  demonstrating  financial  need,  as  de- 
termined by  the  FAF.  A  cum^ulative  2.0  grade-point  average  is  required  for 
renewal.  Annual  renewal  of  the  FAF  is  required  for  upperclassmen. 

Basic  Educational  Opportunity  Grants 

Federal  grants  to  students  demonstrating  financial  need  as  determined  by 
specific  Basic  Grants  criteria.  Students  may  apply  by  completing  appropriate  sec- 
tion of  FAF  or  PHEAA  Grant  Application  {Pa.  residents  only). 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity  Grants 

Grants  to  exceptionally  needy  students  from  federal  allocations  to  College. 
FAF  required. 

State  Grants 

Awards  to  student  directly  from  state  agencies.  Pennsylvania  State  grants  are 
based  on  financial  need  and  range  from  $100-$1,500  per  year.  Apply  directly  to 
state  agency. 

Student  Loans 

1.)  National  Direct  Sudent  Loans — Funded  by  federal  allocations  to  College 
with  a  maximum  yearly  loan  of  $1,000.  Repayment  with  3%  interest  begins  nine 
months  after  completion  of  studies.  FAF  required.  2.)  Guaranteed  Student  Loans 
— Banks  serve  as  lenders  of  these  funds,  which  are  federally  insured.  $2,500  yearly 
maximum  with  7%  interest  during  repayment.  Banks  provide  application  forms. 

Student  Employment 

1.)  College  Work-Study — On-campus  student  employment  assigned  as  part  of 
the  aid  package.  Federal  government  underwrites  80%  of  earnings.  2.)  Work-Aid — 
College-subsidized  on-campus  student  employment. 

For  further  information  write  to  the  Financial  Aid  Officer,  Lebanon  Valley 
College,  Annville,  Pennsylvania  17003. 


19 


m^'- 


^m^tlif 


ACADEMIC  PROGRAMS 
&  PROCEDURES 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES 

Lebanon  Valley  College  confers  four  bachelor  degrees.  They  are:  Bachelor  of 
Arts,  Bachelor  of  Science,  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Chemistry,  and  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Medical  Technology. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  is  conferred  upon  students  who  complete  the 
requirements  for  graduation  in  the  following  areas,  and  who  are  recommended  by 
the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Trustees:  English,  foreign  languages, 
French,  German,  history,  humanities,  music,  philosophy,  political  science, 
psychology,  religion,  sacred  music,  social  science,  sociology,  and  Spanish. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  is  conferred  upon  students  who  complete 
the  requirements  in  the  following  areas,  and  who  are  recommended  by  the  faculty 
and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Trustees:  accounting,  actuarial  science,  biochemis- 
try, biology,  business  administration,  chemistry,  computer  science,  cooperative 
engineering,  cooperative  forestry,  economics,  elementary  education,  mathemat- 
ics, music  education,  nursing,  physics,  and  social  service. 

As  appropriate,  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  is  con- 
ferred upon  the  student  who  completes  an  Individualized  Major  program. 

The  professional  degrees  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Chemistry  and  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Medical  Technology  are  conferred  upon  students  who  complete  the 
requirements  in  the  respective  professional  areas  and  who  are  recommended  by 
the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

Semester  Hours 

The  requirements  for  degrees  are  stated  in  "semester  hours  of  credit"  which 
are  based  upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of  courses  of  instruction.  Generally, 
one  semester  hour  of  credit  is  given  for  each  class  hour  a  week  throughout  the 
semester.  In  courses  requiring  laboratory  work,  not  less  than  two  hours  of 
laboratory  work  a  week  throughout  a  semester  are  required  for  a  semester  hour  of 
credit.  A  semester  is  a  term  of  approximately  15  weeks. 

Candidates  for  degrees  must  obtain  a  minimum  of  120  semester  hours  credit 
in  academic  work  in  addition  to  the  required  courses  in  freshman  and  sophomore 
physical  education.  However,  a  student  who  has  a  physical  disability  may  be 
excused  (on  recommendation  from  the  college  physician)  from  the  requirement  in 
physical  education. 

Major 

As  a  part  of  the  total  requirement  of  120  semester  hours  credit  in  academic 
work,  every  candidate  for  a  degree  must  present  at  least  24  semester  hours  of 
course  work  in  one  department  (this  is  his  major).  The  initial  selection  of  a  major 
may  be  indicated  or  recorded  any  time  before  the  end  of  the  student's  sophomore 
year.  Such  a  choice  of  major  must  be  made  by  the  time  of  registration  for  the  junior 
year. 

A  student  shall  be  accepted  as  a  major  in  a  department  so  long  as  he  has  not 
demonstrated  (by  achieving  less  than  the  minimum  grade-point  average  in  the 
desired  major)  that  he  is  incapable  of  doing  satisfactory  work  in  the  department.  A 
student  accepted  as  a  major  has  the  right  to  remain  in  that  department,  except  by 
special  action  of  the  dean  of  the  college,  as  long  as  he  is  in  college. 

Substitution  or  waiving  of  specific  courses  required  for  the  major  may  be 
approved  by  the  departmental  chairman  or  advisers  upon  student  request. 

21 


A  student  desiring  to  major  in  two  subject  areas  should  consult  his  current 
adviser  and  the  chairman  of  the  department  of  his  proposed  second  major 
concerning  requirements  and  procedure. 

Examinations 

Candidates  for  degrees  are  required  to  take  end  of  course  examinations  if 
scheduled  by  the  instructors. 

Residence  Requirement 

Degrees  will  be  conferred  only  upon  those  candidates  earning  in  residence  a 
minimum  of  30  semester  hours  out  of  the  last  36  taken  before  the  date  of  the 
conferring  of  the  degree,  or  before  the  transfer  to  a  cooperating  program. 
Residence  credit  is  given  for  course  work  completed  in  regular  day  classes  and  in 
Weekend  College,  evening,  and  summer  session  courses  taken  on  campus. 

Grade-Point  Averages 

Candidates  for  degrees  must  also  obtain  a  cumulative  grade-point  average  of 
1.75,  computed  in  accordance  with  the  grading  system  indicated  below. 

In  addition,  candidates  must  earn  a  grade-point  average  of  2.0  in  the  major 
field  of  study. 

Only  grades  received  in  courses  taken  on  campus,  in  courses  staffed  by  Leba- 
non Valley  College  at  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg,  or  in  courses  in  the 
LVC-Central  College  International  Studies  Program  are  used  to  determine  grade- 
point  averages. 

System  of  Grading  and  Quality  Points 

The  work  of  a  student  in  each  subject  is  graded  A,  B,  C,  D,  or  F,  with  the  plus 
and  minus  available  to  faculty  members  who  wish  to  use  them.  These  grades  have 
the  following  meanings: 

A — distinguished  performance 

B — superior  work 

C — general  satisfactory  achievement 

D — course  requirements  and  standards  satisfied  at  a  minimum  level 

F — course  requirements  and  standards  not  satisfied  at  a  minimum  level 

A  student  may  not  take  any  course  which  has  as  a  prerequisite  a  course  that  he 
has  failed.  If  a  student  fails  in  a  course  twice,  he  may  not  take  it  a  third  time. 

In  addition  to  the  above  grades  the  symbols  "1,"  "W,"  "WP,"  and  "WF"  are 
used  on  grade  reports  and  in  college  records.  "I"  indicates  that  the  work  is 
incomplete  (that  the  student  has  postponed  with  the  prior  consent  of  the  instruc- 
tor and  for  substantial  reason,  certain  required  work),  but  otherwise  satisfactory. 
This  work  must  be  completed  with  the  first  six  weeks  of  the  beginning  of  the 
semester  following,  or  the  "1"  will  be  converted  to  an  F.  Appeals  for  extension 
of  time  beyond  six  weeks  must  be  presented  in  writing  to  the  assistant  dean  of  the 
college  not  later  than  one  week  after  the  beginning  of  the  next  semester. 

W  indicates  withdrawal  from  a  course  through  the  eighth  week  of  classes  in 
the  semester.  In  case  of  a  withdrawal  from  a  course  thereafter  through  the  last  day 
of  classes  in  the  semester,  the  symbol  "WP"  will  be  entered  if  the  student's  work  is 
satisfactory,  and  " WF"  is  the  work  is  unsatisfactory.  The  grade  of  "WF"  is  counted 
as  an  F  in  calculating  grade-point  averages. 

For  courses  in  which  no  academic  credit  is  involved,  student  work  is 
evaluated  as  either  S  (Satisfactory)  or  U  (Unsatisfactory). 

For  each  semester  hour  credit  in  a  course  in  which  a  student  is  graded  A,  he 
receives  4  quality  points:  A-,  3.7;  B+ ,  3.3;  B,  3;  B-,  2.7;  etc.  F  carries  no  credit 
and  no  quality  points. 

22 


Pass/Fail  Grading 

Degree  Students  prior  to  first  semester  1979-1980. 
After  attaining  sophomore  standing  (28  semester  hours  credit),  a  student  may  elect 
to  take  up  to  two  courses  per  semester  and  one  one-semester  course  per  summer 
session  on  a  P/F  basis,  but  only  six  of  these  courses  can  be  counted  toward 
graduation  requirements. 

Any  courses  not  being  counted  toward  the  fulfillment  of  the  general  require- 
ments or  the  major  requirements  may  be  optional  on  a  pass/fail  basis.  Any 
prerequisite  course  taken  on  a  P/F  basis  and  successfully  completed  will  satisfy 
the  prerequisite. 

Each  department  may.  with  the  approval  of  the  dean  of  the  college,  designate 
certain  courses,  including  those  required  for  the  major,  in  which  the  grading  will 
be  P/F  for  all  students  enrolled.  Such  courses  may  not  be  taken  for  regular  grading 
even  if  a  student  desires  it.  Any  course  so  designated  shall  not  count  toward  the 
total  number  of  courses  available  P/F  to  the  student. 

Any  course  taken  on  a  P/F  basis  will  be  graded  P/H  (pass  with  distinction),  P 
(pass),  or  F  (fail).  P/H  is  defined  as  B+  and  up,  P  is  defined  as  D-  through  B;  and  F 
is  below  D-. 

Any  course  completed  on  a  P/F  basis  shall  be  counted  toward  graduation 
requirements,  but  only  an  F  grade  shall  be  included  in  computing  the  grade-point 
average.  All  passing  grades  shall  be  treated  on  the  record  as  is  transfer  credit. 

The  student  will  indicate  at  registration  or  through  the  eighth  week  of  classes 
in  the  semester  the  courses  that  he  has  elected  to  take  on  a  P/F  basis.  He  may,  with 
the  approval  of  his  adviser,  change  his  option  for  P/F  grading  'to  the  regular 
grading  basis  or  from  regular  grading  to  P/F  grading  during  the  same  period. 

Instructors  may  be  informed  of  the  grading  option  selected  by  the  student 
only  after  semester  grades  in  the  course  have  been  recorded.  Instructors  will 
submit  for  each  student  an  A  through  F  grade  which  will  be  converted  to  P/H,  P,  or 
F  for  students  selecting  this  grading  system. 

Persons  beginning  study  as  degree  students  in  the  first  semester,  1979-1980, 
and  thereafter. 

Pass/Fail  requirements  are  the  same  as  listed  above  with  the  following  excep- 
tions: (1).  Courses  which  are  prerequisites  or  corequisities  for  major  courses  may 
not  be  taken  P/F.  (2).  Election  of  the  P/F  option  shall  be  completed  within  the  first 
two  weeks  of  the  semester;  a  student  may  remove  a  course  from  P/F  during  the 
first  eight  weeks  of  the  semester. 

Transfer  Students 

Students  transferring  from  two-year  institutions  (except  those  in  the  medical 
technology  and  nursing  programs)  are  required  to  have  at  least  60  hours  of  work  at 
a  four-year  institution  for  graduation.  All  students  must  take  a  minimum  of  30 
hours  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  to  meet  the  residence  requirement.  (See  page  22.) 

Students  transferring  from  other  institutions  must  secure  a  grade-point 
average  of  1.75  or  better  in  work  taken  at  Lebanon  Valley  College,  and  must  meet 
the  2.0  grade-point  average  in  their  major  field. 

Attendance  at  May  Baccalaureate  and  Commencement  Programs 

All  seniors  are  required  to  attend  the  May  baccalaureate  and  commencement 
programs  at  which  their  degrees  are  to  be  conferred. 

Degrees  will  be  conferred  in  absentia  only  for  the  most  compelling  reasons 
and  only  upon  a  written  request  approved  by  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and 
registrar.  Such  requests  must  be  submitted  at  least  two  weeks  prior  to  the  date  of 
commencement. 

Faculty  approval  is  required  for  the  conferring  of  the  degree  and  the  issuance 
of  the  diploma  in  any  case  of  willful  failure  to  comply  with  these  regulations. 

23 


GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS       ^^^^^,^^ 

AREA  Hours 

1.  Writing  Skills   6 

2.  Religion  and/or  Philosophy 

(2  one-semester  courses)  ....  6 

3.  Natural  Science 

(2  one-semester  courses  in 
biology,  chemistry,  mathe- 
matics, physics,  and  psy- 
chology. One  course  must  be 
a  laboratory  course.)   6-8* 

4.  Individual  and  Group  Be- 
havior (3  one-semester 
courses  in  economics,  his- 
tory, political  science,  psy- 
chology, religion,  and  sociol- 
ogy— from  at  least  2  different 
disciplines)    9-10* 

5.  Foreign  Language — 

— either  a,  b,  c,  d,  or  e    3-6-8* 

a.  2  elementary  foreign  lan- 
guage courses  in  one  lan- 
guage (6  sem  hrs) 

b.  2  intermediate  foreign 
language  courses  in  one 
language  (6  sem  hrs) 

c.  1  intermediate  foreign 
language  and  1  computer 
language  course  (6  sem 
hrs) 

d.  1  advanced  foreign  lan- 
guage course  (3  sem  hrs) 

e.  2  additional  General  Re- 
quirements, exclusive  of 
Phys  Ed. 

6.  Arts  and  Letters 

(2  one-semester  courses  in 
art  literature,  music,  and 
philosophy)   6 


Physical  Education 

(2     one-semester     courses 

graded  S/U)    2 


REQUIRED  OR 
ELIGIBLE  COURSES 

En  111, 112 

Re  111, 112, 120, 222; 
Ph  110,  228,  231 

Bi  101/102,  111/112,  302,  309;  Ch  101, 
102,  103,  104,  111,  112;  Ma  100,  102, 
111,  161,  170;  Phy  100,  103,  104,  110, 
111,  112;  Psy  110, 235, 236, 237,  238, 
444 

EG  110/120;  Geo  112;  all  history  courses 
except  Hi  390,  412,  500;  MS  260; 
PS  111/112,  211,  212,  311,  312,  314, 
411,  413;  Psy  321,  337,  343,  346;  Re 
140;  So  110,  122, 211,  232,  242,  251, 
272,  282,  321;  appropriate  Interdisi- 
plinary  Courses 


Fr,  Ger,  Gk,  La,  Sp  101,  102  courses 


Fr,  Ger,  Gk,  La,  Sp,  111,  112  courses 


Fr,  Ger,  Gk, 
CP  170 


La,  Sp  111,112  courses; 


Fr,  Ger,  Sp  115,  215 

Any  2  additional  courses  listed  under 
Areas  2,  3,  4,  6,  not  in  the  major 
field(s)  or  otherw^ise  required  for  the 
major(s) 

Ar  110,  201,  203;  En  221/222,  225/226, 
227/228,  250-299,  321/322,  337,  338, 
339;  all  foreign  language  courses 
numbered  116  or  higher  except  FL 
270,  290;  Mu  100  or  341/342;  Ph  340; 
appropriate  Interdisciplinary  Courses. 

PE  110 


*The  number  of  hours  will  depend  upon  the  selection  of  courses. 

Total  hours  required  for  graudation,  including  the  general  requirements,  courses 
required  for  the  major  and  electives:  120  academic  semester  hours  credit  and  2  semester 
hours  credit  for  Physical  Education. 

No  courses  from  a  student's  first  major  field  may  be  used  to  meet  any  of  the  General 
Requirements.  However,  social  science  majors  are  exempted  from  Area  4  requirements  and 
humanities  majors  are  exempted  from  Area  6  requirements. 

Certain  requirements  may  be  earned  through  proficiency  examinations,  the  Advanced 
Placement  Program,  and  the  College-Level  Examination  Program.  Further  information  may 
be  obtained  from  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar. 

24 


THE  COLLEGE  HONORS  PROGRAM 

The  Honors  Program  provides  an  opportunity  for  superior  students  to  develop 
and  to  challenge  their  intellectual  abilities,  to  challenge  their  originiality  and 
intellectual  curiosity,  and  to  nurture  academic  excellence  both  in  students  and 
faculty. 

The  Program  has  tu^o  phases:  lower  division  Freshman-Sophomore  Honors: 
upper  division  Honor  Studies  and  Departmental  Honors. 

Prospective  freshmen  are  selected,  after  interviews  with  members  of  the 
Honors  Subcommittee  of  the  Academic  Life  Committee  and  Honors  instructors,  on 
the  basis  of  class  rank,  CEEB  scores,  Presidential  Scholarship  Examinations,  and 
other  useful  information.  Others  may  be  chosen  by  a  similar  procedure  by  the 
Honors  Subcommittee  toward  the  end  of  the  first  semester,  on  the  basis  on 
recommendations  invited  from  all  instructors. 

To  graduate  with  college  honors,  a  student  must  earn  twelve  semester  hours 
in  lower  division  honors  and  nine  semester  hours  in  upper  division  honors.  In 
upper  division  work,  three  semester  hours  must  be  gained  in  Honors  Studies  and 
three  in  Independent  Study.  A  student's  grade-point  average  must  be  at  least  3.0 
overall  and  in  Honors  work. 

FRESHMAN-SOPHOMORE  HONORS 

Freshman-Sophomore  Honors  may  be  conducted  in  either  lecture  or  seminar 
format;  all  students  are  expected  to  contribute  to  seminar  discussion.  Participation 
in  Freshman-Sophomore  Honors  is  restricted  to  Honor  students;  exceptions  are 
made  only  with  consent  of  the  instructor  and  the  Honors  Subcommittee  of  the 
Academic  Life  Committee.  Enrollment  in  Freshman-Sophomore  Honors  sections 
should  be  limited  to  15. 

Freshman-Sophomore  Honors  sections  are  offered  in  the  following  courses 
which  meet  the  appropriate  general  and  distribution  requirements;  English 
111/112,  English  227/228.  Religion  111/112,  Economics  110/120,  Foreign  Lan- 
guage 315H/316H,  History  125/126,  Mathematics  170,  and  Psychology  110. 

HONORS  STUDIES 

Honors  Study  is  a  team  effort  in  independent  work  with  the  guidance  of  one 
or  more  instructors.  Honors  Study  generally  deals  with  an  interdepartmental 
subject,  is  restricted  to  Honors  Students  at  the  junior-senior  level,  and  consists  of  a 
team  of  no  more  than  seven  students.  An  Honors  student  may  participate  in  an 
Honors  Study  after  completing  nine  hours  in  Freshman-Sophomore  honors.  In 
appropriate  instances,  the  Curriculum  Committee  will  be  petitioned  to  approve 
courses  to  meet  the  distribution  requirements. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Departmental  Honors  is  taken  in  the  major  field  in  junior  and  senior  years. 
The  program  consists  of  a  reading  and/or  research  program  producing  a  thesis  or 
an  essay.  The  latter  is  done  on  a  problem  or  subject  of  the  student's  own  choosing 
under  the  supervision  of  a  faculty  adviser.  Opportunity  also  exists  to  do  creative 
work.  A  maximum  of  nine  hours  credit  may  be  earned  in  departmental  honors. 

AUXILIARY  SCHOOLS 

Summer,  Evening,  Weekend  College,  Extension 

Summer  sessions,  evening  classes  on  campus.  Weekend  College,  and  exten- 
sion classes  in  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg  enable  teachers,  state  employ- 
ees, and  others  in  active  employment  to  attend  college  courses,  and  secure  aca- 
demic degrees.  By  a  careful  selection  of  courses  made  in  consultation  with  the  ap- 
propriate adviser,  students  can  meet  many  of  the  requirements  for  a  baccalaureate 

25 


degree.  Some  courses  may  be  taken  for  provisional  and  permanent  teaching  cer- 
tification; others  may  be  taken  with  the  aim  of  transferring  credit  to  another  insti- 
tution. Many  courses  lead  to  professional  advancement  or  are  of  direct  benefit  to 
persons  in  business  or  industry,  while  others  assist  in  broadening  the  student's 
vocational,  social,  and  cultural  background. 

Brochures  are  published  for  the  summer  session,  the  evening  classes,  and 
Weekend  College.  For  copies  or  for  other  information  write  to  the  Assistant  Dean 
of  the  College.  Lebanon  Valley  College,  Annville,  Pennsylvania  17003. 

Summer  Session 

Regular  enrolled  students  may,  by  taking  summer  session  courses,  meet  the 
requirements  for  the  bachelor's  degree  in  three  years. 

Campus  Evening  Classes 

Evening  classes  are  offered  on  the  campus,  Monday  through  Thursday,  and 
carry  residence  credit. 

The  evening  school  includes  an  ENRICH  Program  in  Business  Administra- 
tion or  Accounting.  The  student  receives  a  certificate  of  achievement  upon  suc- 
cessful completion  of  the  60  semester-hour  program. 

Weekend  College   

The  Weekend  College  offers  full  degree  programs  in  Accounting,  Business 
Administration,  Nursing,  Social  Science-Sociology,  and  Social  Service,  with  all  of 
the  necessary  classes  meeting  on  Friday  nights  and  Saturdays.  These  residence 
credit  classes  are  primarily  intended  for  off-campus  adults  interested  in  pursuing 
a  college  degree. 

University  Center  at  Harrisburg 

Extension  classes  are  offered  at  the  Center's  campus,  2991  North  Front  Street, 
Harrisburg,  17110,  on  Monday  through  Thursday  evenings  and  on  Saturday  morn- 
ings during  the  regular  academic  semesters.  Classes  m.eet  during  the  summer  ses- 
sions on  various  evenings.  Lebanon  Valley  College's  extension  program  in 
Harrisburg  is  carried  on  in  conjunction  with  Elizabethtown  College,  Temple 
University,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University,  and  the  University  of  Pennsylvania. 

All  students  admitted  and  enrolled  for  a  degree  at  the  college  are  required  to 
secure  the  permission  of  their  advisers  and  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  prior 
to  enrolling  for  any  courses  at  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg. 

For  details  pertaining  to  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg  write  or  call  the 
director  at  2991  North  Front  Street,  Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania  17110,  at  238-9694 
during  the  day  or  238-9696  during  the  evening. 

GERMANTOWN  METROPOLITAN  SEMESTER 

Lebanon  Valley  College  sponsors  an  urban  semester  program  through  the 
Metropolitan  Collegiate  Center  of  Germantown,  Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania.  This 
is  a  one-semester  program  of  a  pre-professional  internship  and  academic  seminars 
relating  to  the  city.  The  program  is  designed  especially  for  students  who  are 
interested  in  cities  and  the  opportunity  of  living  and  working  in  a  pluralistic  urban 
world;  or  who  want  the  practical  and  personal  advantages  of  a  concrete  work 
experience  especially  for  purposes  of  vocational  and  educational  decisions. 

Internship  placements  are  available  in  a  diverse  range  of  social  service,  mental 
health,  law  enforcement,  medical  research,  and  health-care-delivery  agencies.  15 
academic  credits  are  offered  in  the  program.  Metropolitan  Semester  students  live 
in  housing  approved  by  the  Center  staff.  Total  costs  are  comparable  to  those  of  a 
semester  on  campus. 
Adviser:  Dr.  Lockwood 

26 


INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES  PROGRAM 

Lebanon  College  offers  an  International  Studies  Program  in  cooperation 
with  Central  College,  Pella,  Iowa.  This  affiliation,  which  is  shared  with  twenty 
three  other  colleges  and  universities  across  the  country,  enables  Lebanon  Valley 
students  to  enroll  for  foreign  study  in  France,  Germany- Austria,  Spain,  Mexico, 
Wales  or  England  while  maintaining  their  regular  enrollment  status  at  Lebanon 
Valley  and  their  college  and  other  financial  aid. 

Students  may  also  study  abroad  under  a  program  administered  by  an 
accredited  American  college  or  university,  or  in  a  program  approved  by  Lebanon 
Valley  College.  Such  students  must  have  maintained  a  3.0  average  at  Lebanon 
Valley  College,  must  be  proficient  in  the  language  spoken  in  the  country  in  which 
they  will  study,  and  must  be  a  person  who,  in  the  judgment  of  the  assistant  dean 
of  the  college  and  registrar  and  the  faculty,  will  be  worthy  representatives  of  their 
own  country.  Their  proposed  courses  of  study  must  be  approved  by  the  appropri- 
ate departmental  chairman  and  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar. 
Advisers;  Dr.  Igiesias,  Dr.  Ford 

ENVIRONMENTAL  BIOLOGY 

Lebanon  Valley  College  maintains  active  programs  in  the  following  areas  of 
Environmental  Biology:  Ecology;  Marine  Biology;  Field  Botany  and  Zoology; 
Forestry  (Cooperative  Program);  Environmental  Management  (Cooperative  Pro- 
gram). 

Field  trips  to  the  College  of  Marine  Studies,  University  of  Delaware,  and  the 
University  of  Georgia  Marine  Institute,  Sapelo  Island,  Georgia,  are  made  by 
students  involved  in  the  Marine  Biology  and  Ecology  programs.  Students  in  the 
cooperative  forestry  and  environmental  management  programs  visit  Duke  Univer- 
sity each  year.  Freshwater  pond  and  forest  ecosystems  which  are  used  for 
ecological  study  are  located  on  the  campus  at  Kreiderheim.  Wilderness  areas 
which  include  the  transition  zone  between  southern  and  northern  forests  occur 
within  a  few  miles  of  campus.  Flooded  limestone  quarries  are  available  for 
students  who  desire  more  intensive  training  in  aquatic  ecology  and/or  limnology. 

Internships  in  a  number  of  ecologically  related  areas  have  been  arranged  with 
local  industries  and  municipal  governmental  agencies.  On  occasion  these  lead 
directly  to  future  employment. 

The  faculty  of  the  department  of  biology  includes  professors  specifically 
trained  in  and  actively  engaged  in  research  in  the  areas  of  marine  biology, 
ecology,  plant  taxonomy,  animal  taxonomy,  and  plant  physiology.  All  hold 
doctoral  degrees  in  their  area  of  specialty  and  all  involve  students  in  their  research 
efforts.  The  result  has  been  an  unusually  high  degree  of  achievement  in  student 
research  projects,  a  number  of  which  have  been  published  in  prominent  scientific 
journals. 

It  is  the  experience  of  the  department  that  students  well  trained  in  all  areas  of 
science  who  have  an  understanding  of  mathematical  methods,  chemical 
techniques,  and  biological  theory  meet  with  the  greatest  success  both  in  finding 
employment  and  in  their  future  graduate  work.  Therefore  a  well-balanced  pro- 
gram of  courses  in  science  is  stressed  with  emphasis  on  those  important  for 
environmental  biology,  and  students  in  these  areas  are  encouraged  to  obtain  a 
biology  major.  However,  if  a  student  wishes  his/her  major  to  be  in  a  more 
specialized  area  such  as  Marine  Biology,  this  can  be  arranged  through  the 
College's  Individualized  Major  Program. 
Advisers:  Dr.  Williams,  Dr.  Paul  Wolf 

MERRILL-PALMER  INSTITUTE  SEMESTER 

Usually  during  their  junior  year,  selected  students  may  spend  a  semester  in 
Detroit,  Michigan,  at  the  renowned  Merrill-Palmer  Institute,  enrolled  for  courses 

27 


and  involved  in  a  practicum  experience,  either  working  v^^ith  children  or  with 
community  organization.  The  theme  of  the  study  program  is  "Children  and 
Families  in  Urban  Communities."  In  the  student  residences  small  groups  from 
many  different  colleges  and  universities  and  from  all  sections  of  the  United  States 
participate  cooperatively  in  the  management  and  social  affairs  of  their  houses, 
with  12-18  persons  in  each  residence. 
Adviser:  Dr.  Lasky 

WASHINGTON  SEMESTER  PROGRAM 

Students  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  are  eligible  to  participate  in  the  Washing- 
ton Semester  Program  which  is  offered  in  cooperation  with  American  University 
in  Washington,  D.  C.  This  includes  the  study  of  the  American  governmental  and 
political  system  as  a  whole  (the  Washington  Semester),  the  urban  polity  and 
intergovernmental  decision-making  in  urban  affairs  (the  Washington  Urban 
Semester],  American  foreign  policy  formulation  and  implementation  (the  Foreign 
Policy  Semester],  and  international  development  (the  International  Development 
Semester].  Students  in  the  first  two  programs  take  a  seminar,  which  includes 
meetings  with  public  officials,  political  figures,  private  interest  group  representa- 
tives, and  other  knowledgeable  persons;  an  individual  research  project  deter- 
mined in  consultation  with  instructors  at  Lebanon  Valley  and  American  Univer- 
sity; and  either  an  elective  course  at  the  university  or  an  internship  program 
arranged  with  a  political  or  administrative  office  in  Washington.  The  Foreign 
Policy  Semester  and  the  International  Development  semester  are  modules,  ex- 
pected to  occupy  the  student's  full  academic  time. 

The  program  is  open  to  juniors  and  seniors  in  any  major  field  who  have  at 
least  a  2.5  average,  have  had  the  basic  courses  in  American  national  government, 
and  are  recommended  by  the  chairman  of  the  department  of  history  and  political 
science.  Two  students  from  the  college  will  be  selected  each  November  by 
American  University  to  participate  in  the  following  spring  semester.  Students  in 
the  program  have  the  same  status  as  full-time  undergraduates  at  American 
University  and  will  receive  full  credit  for  one  semester's  work  toward  their  degree 
at  Lebanon  Valley  College. 
Adviser:  Dr.  Geffen 

ACADEMIC  PROCEDURES 
Registration  and  Pre-Registration 

Students  are  required  to  register  for  classes  on  official  registration  days  and 
on  designated  pre-registration  days  of  each  semester.  Information  concerning  the 
dates  for  official  registration  and  pre-registration  is  listed  in  the  college  calendar, 
page  2. 

Late  Registration  and  Pre-Registration 

Students  registering  later  than  the  days  and  hours  specified  will  be  charged  a 
late  registration  fee  of  ten  dollars.  Students  desiring  to  register  later  than  one  week 
after  the  opening  of  the  semester  will  be  admitted  only  by  special  permission  of 
the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar.  Students  who  do  not  pre-register 
during  the  designated  time  will  be  charged  a  late  pre-registration  fee  of  ten 
dollars. 

Change  of  Registration 

Change  of  registration,  including  pass/fail  elections,  when  necessary,  must  be 
made  over  the  signature  of  the  adviser.  In  most  instances  registration  for  a  course 
will  not  be  permitted  after  the  course  has  been  in  session  for  one  full  week.  With 
the  permission  of  his  adviser,  a  student  may  withdraw  from  a  course  at  any  time 

28 


through  the  last  day  of  classes  of  the  semester.  (See  page  22  for  grading  policy.)  A 
fee  of  $5.00  is  charged  for  every  change  of  course  made  at  the  student's  request 
after  registration. 

Orientation  for  New  Students 

A  spring  orientation  day  is  held  annually  for  incoming  students.  At  this  time 
the  activities  include  a  general  orientation  to  the  college,  counseling  with 
academic  advisers,  and  pre-registration  for  courses.  Special  sessions  for  parents 
are  a  vital  part  of  the  program. 

An  orientation  period  of  several  days  at  the  beginning  of  the  college  year  is 
provided  to  help  new^  students,  both  freshmen  and  transfers,  to  become  familiar 
with  their  academic  surroundings.  This  time  is  devoted  to  lectures,  social 
activities,  and  informal  meetings  with  upperclassmen  and  members  of  the  faculty. 

During  the  first  semester  all  freshmen  and  transfer  students  are  required  to 
participate  in  an  orientation  course  which  includes  a  series  of  lectures  and 
discussions  on  college  procedures,  campus  activities,  and  methods  of  study. 

Discontinuance  of  Course 

The  college  reserves  the  right  to  withdraw  or  discontinue  any  course  for 
which  an  insufficient  number  of  students  have  registered. 

Repetition  of  Courses 

No  student  shall  be  permitted  to  repeat  for  credit,  grade,  or  quality  points  a 
course  for  which  he  has  already  received  a  passing  grade. 

If  a  course  on  campus  or  staffed  by  Lebanon  Valley  College  at  the  University 
Center  at  Harrisburg  is  failed  but  is  later  repeated  and  passed  at  either  location,  the 
failure  is  ignored  in  calculation  of  cumulative  grade-point  averages  in  the 
semester  in  which  the  course  is  passed  or  thereafter.  The  grade  of  F  remains  on  the 
permanent  record  card,  with  an  asterisk  used  to  indicate  that  the  course  was 
repeated  and  passed. 

Concurrent  Courses 

A  student  enrolled  for  a  degree  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  may  not  carry 
courses  concurrently  at  any  other  institution  without  the  prior  consent  of  his 
adviser  and  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar.  Neither  may  a  regular 
student  carry  work  concurrently  in  evening.  Weekend  College,  or  extension 
courses  without  the  prior  permission  of  his  adviser  and  the  assistant  dean  of  the 
college  and  registrar. 

A  student  registered  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  may  not  obtain  credit  for 
courses  taken  in  other  colleges,  including  the  University  Center  at  Harrisburg, 
during  the  summer  unless  such  courses  have  prior  approval  of  his  adviser  and  the 
assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar. 

Auditing  Courses 

Students  are  permitted  to  register  to  audit  courses  with  the  consent  of  the 
instructor  and  the  academic  adviser.  Audited  courses  are  counted  in  considering 
the  course  load  relative  to  limit  of  hours  (overload).  The  regular  tuition  fee  is 
charged  to  part-time  students.  Neither  grade  nor  credit  is  given  either  at  the  time 
the  course  is  audited  or  thereafter.  A  grade  of  AU  (Audit)  will  not  be  entered  on 
the  student's  permanent  record  card  if  he  seldom  attended  classes.  A  change  of 
registration  from  credit  to  audit  or  from  audit  to  credit  must  be  accomplished  by 
the  end  of  the  fifth  week  of  classes  of  the  semester. 

29 


Faculty  Advisers 

Each  student  is  assigned  a  faculty  adviser  who  serves  in  the  capacity  of 
friendly  counselor. 

The  initial  selection  of  a  major  may  be  indicated  or  recorded  any  time  before 
the  end  of  the  student's  sophomore  year.  Such  a  choice  of  major  must  be  made  by 
the  time  of  registration  for  the  junior  year.  A  student  shall  be  accepted  as  a  major 
in  a  department  so  long  as  he  has  not  demonstrated  (by  achieving  less  than  the 
minimum  grade-point  average  in  the  desired  major)  that  he  is  incapable  of  doing 
satisfactory  work  in  the  department.  The  chairman  or  another  adviser  of  the 
department  in  which  the  student  has  elected  to  major  becomes  the  adviser  for  that 
student.  The  adviser's  approval  is  necessary  before  a  student  may  register  for  or 
withdraw  from  any  course,  select  or  change  his  pass/fail  elections,  or  change 
registration  from  credit  to  audit  or  from  audit  to  credit. 

Arrangement  of  Schedules 

Each  student  arranges  his  course  of  study  and  his  class  schedule  in  consulta- 
tion with,  and  by  approval  of,  his  faculty  adviser.  Students  already  in  attendance 
do  this  during  pre-registration  periods.  New  students  accomplish  this  on  the 
spring  orientation  day. 

Limit  of  Hours 

To  be  classified  as  full-time,  a  student  must  take  at  least  twelve  semester  hours 
of  work.  Sixteen  semester  hours  of  academic  work  is  the  maximum  permitted 
without  approval  of  the  adviser  and  special  permission  of  the  assistant  dean  of  the 
college  and  registrar.  Audited  courses  are  counted  in  determining  the  course  load. 

The  privilege  of  carrying  extra  hours  will  be  granted  only  for  compelling 
reasons  and  only  when  a  minimum  3.0  grade-point  average  has  been  achieved  in 
the  previous  semester  or  the  student's  cumulative  grade-point  average  is  at  least 
3.0. 

Academic  Classification 

Students  are  classified  academically  at  the  beginning  of  each  year.  Member- 
ship in  the  sophomore,  junior,  or  senior  classes  is  granted  to  those  students  who 
have  earned  a  minimum  of  28,  56,  or  84  semester  hours  credit  respectively. 

All  entrance  deficiencies  must  be  removed  before  the  academic-status  of 
sophomore  is  granted. 

Counseling  and  Placement 

Lebanon  Valley  College  recognizes  as  part  of  its  responsibility  to  its  students 
the  need  for  providing  sound  educational,  vocational,  and  personal  counseling. 
Measures  of  interest,  ability,  aptitude,  and  personality,  in  addition  to  other 
counseling  techniques,  are  utilized  in  an  effort  to  help  each  student  come  to  a 
fuller  realization  of  his  capabilities  and  personality.  An  important  part  of  the 
counseling  program  consists  of  a  series  of  lectures  and  discussions  conducted  as  a 
non-credit  orientation  course  for  new  students. 

Placement  services  are  provided  by  the  college  for  aiding  students  in 
procuring  part-time  employment  while  in  college  and  in  obtaining  positions  upon 
graduation.  A  current  file  is  maintained  which  contains  information  about 
positions  in  various  companies  and  institutions,  teaching,  civil  service  oppor- 
tunities and  examinations,  entrance  to  professional  schools,  assistantships,  and 
fellowships.  Representatives  of  business,  industry,  and  educational  institutions 
visit  the  campus  annually  to  interview  seniors  for  prospective  employment.  A  file 
of  credentials  and  activities  of  those  students  availing  themselves  of  the  services  is 
available  to  prospective  employers.  Graduates  may  keep  their  individual  files 
active  by  reporting  additional  information  to  the  director  of  placement. 

Records  of  students'  credentials  in  all  areas  of  student  activities  are  on  file. 

30 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REGULATIONS 

The  rules  of  the  college  are  designed  to  provide  for  proper  regulation  of  the 
academic  community.  The  rules  and  regulations  as  stated  in  this  bulletin  are 
announcements  and  in  no  way  serve  as  a  contract  betv^een  the  student  and  the 
college.  Attendance  at  the  college  is  a  privilege  and  not  a  right.  The  student  by  his 
act  of  registration  concedes  to  the  college  the  right  to  require  his  withdrawal  any 
time  deemed  necessary  to  safeguard  the  ideals  of  scholarship  and  character,  and 
to  secure  compliance  with  regulations.  It  is  expected  that  the  conduct  of  all 
campus  citizens  will  conform  to  accepted  standards.  All  students  are  required  to 
respond  to  comm.unications  sent  by  any  duly  constituted  authority  of  the  college. 

Class  Attendance 

Each  student  is  held  responsible  for  knowing  and  meeting  all  requirements 
for  each  course,  including  regular  class  attendance.  Because  of  differences  in 
various  disciplines,  specific  regulations  governing  class  attendance  are  set  by 
each  department,  approved  by  the  dean  ot  the  college,  and  administered  by  the 
instructor.  At  the  opening  of  each  course  the  instructor  will  clearly  inform  the 
students  of  the  regulations  on  class  attendance.  Violations  of  class  attendance 
regulations  will  make  the  student  liable  to  being  dropped  from  the  course  with  a 
failing  grade,  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  instructor  and  with  the  approval  of 
the  assistant  dean  of  the  college. 

In  case  of  absence  from  class  because  of  illness  and  for  most  other  reasons,  the 
student  speaks  directly  with  the  instructor  concerning  the  absence,  whether 
anticipated  or  not,  even  if  an  examination  has  been  scheduled.  The  student 
informs  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar  only  if  the  absence  could  not 
be  anticipated  and  the  period  of  absence  will  be  a  week  or  more.  The  assistant 
dean  of  the  college  and  registrar  informs  faculty  members  of  students  who  will  be 
absent  from  classes  because  of  participation  in  official  functions  of  the  college. 
Students  on  academic  probation  are  permitted  only  excused  absences. 

Excused  absences  do  not  absolve  the  student  from  the  necessity  of  fulfiUing 
all  course  requirements. 

Academic  Dishonesty 

Instances  of  open  and  conclusive  academic  dishonesty  are  dealt  with  in 
accordance  wth  the  following  regulations: 

For  the  first  offense  the  faculty  member  shall  have  the  authority  to  fail  the 
student  in  the  course. 

For  the  second  offense  the  student  shall  be  failed  in  the  course  and  additional 
action  taken,  up  to  and  including  expulsion  from  college,  if  deemed  warranted  by 
the  dean  of  the  college. 

For  the  third  offense,  if  the  second  act  of  dishonesty  did  not  warrant 
expulsion  in  the  opinion  of  the  dean  of  the  college,  the  student  shall  be  punished 
by  failure  in  the  course  and  expulsion  from  the  college. 

Chapel-Convocation  Program. 

A  chapel-convocation  program  is  held  regularly  each  week.  The  weekly 
programs  are  augmented  by  additional  events  at  other  times  during  the  semester. 
From  the  total  of  twenty-four  programs  each  full-time  student  will  select  not  less 
than  twelve  to  fulfill  his  attendance  requirement  for  the  semester.  For  each 
unexcused  absence,  resulting  in  less  than  twelve  attendances,  one  hour  will  be 
added  to  the  hours  required  for  graduation. 

Hazing 

Hazing  is  strictly  prohibited.  Any  infringement  by  members  of  other  classes 
upon  the  personal  rights  of  freshmen  as  individuals  is  interpreted  as  hazing. 

31 


Cars  and  Student  Parking 

All  cars  owned  or  operated  by  Lebanon  Valley  College  students  must  be 
registered  with  the  college  center.  Violations  of  established  parking  regulations 
will  result  in  fines  and  may  result  in  suspension  or  revocation  of  parking 
privileges. 

Transcripts 

Each  student,  former  student,  or  graduate  is  entitled  to  one  transcript  of  his 
college  record  without  charge.  For  each  copy  after  the  first,  a  fee  of  two  dollars  is 
charged. 

Regulations  Regarding  Academic  Probation, 
Suspension,  Dismissal,  Withdrawal 

A.  Probation 

A  student  can  be  placed  on  academic  probation  by  the  dean  of  the  college  or 
suspended  or  dismissed  if  his  academic  standing  fails  to  come  up  to  the 
grade-point  average  shown  in  the  following  table: 

Suspension  or 
Probation  dismissal 

1st  semester 1.25 

2nd  semester 1.50  1.25  cumulative 

3rd  semester 1.65 

4th  semester 1.75  1.50  cumulative 

5th  semester 1.75 

6th  semester 1.75  1.65  cumulative 

7th  &  8th  semesters 1.75         in  all  courses 

A  student  placed  on  academic  probation  is  notified  of  such  status  by  the  dean 
of  the  college  and  informed  of  the  college  regulations  governing  probationers. 
Students  on  probation  are  expected  to  regulate  their  work  and  their  time  so  as  to 
make  a  most  determined  effort  to  bring  their  performance  up  to  the  required 
standard. 

The  extent  of  a  probationer  student's  participation  in  extra-curricular  ac- 
tivities and  in  non-credit  courses  shall  be  determined  by  a  consensus  of  the 
student,  the  student's  parents,  and  the  dean  of  the  college.  (The  dean  shall  consult 
wdth  appropriate  college  personnel — e.g.  adviser,  instructors,  dean  of  students, 
coaches.)  All  three  of  the  primary  parties  in  this  decision  shall  express  their  views 
in  writing.  No  student  on  academic  probation  can  initiate  or  continue  participa- 
tion in  extra-curricular  activities  and/or  non-credit  courses  prior  to  these  consul- 
tations. 

B.  Suspension 

1.  A  student  who  obviously  fails  to  achieve  at  a  level  commensurate  with  his 
measured  ability  may  be  suspended  for  at  least  one  semester. 

2.  A  student  suspended  for  academic  reasons  is  not  eligible  for  reinstatement 
for  at  least  one  semester,  preferably  two. 

3.  A  student  seeking  reinstatement  to  Lebanon  Valley  College  must  apply  in 
writing  to  the  dean  of  the  college. 

4.  Students  suspended  for  academic  reasons  are  not  permitted  to  register  for 
work  in  the  auxiliary  schools  except  for  the  most  compelling  reasons  and  then 
only  with  the  approval  of  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and  registrar. 

5.  A  student  may  be  suspended  without  a  prior  period  on  probation. 

6.  A  student  twice  suspended  for  academic  reasons  shall  be  considered  for 
readmission,  upon  application,  only  if  the  following  conditions  are  fulfilled:  (a) 

32 


He  shall  present  firm  evidence  of  renewed  interest  and  motivation,  (b)  He  shall 
have  completed  a  significant  amount  of  transferrable  academic  work  at  an 
accredited  institution  subsequent  to  his  second  suspension,  (c]  He  shall  be 
readmitted  on  probationary  status  on  recommendation  of  the  appropriate 
academic  department.  The  student  shall  achieve  at  such  a  level  as  will  make  likely 
the  successful  completion  of  his  program  or  he  will  be  subject  to  dismissal. 

C.  Dismissal 

A  student  dismissed  for  academic  reasons  is  not  eligible  for  readmission. 

D.  Withdrawal  from  College  and  Readmission 

Official  withdrawal  from  the  college  is  accomplished  only  by  the  completion 
of  withdrawal  forms  obtained  in  the  office  of  the  assistant  dean  of  the  college  and 
registrar.  This  is  the  sole  responsibility  of  the  student. 

Application  for  readmission  will  be  considered  only  if  the  formal  withdrawal 
procedure  has  been  followed  at  the  time  of  withdrawal. 


STUDENT  ACTIVITIES 

THE  RELIGIOUS  LIFE 

Lebanon  Valley  College  was  founded  as  a  Christian  college  and  continues  to 
be  dedicated  to  its  faith.  All  students  are  invited  and  urged  to  participate  in  some 
phase  of  religious  activity. 

The  Chapel-Convocation  Program 

A  series  of  twenty-four  programs  is  held  each  semester  from  which  each 
student  selects  a  minimum  of  twelve  to  fulfill  attendance  requirements.  These 
programs  include  chapel  services  and  convocation  programs  that  are  held  on 
Tuesday  mornings,  as  well  as  cultural  events  selected  by  the  Chapel-Convocation 
Committee.  This  committee,  with  equal  representation  from  administration, 
faculty,  and  students,  will  announce  the  total  chapel-convocation  program  at  the 
beginning  of  each  semester. 

Sunday  Services 

The  United  Methodist  Church  and  the  other  churches  of  the  community 
extend  a  warm  welcome  to  all  college  students  who  wish  to  attend  Sunday 
worship. 

There  are  six  congregations  of  different  denominations  in  Annville  itself. 
Other  parishes  of  major  religious  groups  not  found  in  Annville  are  located  within 
a  five-mile  radius  of  the  college. 

PROJECT 

PROJECT  is  the  all-campus  organization  which  coordinates  the  activities  of 
the  various  denominational  religious  groups  on  campus.  It  also  provides  programs 
and  activities  to  fulfill  the  spiritual  needs  of  the  students  and  promotes  the  spirit 
of  brotherhood  in  the  college  community.  Throughout  the  year  the  organization 
sponsors  all-campus  retreats  for  fun,  fellowship  and  relaxation.  PROJECT  also 
provides  special  seasonal  services,  opportunities  for  weekend  work  camps, 
presentations  by  guest  speakers,  films,  dramas,  and  other  types  of  programs.  All 
students  are  welcome  to  assist  in  the  planning  and  to  participate  in  these 
activities. 

Denominational  Organizations 

It  is  possible  for  the  different  denominations  and  faiths  to  organize  their 
students  into  clubs  or  other  type  organizations.  Each  of  these  groups  in  turn  elects 
one  of  its  members  to  the  Executive  Board  of  PROJECT. 

Religious  Emphasis  Week 

This  is  one  of  the  outstanding  religious  events  of  the  school  year.  Notable 
speakers  are  invited  to  share  their  experiences  with  the  student  body  through  the 
chapel-convocation  programs  and  personal  interviews.  Other  features  usually 
included  in  the  activities  of  the  week  are  a  music  program  by  a  student  group,  and 
a  movie  or  drama. 

The  Balmer  Showers  Lectureship 

This  annual  lectureship  was  established  and  endowed  by  the  late  Bishop 
Emeritus  J.  Balmer  Showers,  '07,  of  the  Evangelical  United  Brethren  Church. 
Under  the  stipulations  of  the  endowment,  the  lectures  are  delivered  by  distin- 
guished scholars  of  recognized  leadership  in  the  areas  of  Christian  faith  and  the- 
ology, biblical  archaeology  and  interpretation,  and  Christian  ethics  of  the  Chris- 
tian ministry. 

35 


Religion  and  Life  Lectures 

The  purpose  of  the  Religion  and  Life  Lectures  is  to  deepen  the  student's 
understanding  of  some  of  the  problems  of  life  and  the  religious  resources  that  are 
available  to  meet  such  problems.  Currently,  the  Religion  and  Life  Lectures  and  the 
Balmer  Showers  Lectures  are  coordinated  into  a  series  of  three  offerings  at  various 
times  during  the  year. 

Delta  Tau  Chi 

Delta  Tau  Chi  is  an  organization  composed  primarily  of  students  who  have 
decided  to  devote  full-time  service  to  church  vocations.  Membership  is  open, 
however,  to  all  students  who  wish  to  participate  in  its  activities  and  subscribe  to 
its  purpose.  The  group  holds  regularly  scheduled  meetings  and  daily  meditations, 
sends  deputations  to  churches,  conducts  programs  at  various  hospitals  and  homes, 
and  enters  into  other  community  projects. 

CAMPUS  ORGANIZATIONS 
Social  Organizations 

Five  organizations  endeavor  to  enrich  the  social  program  of  the  college  by 
sponsoring   social   activities   on  the   campus   and   in  the   community,   and  by 
broadening  the  experience  of  its  members  through  group  action. 
Delta  Lambda  Sigma 

Kappa  Lambda  Nu  Knights  of  the  Valley 

Kappa  Lambda  Sigma  Phi  Lambda  Sigma 

Recognition  Groups 

Students  who  have  achieved  scholastic  distinction  in  their  academic  work  or 
in  certain  areas  are  eligible  for  membership  in  honorary  scholastic  societies. 
Phi  Alpha  Epsilon  Pi  Gamma  Mu 

Beta  Beta  Beta  Psi  Chi 

Honorary  and  Service  Organizations 

Five  organizations  exist  to  bring  recognition  to  deserving  music  students  and 
participants  in  dramatic  activities  or  to  function  as  service  organizations  on  the 
campus. 

Alpha  Phi  Omega  Phi  Mu  Alpha 

Alpha  Psi  Omega  Sigma  Alpha  Iota 

Gamma  Sigma  Sigma 

Publications 

Practical  experience  in  management,  writing,  and  editorial  work  is  available 
to  students  through  membership  on  the  staff  of  the  Quad,  and  the  college 
yearbook,  The  Quittapahilla. 

Departmental  Clubs 

Many  departmental  clubs  provide  opportunities  for  students  to  participate  in 
supplemental  department  activities.  At  regular  meetings  reports  on  appropriate 
topics  are  presented  and  discussed.  Other  activities  sponsored  by  the  departmen- 
tal clubs  include  lectures  by  specialists  in  the  club's  particular  field  of  interest, 
educational  films,  and  field  trips. 

Chemistry:  American  Chemical  Society     Mathematics:   Industrial  Mathematics 

Affiliate  Society  Affiliate 

Education:  Childhood  Education  Club       Modern  Languages:  Spanish  Club 

Music:  Student  Chapter  of  the 

Music  Educators  National  Conference 

36 


Special  Interest  Groups  International  Relations  Club 

Art  Club  Jazz  Band 

Chess  Club  Photography  Club 

Ice  Hockey  Club  Ski  Club 

Dramatics  and  Music 

An  opportunity  to  develop  dramatic  and  musical  talents  under  qualified  lead- 
;rship  is  offered  to  the  students  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  by  the  following 
)rganizations. 

]hapel  Choir  Symphonic  Band 

College  Chorus  Symphony  Orchestra 

]oncert  Choir  Wig  and  Buckle  Club 

juild  Student  Group  Wind  Ensemble 
(American  Guild  of  Organists) 

:ULTURAL  OPPORTUNITIES 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  cultural  programs  in  the  form  of  the  Great 
\rtists  Series,  concerts  by  students,  faculty  members,  and  musical  organizations 
n  the  department  of  music,  and  lectures  sponsored  by  the  various  departments  of 
he  college.  In  addition,  the  neighboring  communities  of  Harrisburg,  Hershey  and 
.ebanon  offer  concerts,  lectures,  and  other  cultural  activities  throughout  the  year. 

STUDENT  GOVERNMENT 

Within  the  program  and  operation  of  Lebanon  Valley  College,  there  is  a  wdde 
:ommitment  to  the  principle  of  shared  governance.  In  this  commitment,  various 
ireas  of  student  life  come  under  the  jurisdiction  of  student  government  in  varying 
degrees  as  that  part  of  the  total  campus  governance  system  has  been  developed 
Dver  a  period  of  time. 

The  representative  organizations  described  below  are  privileged  to  conduct 
he  affairs  of  the  student  body  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  under  their  separate 
responsibilities  in  such  manner  as  to  guide  and  promote  the  affairs  of  the  students 
md  as  to  refrain  from  acting  contrary  to  local,  state,  and  federal  law^s  and  to  the 
Student  Conduct  Code  as  defined  in  the  L-Book. 

Student  Council 

The  Student  Council  seeks  to  foster  understanding  and  cooperation  among 
he  students,  faculty,  and  administration  of  Lebanon  Valley  College.  It  is  the 
'esponsibility  of  the  Student  Council  to  serve  as  the  central  clearing  house  for  all 
'ecommendations  and  grievances  emanating  from  the  student  body  and  to  make 
recommendations  for  altering  or  establishing  policy  to  the  appropriate  administra- 
:ive  office  or  faculty  committees.  The  Student  Council  also  coordinates  student 
ictivities  and  provides  for  the  financing  of  those  activities.  It  is  composed  of 
eighteen  members. 

Student  Judicial  Board 

The  Student  Judicial  Board  is  responsible  for  the  investigating  and/or  ad- 
udicating  alleged  infractions  of  the  Student  Conduct  Code.  It  is  composed  of  eight 
9lected  students,  eight  selected  students,  and  non-student  members  appointed  by 
the  president  of  the  college. 

[udicial  Appeals  Board 

The  Judicial  Appeals  Board  hears  appeals  from  students  on  decisions  ren- 
dered by  the  Student  Judicial  Board  and/or  sanctions  imposed  by  the  Dean  of 

37 


Students.  It  is  composed  of  four  students,  three  faculty  members,  and  three 
administrators. 

i 

Position  Statement 

The  primary  concern  of  the  College  in  regard  to  the  social  life  of  its  students  is 
to  provide  an  atmosphere  which  stimulates  scholarship  and  personal  growth.  It 
attempts  to  provide  the  privacy  and  peace  necessary  for  study,  and  to  encourage 
the  individual  to  take  as  much  responsibility  as  possible  for  his/her  own  behavior, 
so  that  the  rights  of  others  to  privacy,  peace  and  property  are  not  infringed. 

As  guidelines  for  the  behavior  deemed  conducive  to  scholarship  and  develop- 
ing sensitivity  to  the  restraints  of  community  living,  the  College  recognizes  the 
position  taken  by  the  United  Methodist  Church,  to  which  it  is  affiliated,  and  by  the 
Commonw^ealth  of  Pennsylvania.  The  Discipline  of  that  church  firmly  opposes  the 
misuse  of  drugs  and  affirms  its  long-standing  recommendation  of  abstention  from 
alcoholic  beverages  because  of  the  spiritual,  physical,  and  social  harm  such 
practices  may  produce.  The  College  endorses  this  position  and  strongly  discour- 
ages the  use  of  drugs  and  alcoholic  beverages  by  its  students.  The  laws  of  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  prohibit  the  possession  and  use  of  all  illegal 
drugs  and  the  possession  and  use  of  alcoholic  beverages  by  minors  (presently 
defined  as  those  prior  to  their  twenty -first  birthday].  The  College  fully  supports 
the  laws  of  the  state,  and  acknowledges  the  rights  of  enforcement  of  these  laws  by 
civil  authority. 

Most  of  the  success  of  any  community  in  establishing  a  harmonious  and 
productive  atmosphere  rests  on  the  voluntary  cooperation  of  its  members.  In  the 
event,  however,  of  failure  of  individuals  to  respect  the  rights  and  privileges  of 
others  and  of  the  institution,  the  offenders  against  the  community  will  be  subject 
to  penalties  designated  by  the  appropriate  student  government  agencies  and/or 
administrative  office. 


STUDENT  CONDUCT  CODE 

The  complete  Student  Conduct  Code  appears  in  the  L-Book.  Several  provi- 
sions of  that  code  that  require  emphasis  are  given  here  in  order  to  prevent 
misunderstanding  on  the  part  of  all  prospective  students.  A  violation  of  the 
Student  Conduct  Code  occurs  when  a  student: 

1.  Limits  or  restricts  the  freedom  of  any  member  of  the  campus  community 
to  move  about  in  a  lawful  manner. 

2.  Creates  or  participates  in  a  disturbance  that  infringes  upon  the  individ- 
ual's right  to  privacy. 

3.  Enters  or  uses  facilities  or  property  of  the  College  or  another  person 
without  authorization  from  the  appropriate  College  official  or  person. 

4.  Misuses,  removes,  damages  fire  or  safety  equipment. 

5.  Uses  or  possesses  firearms,  explosives  (including  firecrackers)  or  other 
dangerous  articles  or  substances  potentially  injurious  to  persons  or  property. 

6.  Possesses  and/or  consumes  alcoholic  beverages  on  any  property  owned 
by  Lebanon  Valley  College. 

7.  Possesses,  distributes,  sells,  or  is  under  the  influence  of  narcotics, 
hallucinogenics,  dangerous  drugs,  or  controlled  substances  except  as  permitted 
by  law. 

8.  Intentionally  obstructs  the  administrative  or  academic  operation  and 
functions  of  the  College. 

9.  Visits  in  an  individual's  dormitory  room  at  times  and  under  conditions 
that  are  prohibited  by  institutional  policy.  [See  L-Book] 

10.  Keeps  pets  in  College  buildings  or  on  College  grounds  unless  prior 
approval  by  the  Dean  of  Students  has  been  given. 

38 


ATHLETICS  AND  RECREATION 

Lebanon  Valley  College  maintains  a  full  program  of  intramural  and  intercol- 
legiate athletic  activities.  Intramural  leagues  and  tournaments  are  conducted  in 
the  various  sports  for  men  and  women. 

The  college  participates  in  ten  intercollegiate  sports  for  men  (baseball, 
basketball,  cross-country,  football,  golf,  lacrosse,  soccer,  track,  wrestling  and  ten- 
nis] and  three  for  women  (basketball,  hockey  and  lacrosse). 

Lebanon  Valley  College  is  a  member  of  the  following  national  and  regional 
athletic  associations;  National  Collegiate  Athletic  Association,  Middle  Atlantic 
States  Collegiate  Athletic  Conference,  Eastern  College  Athletic  Conference,  the 
Central  Pennsylvania  Field  Hockey  Association,  and  the  Penn-Mar  Conference  for 
women. 

Aims  and  Objectives  of  Intercollegiate  Athletics 

Lebanon  Valley  College  supports  its  intercollegiate  athletics  program  because 
it  offers  its  students  an  opportunity  to  participate  in  activities  that  afford  an  outlet 
for  competitive  spirit  and  vitality,  while  further  providing  each  student  with  an 
opportunity  to  develop,  understand  and  appreciate  the  values  of  teamwork,  pride, 
morale,  dedication,  physical  fitness  and  school  spirit. 


39 


COURSES  OF  STUDY 


1 


GENERAL  INFORMATION  '] 

Course  Numbering  System 

The  first  digit  of  the  three-digit  course  number  indicates  the  academic  year  in 
which  the  course  is  normally  taken.  Thus,  a  course  is  normally  taken  in  the  senior 
year  if  the  first  digit  is  4,  in  the  junior  year  if  it  is  3,  in  the  sophomore  year  if  it  is  2, 
and  in  the  freshman  year  if  it  is  1.  (A  first  digit  of  1  may  also  indicate  that  the 
course  may  be  taken  by  freshmen  even  though  it  is  usually  taken  by  sophomores, 
juniors  or  seniors.)  A  first  digit  of  5  is  employed  for  courses  in  private  music 
instruction  and  independent  study  courses.  Course  numbers  for  music  organiza- 
tions have  6  as  a  first  digit.  The  same  number  is  used  each  time  a  student  enrolls  in 
a  course  whose  first  digit  is  5  or  6. 

A  course  is  offered  in  the  first  semester  if  the  third  digit  is  an  odd  number,  in 
the  second  semester  if  the  third  digit  is  an  even  number.  A  course  with  0  as  a  third 
digit  is  a  one-semester  course  offered  in  both  semesters. 

A  comma  separating  the  numbers  of  two  courses  with  a  common  title 
indicates  that  the  first  course  (offered  in  the  first  semester)  is  a  prerequisite  to  the 
second  course  (offered  in  the  second  semester).  A  slash  (/)  separating  the  numbers 
of  two  courses  with  a  common  title  indicates  that  the  first  course  is  not  a 
prerequisite  for  the  second  course. 

A  course  is  offered  every  year  if  an  academic  year  is  not  included. 

Course  Credit 

Semester  hours  of  credit,  class  hours  per  week,  and  laboratory  hours  per  week 
are  indicated  by  three  numbers  at  the  end  of  the  line  containing  the  course  number 
and  title.  For  example,  "4:3:4"  for  Biology  201  means  four  semester  hours  of 
credit,  three  classroom  hours  per  week,  and  four  laboratory  hours  per  week. 


ART 

Associate  Professor  Iskowitz,  Chairman;  Adjunct  Professor  Wise 

110.  Introduction  to  Art.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

Students  are  introduced  to  the  two  and  three  dimensional  arts,  including  architecture, 
which  are  analyzed  in  an  attempt  to  understand  the  nature  of  art  through  structure,  the 
characteristics  of  media,  and  content.  The  importance  of  shaping  individual  perception  is 
stressed  in  order  to  show  how  the  observer  plays  an  active  role  in  his  appreciation  of  a  work 
of  art. 

140.  Drawing,  Painting  and  Printmaking.  3:4:0.  Either  semester. 

Problems  provide  an  opportunity  for  students  to  develop  their  creative  ability.  An  ex- 
ploration of  the  inherent  qualities  of  various  media,  techniques  and  tools  is  undertaken 
through  active  involvement  in  studio.  The  staff  reserves  the  right  to  select  one  example  of 
each  student's  work  for  its  permanent  collection. 

Prerequisite:  Art  110. 

201.  Art  history  I,  Pre-history  through  the  Middle  Ages. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Representative  examples  in  painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  of  the  major  cultures 
of  successive  historic  periods  are  considered.  Stress  is  given  to  the  interaction  of  factors 
influencing  the  various  forms  of  visual  expressions. 

Prerequisite:  Art  110. 

40 


203.  Art  History  II,  Renaissance  to  Twentieth  Century. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Study  of  the  major  forms  of  the  visual  arts  representative  of  the  Renaissance  and 
succeeding  centuries  as  expressed  both  by  the  individual  and  major  schools.  These  viewed 
in  terms  of  degree  of  reflection  of  the  social,  ideological,  and  economic  foci  of  the  period. 

Prerequisite:  Art  110. 

401.  Art  in  the  Elementary  School.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Survey  of  theories  of  art  education  and  of  programs  of  creative  process  activities 
adaptive  to  the  various  levels  of  maturation  at  pre-school  and  the  elementary  levels.  Studio 
experience  employing  a  variety  of  media  and  techniques  is  offered  to  give  experience  and 
understanding  to  the  problems  involved.  Practical  knovuledge  of  process,  approaches  to  dis- 
play, and  trends  in  evaluation  of  process  are  presented  through  lecture,  discussion,  demon- 
stration, visual  aids,  supplementary  reading. 


BIOCHEMISTRY 


Advisers:  Assistant  Professors  Moe  and  Pollack 

The  major  in  biochemistry  is  an  interdisciplinary  program  u^hich  provides  an 
opportunity  for  interested  students  to  engage  in  a  comprehensive  study  of  the 
chemical  basis  of  biological  processes.  The  program  prescribes,  in  low^er  level 
courses,  both  a  rigorous  development  in  basic  chemical  principles  and  a  broad- 
based  introduction  to  biological  systems.  Upper  level  courses  provide  for  an 
integrated  study  of  biochemistry,  molecular  biology,  and  physiology. 

The  biochemistry  major  is  designed  to  prepare  students  for  advanced  study  in 
medical,  dental,  and  other  professional  schools,  for  graduate  programs  in  a  variety 
of  areas  including  biochemistry,  clinical  chemistry,  pharmacology,  molecular 
biology,  genetics,  microbiology,  and  physiology,  and  for  research  positions  in 
industrial,  academic,  and  government  laboratories. 

Major:  Biology  111,  112,  201,  202,  and/or  306,  307,  401  (24  hours);  Biochemis- 
try 421,  422,  430,  480  (9  hours);  Chemistry  111,  112,  213,  214,  216,  311,  312,  319 
(27  hours);  Mathematics  161,  162  or  166  (6  hours);  Physics  103  or  111,  104  or  112 
(8  hours). 

Degree:  For  the  student  w^ho  majors  in  biochemistry  the  B.S.  degree  is  offered. 


BIOLOGY 


Professor  Wolf,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Wolfe;  Assistant  Professors  Hen- 
ninger,  Pollack,  Verhoek,  and  Williams.  Adjunct  Instructor  Costello. 

The  work  outlined  in  the  following  courses  in  biology  is  intended  to  develop 
an  appreciation  of  man's  relation  to  his  universe,  to  acquaint  students  with  those 
fundamental  concepts  necessary  for  the  proper  interpretation  of  the  phenomena 
manifested  by  the  living  things  with  which  they  are  surrounded,  and  to  lay  a 
foundation  for  specialization  in  professional  courses  in  biology. 

The  courses  are  designed  to  prepare  students  for  the  work  in  professional 
schools,  schools  for  medical  technologists,  hospital  schools  for  training  of  nurses, 
for  graduate  work  in  colleges  and  universities,  for  teaching  the  biological  sciences 
in  high  schools,  and  for  assistantships  in  university  and  experiment  station 
laboratories  in  the  departments  of  agriculture  and  other  government  agencies. 

Major:  Biology  111,  112,  201,  302  or  307,  411  or  412;  one  course  each  in  the 
general  areas  of  physiology,  cellular  and  subcellular  biology,  and  morphology; 
and  four  additional  hours  of  biology  for  a  minimum  of  33  hours.  Also  required  are 
two  years  of  chemistry;  Physics  103,  104,  or  111,  112;  and  Mathematics  161. 

41 


Degrees:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  biology,  the  B.S.  degree  is  offered;  for 
the  student  who  completes  the  major  in  medical  technology,  the  B.S.  in  Medical 
Technology  degree  is  offered;  and  for  the  student  who  completes  the  major  in 
nursing,  the  B.S.  in  Nursing  degree  is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

The  departmental  honors  program  in  biology  is  open  to  students  of  junior  and 
senior  status  who  have  demonstrated  superior  scholastic  ability  in  formal  courses 
as  well  as  the  potential  to  complete  successfully  an  original  independent  research 
project.  A  candidate  for  departmental  honors  will  be  assigned  to  a  faculty  member 
who  will  direct  his  research  problem.  Two  weeks  prior  to  the  close  of  the  second 
semester  of  his  senior  year,  the  candidate  will  submit  a  thesis  based  on  his 
laboratory  investigations  and  defend  it  before  an  examining  committee  chosen  by 
the  research  sponsor.  Following  successful  completion  of  the  defense,  the  candi- 
date's record  will  be  reviewed  by  the  examining  committee,  whereupon  a  decision 
will  be  made  concerning  a  recommendation  to  the  dean  of  the  college  that  the 
candidate  graduate  with  departmental  honors. 

101/102.  Introduction  to  Biology  I,  H.  3:2:2  per  semester. 

These  courses,  designed  for  the  non-science  major,  place  emphasis  on  the  mastery  of 
certain  biological  principles  which  are  inherent  in  living  material.  These  principles  are  then 
applied  to  specific  organisms  with  special  stress  placed  on  the  study  of  human  biology. 

The  laboratory  includes  exercises  in  anatomy,  physiology,  embryology,  genetics,  and 
ecology. 

111/112.  General  Biology  I,  II.*  4:3:4  per  semester. 

An  attempt  is  made  to  familiarize  the  student  with  some  of  the  basic  concepts  of  the 
physical  sciences  necessary  for  the  understanding  of  modern  biology.  Basic  biological 
principles  are  stressed  as  related  to  the  major  subdivisions  of  the  biological  sciences. 

201.  Genetics.  4:3:4.  First  semester. 

The  central  theme  of  this  course  is  the  mastery  of  the  universal  properties  of  the 
mechanism  of  heredity.  The  laboratory  stresses  the  demonstration  of  the  key  concepts  of 
heredity  utilizing  both  a  classical  and  a  molecular  approach. 

Prerequisites:  Biology  111  and  one  year  of  chemistry. 

202.  Animal  Physiology.  4:3:4.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  principles  of  vertebrate  body  function.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the 
mechanisms  by  which  cells  and  organs  perform  their  functions  and  the  interaction  of  the 
various  organs  in  maintaining  total  body  function. 

Prerequisites:  Biology  101  or  112. 

302.   Survey  of  the  Plant  Kingdom.  4:2:4.  Second  semester. 

The  diversity  and  differentiation  of  plants  and  the  relationships  between  them  will  be 
stressed.  Field  and  laboratory  work  will  familiarize  the  student  with  the  morphology  of 
lower  plants  and  with  the  identification  and  ecology  of  gymnosperms  and  angiosperms  on 
campus  and  in  the  local  flora. 

Prerequisites:  Biology  111/112  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

304.  Developmental  Biology.  4:3:4.  Second  semester. 

The  study  of  basic  descriptive  phenomena  in  the  development  of  typical  invertebrate 
and  vertebrate  embryos  will  be  extended  into  consideration  of  modern  embryological 
problems. 

305.  Vertebrate  Histology  and  Microtechnique.  4:3:4.  First  semester. 

Microscopic  anatomy  of  vertebrate  tissues  illustrating  basic  tissue  similarities  and 
specialization  in  relation  to  function.  The  laboratory  work  includes  the  preparation  of  slides 
utilizing  routine  histological  and  histochemical  techniques. 


*Unless  otherwise  noted.  Biology  111/112  are  prerequisites  for  all  biology  courses  beyond 
112. 

42 


06.  Microbiology.  4:3:4.  Second  semester. 

A  basic  study  of  the  morphology,  physiology,  and  biochemistry  of  representative 
licroorganisms. 

07.  Plant  Physiology.  4:2:4.  First  semester. 

The  functioning  of  plants  and  plant  systems  with  emphasis  on  vascular  plants, 
'rocesses  w^ill  be  studied  at  the  biophysical,  biochemical,  cellular  and  organismal  levels, 
structural  background  at  all  levels  will  be  included. 

Prerequisite:  One  semester  of  organic  ciiemistry  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

08.  Comparative  Chordate  Anatomy.  4:3:4.  Second  semester. 

The  anatomy  of  the  chordates  is  studied  from  a  comparative  viewpoint  with  particular 
ttention  given  to  the  correlation  of  structure  to  living  conditions.  Laboratory  work  involves 
[issection  and  demonstration  of  representative  chordates. 

09.  Fundamentals  of  Ecology.  4:2:4.  First  semester. 

The  fundamental  concepts  of  ecology  are  examined  with  emphasis  placed  on  the 
nteraction  between  organisms  and  their  biological  and  physical  environment  in  selected 
cosystems — freshwater,  marine,  and  terrestrial.  Field  trips  will  be  taken  to  selected  areas, 
laboratory  work  will  be  conducted  on  problems  associated  with  varius  types  of  ecosys- 
3ms. 

Prerequisites:  Biology  112  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

01.  Molecular  Biology.  4:2:4.  First  semester. 

A  molecular  approach  to  the  study  of  the  organization  and  function  of  the  cell. 
For  senior  or  junior  majors  who  have  completed  at  least  two  years  of  chemistry,  or  by 
ermission  of  the  instructor. 

02.  Invertebrate  Zoology.  4:2:4.  Second  semester. 

Through  the  use  of  a  systemic  approach,  the  morphology  and  physiology  of  representa- 
ves  of  most  of  the  invertebrate  phyla  are  studied.  This  approach  centers  around  the 
Dllowing  areas:  movement,  metabolism,  information  and  control,  reproduction,  and  associ- 
tion  between  animals. 

09.  Quantitative  Ecology.  4:1:6.  First  semester. 

An  intense  study  of  basic  ecological  processes  emphasizing  quantitative  field  work  at 
opulation  and  community  levels  in  related  freshwater,  marine,  and  terrestial  ecosystems. 

Prerequisites:  Biology  302  or  307,  and  309;  Chemistry  214;  Computer  Programming 
10;  Mathematics  170;  or  permission  of  instructor. 

11/412.  Biology  Seminar  I,  II.  1:1:0  or  2:2:0  per  semester. 

Reading,  discussions,  and  reports  on  special  topics  in  biology. 

51/452.  Special  Problems  I,  II.  1:0:3 — 3:0:9  per  semester. 

Designed  for  those  students  who  have  had  most  of  the  courses  required  for  their  major 
ut  who  may  have  a  special  need  for  experience  in  fields  not  listed  in  the  course  offerings  of 
tie  department.  Students  interested  in  a  course  in  marine  biology  should  elect  Biology 
51/452  in  their  senior  year. 

Prerequisite:  Permission  of  staff. 

53/454.  Special  Topics  in  Nursing  I,  11.  1-3  hours  credit  per  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit) 

Research  and  a  detailed  report  on  a  topic  of  interest  relating  to  the  nursing  profession. 

bpics  may  include  aspects  of  special  types  of  nursing  health  care,  the  epidemiology  of  a 

larticular  disease,  mental  disorders,  social  issues  in  health  care,  or  any  other  pertinent  topic. 

00.  Independent  Study.  1:0:3 — 3:0:9  per  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Limited  to  students  majoring  in  biology  who  have  had  ample  courses  in  the  depart- 
lent  and  whose  records  indicate  that  they  can  be  encouraged  to  take  part  in  research  or  can 
/ork  independently  on  research  problems  in  which  they  have  a  special  interest.  Biology  500 
lay  lead  to  Departmental  Honors  for  qualified  students.  See  page  44  for  information  on  the 
lepartmental  Honors  Program. 

Prerequisite:  Permission  of  staff. 

43 


] 


CHEMISTRY 

Professor  Neidig,  Chairman;  Professors  Lockwood  and  Spencer;  Associate  Pro- 
fessor Bailey;  Assistant  Professors  Bell,  and  Moe 

The  aims  of  the  department  are  (1)  to  provide  students  majoring  in  chemistry 
rigorous  training  in  the  principles  and  applications  of  modern  chemistry;  (2)  to 
provide  students  interested  in  the  teaching  profession  an  opportunity  to  become 
acquainted  with  the  teaching  of  science;  and  (3)  to  offer  students  interested  in 
advanced  study  or  in  industrial  employment  professional  training  in  chemistry. 

Major:  Chemistry  111,  112,  213,  214,  216,  311,  312,  314,  315,  316,  319,  321, 
322,  and  four  hours  of  500;  Mathematics  161,  162;  Physics  111  and  112  for  a  total  of 
52  hours. 

B.S.  in  Chemistry  (certified  by  the  American  Chemical  Society):  Chemistry 
111,  112,  213,  214,  216,  311,  312,  314,  315,  316,  319,  321,  322,411,412,413,414, 
and  4  hours  of  500;  Mathematics  161,  162;  Physics  111  and  112  for  a  total  of  64 
hours. 

Degrees:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  chemistry,  the  B.S.  and  B.S.  in 
Chemistry  degrees  are  offered. 

For  outline  of  program  leading  to  the  degree  of  B.S.  in  Chemistry,  see  page  96. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Juniors  and  seniors  may  participate  in  the  departmental  honors  program  if 
they  have  demonstrated  a  high  scholastic  ability  and  proficiency  in  both  experi- 
mental and  theoretical  chemistry.  To  be  recommended  for  departmental  honors,  a 
student  is  required:  (1)  to  submit  a  thesis  based  on  extensive  laboratory  investiga- 
tion of  an  original  problem;  and  (2)  to  defend  the  thesis  before  an  appropriate 
examining  committee. 

101.  Chemistry  as  Science  and  Technology.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  semi-quantitative  presentation  of  the  basic  concepts  of  chemistry  de- 
signed to  give  the  student  some  understanding  of  the  role  of  chemistry  as  science 
and  technology  in  society  today  and  tomorrow. 

102.  Chemistry,  The  Individual,  and  Society.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  course  will  attempt  to  show  the  relationship  of  chemistry  to  other  disciplines,  as 
well  as  to  government  and  politics.  A  problem  or  question  would  be  presented,  and  facts  and 
information  from  pertinent  disciplines  brought  to  bear  to  enable  the  students  to  reach  a  ra- 
tional solution. 

103.  Experimental  Chemistry.  1:0:3.  First  semester. 

A  laboratory  course  designed  to  give  the  student  opportunities  to  establish  a  problem, 
develop  laboratory  experiments  to  conduct  investigations,  make  observations,  collect  data, 
process  data,  apply  data  to  problem,  and  suggest  further  experimentation  if  needed. 

Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Chemistry  101. 

104.  Chemical  Investigation.  1:0:3.  Second  semester. 

The  laboratory  course  will  emphasize  the  analysis,  characterization,  and  evaluation 
of  products  from  the  everyday  life  of  the  student.  These  investigations  would  be  both  quali- 
tative and  quantitative. 

Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Chemistry  102. 

111,112.   Principles  of  Chemistry  I,  II.  4:3:3  per  semester. 

A  systematic  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  and  concepts  of  chemistry. 

200.  Special  Topics.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Designed  for  those  students  who  have  a  special  need  for  a  laboratory,  lecture,  and/or 
reading  experience  involving  content  and/or  approach  significantly  different  from  the 

44 


course  offerings  of  the  department.  Open  to  any  student  with  permission  of  staff  of  the 
department. 

216.  Laboratory  Investigations  I.  1:0:4  or  2:0:8.  Second  semester. 

Investigations  of  methods  of  synthesis  and  analysis  of  organic  compounds  including 
some  physical-organic  studies. 

Prerequisite:  Chemistry  213. 
Corequisite:  Chemistry  214. 

311,  312.  Physical  Chemistry  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  course  in  the  physical  theories  of  matter  and  their  applications  to  systems  of 
variable  composition. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214,  Mathematics  162,  and  Physics  112. 

314.  Instrumental  Analysis.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A   consideration   of  the   use   of   instrumental   analytical   methods   including   spec- 
trophotometric,  electroanalytical,  coulometry,  and  polargraphy. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  311  and  319. 
Corequisite:  Chemistry  312. 

315,  316.   Laboratory  Investigations  II,  III.  1:0:4  per  semester. 

Use  of  instrumental  techniques  for  investigating  chemical  systems. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214  and  216. 
Corequisites:  Chemistry  311,  312. 

319.  Chemical  Equilibria.  4:3:4.  First  semester. 

A  rigorous  mathematical  description  of  the  role  of  a  chemical  equilibrium  in  chemical 
systems  emphasizing  reactions  involving  ionic  substances  and  using  modern  analytical 
methods. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214  and  216. 

321,  322.   Laboratory  Investigations  IV,  V.  1:0:4  per  semester. 

Physical-chemical  investigations  of  chemical  systems. 
Corequisite:  Chemistry  311  or  312. 

411,  412.  Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

An  advanced  course  applying  theoretical   principles  to  the  understanding  of  the 
descriptive  chemistry  of  the  elements. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  312. 

413.  Advanced  Analytical  Chemistry.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  advanced  topics  in  analytical  chemistry. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  312  and  314. 

414.  Advanced  Organic  Chemistry.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  consideration  of  the  structure  of  organic  compounds  and  the  mechanisms  of 
homogeneous  organic  reactions. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214,  216,  and  312. 

213,  214.  Organic  Chemistry  I,  II.  4:3:4.  First  semester. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  structure,  nomenclature,  and  properties  of  the  major  classes  of 
organic  compounds  with  emphasis  on  the  principles  and  reaction  mechanisms  describing 
their  behavior. 

Prerequisite:  Chemistry  112. 

421,  422.   Biochemistry  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  course  in  the  physical  and  organic  aspects  of  living  systems. 

Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214,  216,  and  312  or  approval  of  the  departmental  chairman. 

425.   Qualitative  Organic  Analysis.  2:0:8.  First  semester. 

Presentation  of  the  principles  and  methods  of  organic  analysis. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214  and  216. 

45 


426.  Advanced  Physical  Chemistry.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  presentation  of  advanced  topics  in  chemistry  from  such  areas  as  quantum 
mechanics,  thermodynamics,  and  kinetics. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  312. 

427.  Clinical  Chemistry.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A   study  of  the  chemical   properties,   pathological  significance,   and  experimental 
determinations  of  clinically  important  metabolities. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  312,  314,  and  316. 
Corequisite:  Chemistry  421. 

430.  Biochemistry  Laboratory.  1:0:4.  Either  semester. 

Investigations  of  the  properties  of  proteins,  nucleic  acids,  carbohydrates,  and  lipids. 
Prerequisites:  Chemistry  214  and  216. 

431,  432.  Clinical  Chemistry  Seminar  I,  11.  1:1:0  per  semester. 

A  discussion  of  topics  relevant  to  the  applications  of  chemistry  in  a  clinical  laboratory. 
Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Chemistry  427. 

440,  Laboratory  Investigations  VIL  4:0:16.  Either  semester. 

Investigations  of  clinical  chemical  procedures,  methodology,  and  instrumentation. 
Work  to  be  carried  out  in  a  hospital  laboratory. 

Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Chemistry  427  and  approval  of  the  departmental  chairman. 

480.  Biochemistry  Seminar.  1:1:0  per  semester. 

Readings,  discussions,  and  reports  on  special  topics  in  biochemistry. 

490.  Internship.  1-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Supervised  Chemistry  laboratory  experience  in  an  industry,  government  agency,  or 
hospital.  Participants  will  be  selected  by  members  of  the  department. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  312  and  322. 

500.  Independent  Study.  2:0:8  or  3:0:12  per  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit,  for  students  enrolled 
in  the  departmental  honors  program.) 
Intensive  library  and  laboratory  study  of  special  interest  to  advanced  students  in  the 
major  areas  of  chemistry.  For  students  majoring  in  biochemistry,  intensive  library  and 
laboratory  study  of  relevant  research  problems  in  the  area  of  biochemistry.  For  students 
preparing  for  secondary  school  teaching,  the  emphasis  is  placed  on  methods  of  teaching 
chemistry. 

Prerequisite:  Chemistry  311,  312,  and  the  consent  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 


COMPUTER  PROGRAMMING 

Assistant  Professor  Burras. 

110.  Introduction  to  Timesharing.     5  weeks.  0:1:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introduction  to  timesharing  and  language  concepts  with  an  emphasis  on  the  use  of 
the  LVC  PDP  11/40  computer  system. 

150.  BASIC-PLUS  Programming.     10  weeks.  1:2:3.  Either  semester. 

A  study  of  the  BASIC-PLUS  language  to  include  strings,  matrices  and  functions  as  w^ell 
as  traditional  algorithms  demonstrating  search  and  sort  techniques. 

Prerequisite:  Computer  Programming  110  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

170.  Computers  and  Programming.  3:3:0 

An  introduction  to  the  techniques  of  computer  programming  and  to  the  designs,  uses, 
capabilities,  and  implications  of  computers. 

Note:  Fortran  IV  is  available  but  will  not  be  taught  in  these  courses.  Students  who 
have  taken  CP  150  will  receive  only  two  semester  hours  of  credit  for  CP  170. 

46 


ECONOMICS  AND  BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

Associate  Professor  Knight,  Chairman;  Professor  Tom;  Adjunct  Associate  Pro- 
fessor Gates;  Assistant  Professors  Fletcher,  Krebs,  and  Stone 

The  aim  of  Lebanon  Valley  College  is  to  give  its  students  the  opportunity  to 
procure  a  liberal  education  of  the  highest  quality.  Thus  within  this  general 
objective  of  the  college,  the  program  of  study  in  the  Department  of  Economics  and 
Business  Administration  is  designed  to  provide  for  majors  in  accounting,  business 
administration,  and  economics: 

1.  A  broad  and  liberal  education  so  that  graduates  of  this  department  will 
play  a  more  active  role  in  our  changing  world  of  ideas  and  actions;  and 

2.  A  sound  and  integrated  knowledge  of  the  essential  principles  and  prob- 
lems of  business  administration,  accounting,  and  economics. 

Majors:  For  the  student  majoring  in  accounting,  or  business  administration,  or 
economics,  a  common  core  of  requirements  includes:  Accounting  151;  Business 
Administration  100  and  180;  Economics  110,  120,  201,  and  221;  and  Accounting 
490  or  Business  Administration  490  or  Economics  490,  plus  12  additional  credit 
hours  in  the  department  of  which  6  credit  hours  must  be  in  the  major  area,  for  a 
minimum  of  36  hours.* 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  accounting,  or  business  administration 
or  economics,  the  B.S.  degree  is  offered. 

For  an  outline  of  the  suggested  program  in  economics  and  business  adminis- 
tration, see  page  97. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

The  purpose  of  the  departmental  honors  program  is  to  provide  opportunity 
for  capable  students  to  undertake  advanced  academic  work  independently  under 
the  supervision  of  one  or  more  members  of  the  department. 

In  order  to  participate  in  the  departmental  honors  program,  the  applicant  is 
required  to: 

1.  demonstrate  in  his  academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship  required  to 
undertake  extensive  research  projects, 

2.  apply  for  and  receive  permission  for  such  participation  from  the  departmental 
chairman  and  from  the  dean  of  the  college  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first 
semester  of  the  junior  year, 

3.  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  research  project, 

4.  prepare  a  paper  on  the  research  project  under  the  guidance  of  one  or  more  staff 
members  of  the  department, 

5.  submit  the  paper  in  March  of  the  senior  year,  and 

6.  present  and  defend  the  paper  before  a  faculty  committee  selected  by  the 
departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college. 

On  the  basis  of  the  student's  performance  in  this  program,  the  departmental 
chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college  will  determine  whether  or  not  the  student 
will  be  graduated  with  departmental  honors. 


*Effective  January  1977.  Students  enrolled  in  the  program  prior  to  this  date  will  be 
permitted  to  complete  the  requirements  as  listed  when  they  first  entered  the  program  or  the 
requirements  listed  above. 

47 


ACCOUNTING 

151.  Principles  of  Financial  Accounting.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  beginning  course  in  accounting.  Common  business  transactions  are  recorded  in 
various  journals  and  summarized  in  general  and  subsidiary  ledgers.  The  effects  of  these 
transactions  are  reported  in  classified  financial  statements. 

152.  Principles  of  Managerial  Accounting.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  accumulation  and  analysis  of  financial  data  for  management 
purposes. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  151. 

251.  Intermediate  Accounting  I.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  advanced  course  in  accounting  principles  stressing  statement  presentation  and 
valuation  problems  in  piesenting  assets,  liabilities,  and  stockholder's  equity  on  the  state- 
ments. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  152. 

252.  Intermediate  Accounting  II.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Emphasis    is   placed   on   the   analysis   of  financial   statements,   effects   of  error  on 
statements,  preparation  of  funds  flow  statements,  and  price  level  adjustments. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  251. 

351.  Advanced  Accounting.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Includes  a  study  of  partnerships,  installment  sales,  consignment  sales,  home  branch 
office  relationships,  business  combinations,  special  problems  of  consolidations,  foreign 
subsidiaries  and  branches,  and  fiduciary  accounting. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  252. 

352.  Government  and  Non-Profit  Accounting.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Basic  concepts  of  fund  and  budgetary  accounting  used  to  account  for  the  financial 
activities  of  federal,  state,  and  local  governmental  units  and  systems  for  achieving  account- 
ing and  administrative  controls  for  service  organizations,  such  as  hospitals,  educational 
institutions,  and  other  non-profit  organizations. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  152. 

390.  Internship.  3-9  hour  credit.  Either  semester. 

Field  experience  in  a  business,  government  or  other  organization  in  some  area  of  ac- 
counting. Ordinarily  a  few  juniors  will  be  chosen  for  the  available  internships  by  the  de- 
partmental faculty. 

452.  Income  Tax  Accounting.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Analysis  of  the  federal  income  tax  law  and  its  applications  to  individuals,  partner- 
ships, fiduciaries,  corporations;  case  problems,  preparation  of  returns. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  152,  or  consent  of  instructor. 

454.  Advanced  Cost  and  Managerial  Accounting.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  costing  for  planning  and  control,  including  cost-volume-profit 
analysis,  budgeting,  capital  budgeting,  inventory  control,  standard  costing,  and  the  concept 
of  relevant  costs. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  152. 

455.  Auditing.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Involves  a  study  of  professional  ethics  and  legal  responsibilities  of  public  accountants, 
generally  accepted  accounting  principles,  and  auditing  procedures. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  252. 

490.  Seminar  and  Special  Problems.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  capstone  course  involving  a  computer  simulation  that  integrates  the  concepts  of  ac- 
counting, economics,  and  business  administration.  Financial  statement  preparation  is  an  es- 
sential segment  of  the  course.  Required  of  all  accounting  majors. 

Prerequisites:  Business  Administration  361;  Accounting  252. 

48 


500.  Independent  Study.  1-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
A  course  designed  for  students  in  the  departmental  honors  program  and  other  quali- 
fied students  who  wish  to  undertake  the  independent  study  in  a  specific  area  of  accounting. 

BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

100.  Introduction  to  Business.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  orientation  to  the  nature  and  environment  of  business,  its  structure,  organization, 
functions  and  opportunities.  Provides  an  integrated  framework  for  further  study  in  account- 
ing, finance,  marketing,  and  management.  (Not  open  to  seniors.) 

180.  Principles  of  Management.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  process  of  utilizing  and  coordinating  all  available  resources  in  order  to 
achieve  the  objectives  of  a  business,  governmental,  educational,  social,  or  religious  organiza- 
tion. Includes  discussions  and  cases  on  decision-making,  planning,  organizing,  staffing, 
motivation,  leadership,  control,  and  communication. 

361.  Corporation  Finance.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  financial  management  covering  analysis  of  asset,  liability  and  capital 
relationships  and  operations;  management  of  current  assets,  working  capital,  cash,  liquid 
assets,  receivables,  inventory;  capital  planning  and  budgeting;  capital  structure  and  di- 
vidend policy;  short  and  intermediate  term  financing;  long  term  financing,  external  and 
internal;  mergers  and  acquisitions:  multinational  operations;  and  corporate  failures  and 
liquidation. 

Prerequisite:  Accounting  152. 

362.  Investments.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Development  and  role  of  investment  and  its  relation  to  other  economic,  legal,  and 
social  institutions.  Includes  discussion  on  investment  principles,  machinery,  policy,  and 
management;  types  of  investment,  and  the  development  of  portfolios  for  individuals  and 
institutions. 

Prerequisite:  Business  Administration  361. 

371/372.   Business  Law  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

Elementary  principles  of  law  as  they  relate  to  the  field  of  business.  Contracts,  agency, 
employment,  commercial  paper,  personal  property,  sales,  security,  devices,  insurance, 
partnerships,  corporation,  real  estate,  estates,  bankruptcy,  and  government  regulations  are 
discussed. 

382.  Marketing.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  marketing  system  within  an  economy  in  terms  of  an  efficient  use  of 
resources  and  the  distribution  from  producers  to  consumers  according  to  the  objectives  of 
the  society;  performance  of  business  activities  to  direct  the  flow  of  goods  and  services  to 
satisfy  customer  needs.  Includes  market  research,  product  development,  packaging,  dis- 
tribution, promotional  activities,  sales  management,  and  price  policy.  To  bridge  the  gap 
between  the  understanding  and  the  application  of  marketing  principles,  students  are 
required  to  prepare  and  discuss  a  number  of  cases  pertaining  to  some  specific  areas  of 
marketing. 

Prerequisites:  Economics  201  and  Business  Administration  180. 

390.  Internship.  3-9  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Field  experience  in  a  business,  government  or  other  organization  in  some  area  of 
business  administration.  Ordinarily,  a  few  juniors  will  be  chosen  for  the  available  intern- 
ships by  the  departmental  faculty. 

490.   Seminar  and  Special  Problems.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Reading,  discussion,  and  research  in  business  administration  under  the  direction  and 
supervision  of  the  departmental  staff.  Required  of  all  business  administration  majors. 
Prerequisites:  Business  Administration  361  or  Accounting  351. 

49 


500.  Independent  Study.  1-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
A   course   designed   for   students   in   the   departmental   honors   program  and   other 
qualified  students  who  wish  to  undertake  independent  study  in  a  specific  area  of  business 
administration. 

ECONOMICS 

Economics  110  and  120  are  prerequisites  for  all  courses  of  a  higher  number  in  this 
section. 

110.  Principles  of  Economics  I.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introductory  study  in  economic  principles  and  the  American  economy  with 
emphasis  on  the  elementary  concepts  of  national  income,  price  level,  business  fluctuations, 
banking  activities,  money  supply,  and  economic  growth. 

120.  Principles  of  Economics  II.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introductory  study  in  economic  principles  and  the  American  economy  with 
emphasis  on  the  elementary  concepts  of  consumption  function,  production  function, 
product  pricing,  factor  pricing,  resource  allocation,  labor  economics,  public  finance,  and 
international  economics. 

130.  Economics  of  Public  Issues.  3:3:0.  Either  semester;  (Not  offered  1979-1980). 

A  survey  and  economic  analysis  of  public  issues. 

201.  Microeconomic  Analysis.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Economic  decision-making  of  firms  and  resource  allocation  of  an  economy,  a  core 
course  studying  tools  of  analysis  for  students  in  economics,  business,  accounting,  and  related 
areas  or  disciplines. 

203.  Macroeconomic  Analysis.  3:3:0  First  semester. 

Theoretical  and  empirical  study  of  national  income  and  business  cycles. 

222.  Quantitative  Methods.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Development  and  application  of  mathematical  concepts  and  statistical  methods  to  the 
analysis  of  theory,  and  the  resolution  of  problems,  in  economics  and  business  administra- 
tion. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  170. 

301.  Labor  Economics  and  Industrial  Relations.  3:3:0.  Not  offered  1979-1980. 

Theoretical  analysis  of  labor  market  functioning,  including  impact  of  unionism, 
government  policy,  demographic  trends,  etc.;  human  capital  theory;  measurement  of  the 
labor  force  and  data  sources:  history  of  the  American  labor  movement:  U.S.  legislation 
affecting  industrial  relations;  collective  bargaining  process  and  the  system  of  industrial 
jurisprudence. 

Prerequisite:  Economics  201  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

312.  Money  and  Banking.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Nature  and  functions  of  money  and  credit.  Development  and  role  of  commercial 
banking  and  central  banking.  Structure  and  functions  of  the  Federal  Reserve  System. 
Monetary  and  banking  theory,  policy,  and  practice.  Influence  on  prices,  level  of  income  and 
employment  and  economic  stability  and  progress. 

321.  Public  Finance.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Revenues  and  expenditures  and  economic  functioning  of  the  federal,  state,  and  local 
governments;  principles  of  taxation — shifting,  incidence,  and  burden;  influence  on  incen- 
tives, income  distribution,  and  resource  allocation;  economic  and  social  aspects  of  public 
spending;  budgetary  control  and  debt  management;  fiscal  policy  and  economic  stability. 

332.  International  Economics.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  theories  and  empirical  analysis  of  international  trade;  capital  movement; 

50 


mechanism  for  attaining  equilibrium;  economic  policies  such  as  tariff,  quota,  monetary 
standards  and  exchange  rate,  state  trading,  cartel,  and  other  international  economic 
agreements. 

390.  Internship.  3-9  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Field  experience  in  a  business,  government  or  other  organization  in  some  area  of  eco- 
nomics. Ordinarily,  a  few  juniors  will  be  chosen  for  the  available  internships  by  the  depart- 
mental faculty. 

401.  History  of  Economic  Thought.  3:3:0.  Not  offered  1979-1980. 

The  evolution  of  economic  thought  through  the  principal  schools  from  mercantilism  to 
the  present.  Attention  will  be  given  to  the  analysis  of  the  various  theories  of  value,  wages, 
interest,  rent,  profit,  price  level,  business  cycles,  and  employment,  and  to  the  influences  of 
earlier  economic  ideas  upon  current  thinking  and  policy-making. 

411.  Economic  Growth  and  Development.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Analysis  of  classical  and  modern  theories  and  models  of  economic  growth;  study  of 
theory  and  implications  of  alternative  development  policies. 

490o  Seminar  and  Special  Problems.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Reading,  discussion,  and  research  in  economics  under  the  direction  and  supervision  of 
the  departmental  staff.  Required  of  all  economics  majors. 
Prerequisite:  Economics  201  or  202. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 

A   course   designed   for   students   in   the   departmental   honors   program   and   other 

qualified  students  who  wish  to  undertake  independent  study  in  a  specific  area  of  economics. 


EDUCATION 


Professor  Ehersole,  Chairman;  Associate  Professors  Herr  and  Petrofes;  Assistant 
Professors  Alhrecht,  and  Jacques,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Knight 

The  aim  of  the  department  of  education  is  to  acquaint  students  with  the  art  of 
teaching  and  to  develop  in  each  prospective  teacher  a  full  realization  of  his 
responsibilities  in  this  profession. 

For  a  statement  of  requirements  for  those  planning  to  enter  the  teaching 
profession,  see  pages  98  and  104-105. 

ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Major:  Elementary  Education  220,  270,  332,  341,  344,  361/362,  440,  444;  Art 
401;  Education  342;  Geography  111;  one  of  the  following:  History  111,  112,  125, 
126;  Psychology  321,  for  a  total  of  51  hours. 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  elementary  education,  the  B.  S.  degree 
is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

The  departmental  honors  program  in  elementary  education  permits  the  capa- 
ble student  to  increase  the  depth  of  his  understanding  in  an  area  of  special  interest 
and  the  general  scope  of  his  knowledge  of  elementary  education.  It  is  planned  as 
an  integral  part  of  the  student's  major  program  rather  than  work  superimposed 
upon  it. 

A  student  majoring  in  elementary  education  may  participate  in  the  de- 
partmental honors  program  when  he  completes  the  freshman-sophomore  college 
honors  program  or  when  he  demonstrates  in  his  academic  work  the  caliber  of 
scholarship  required  to  undertake  an  extensive  research  project.  He  must  also 
have  achieved  a  3.3    grade-point  average  in  departmental  courses  and  a  3.0 

51 


grade-point  average  in  all  college  courses.  Application  is  made  in  writing  to  the 
chairman  of  the  department  not  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior 
year.  Approval  of  the  application  must  be  given  by  the  dean  of  the  college  upon 
recommendation  by  the  department  staff. 

A  maximum  of  nine  credit  hours  may  be  earned  in  this  program.  These  hours 
will  be  distributed  over  the  junior  and  senior  years  with  a  minimum  of  one  and  a 
maximum  of  three  hours  to  be  taken  in  one  semester.  This  must  include  participa- 
tion in  the  Senior  Seminar,  Elementary  Education  444,  which  is  required  of  all 
students  majoring  in  elementary  education.  The  student  will  investigate  an  area  of 
special  interest  beginning  with  the  study  of  the  literature  and  culminating  in  the 
design  and  execution  of  an  approved  experimental  or  theoretical  research  project. 
He  will  submit  to  the  departmental  chairman  periodic  progress  reports  and  any 
other  indication  of  performance  that  may  be  required  by  the  department.  The 
project  should  be  completed  by  March  of  the  senior  year,  at  which  time  the 
student  will  report  and  defend  the  findings  of  the  project  in  a  manner  to  be 
determined  by  the  departmental  staff. 

Graduation  with  departmental  honors  in  elementary  education  will  depend 
on  the  quality  of  performance  in  the  research  project,  the  maintenance  of  the  grade- 
point  averages  required  for  admission  to  the  program,  success  in  the  comprehen- 
sive student-teaching  program,  and  the  final  approval  of  the  departmental  staff 
and  the  dean  of  the  college. 

EDUCATION  COURSES 

for  both  Elementary  and  Secondary  Education 

110.  Foundations  of  Education.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  study  is  made  of  the  social,  historical  and  philosophical  foundations  of  American 
education  correlated  with  a  survey  of  the  principles  and  theories  of  noted  educational 
leaders.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  influence  these  leaders  and  their  followers  have  had  on 
present  day  schools.  Current  issues  and  innovations  are  reviewed. 

331.  Educational  Measurements.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  principles  of  validity  and  reliability,  appraisal  and  construction  of  test 
items  and  consideration  of  the  uses  of  test  results. 

Recommended  elective  in  elementary  and  secondary  fields. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

342.   Reading  Improvement.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  advanced  course  in  reading  giving  special  attention  to  diagnosis,  readiness, 
correction,  and  remediation  in  reading.  Attention  will  be  focused  on  current  research 
findings.  Instruments  and  guidelines  for  effective  diagnostic  teaching  will  be  examined  and 
evaluated. 

Open  only  to  junior  or  senior  students  enrolled  in  the  elementary  and  secondary 
programs. 

346,  Educational  Technology  and  Instructional  Media.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  course  examines  some  of  the  psychological  bases  of  technological  teaching 
devices  and  media,  and  includes  the  study  and  appraisal  of  various  kinds  of  media  and 
equipment.  Applications  and  uses  are  explored.  Instruction  and  experience  in  the  planning 
and  production  of  media  as  well  as  practice  in  the  setting  up  and  operation  of  certain  pieces 
of  technological  teaching  equipment  are  also  offered. 

Field  trips  are  taken  to  functioning  public  school  instructional  materials  centers  and 
some  discussion  is  devoted  to  how  to  establish  and  operate  an  instructional  media  center. 

423.   An  Introduction  to  Guidance.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  overview  of  guidance  in  the  public  schools  including  the  history,  philosophy,  and 
development  of  programs.  Procedures  and  instruments  to  be  employed  by  the  classroom 
teacher;  creation  of  conditions  for  mental  health;  relation  of  guidance  to  other  phases  of 
instruction. 

Prerequisite:  Education  110. 

52 


442.  The  Education  of  the  Exceptional  Child.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  general  view  of  the  practices  and  programs  for  the  education  of  exceptional  children 
and  youth  beginning  with  early  childhood.  The  study  includes  children  with  physical,  men- 
tal, and  emotional  handicaps,  and  gifted  children.  Field  work  in  special  classes,  child  study, 
and  the  survey  of  curricular  materials  used  in  their  education  are  part  of  the  requirements. 

Prerequisites:  Education  110,  Psychology  110. 

ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

220.  Music  in  the  Elementary  School.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Fundamentals  of  music,  varied  approaches  for  developing  conceptual  learning, 
movement,  playing  classroom  instruments,  introduction  of  Orff  and  Kodaly  techniques, 
creative  applications,  guided  listening,  the  child  voice,  materials  for  use  in  interest 
centers  in  elementary  school,  beginning  with  early  childhood. 

250.   Mathematics  for  the  Elementary  Grades.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  fundamental  concepts  of  mathematics  and  a  survey  of  the  new 
and  old  in  mathematical  disciplines  as  applied  in  the  elementary  school. 

260.   Principles  and  Practices  in  Early  Childhood  Education.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Study  of  three  differing  types  of  early  childhood  programs — Montessori,  Piaget  and 
Open  (Classroom — including  their  theories,  materials,  curricula  and  methods.  Course  will 
include  field  experience  in  local  programs,  and  preparation  of  a  prepared  plan  for  teaching 
in  one  type  of  program. 

270.  Children's  Literature.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  literature  of  childhood,  including  early  childhood.  Attention  is 
given  to  children's  reading  interests,  criteria  and  aids  in  selecting  materials,  a  brief  survey  of 
the  development  of  children's  literature,  and  the  art  of  storytelling  and  its  place  in  the 
curriculum. 

332.  The  Physical  Sciences  in  the  Elementary  School.  3:3:2.  Second  semester. 

Recent  developments  in  arithmetic  and  science  and  their  applications  in  the  class- 
room; curriculum  planning;  modern  teaching  methods;  instructional  materials;  demonstra- 
tions and  experiments  adopted  in  the  elementary  classroom,  beginning  with  early  childhood. 

Prerequisites:  Elementary  Education  250  and  one  year  of  a  laboratory  science. 

341.  Teaching  of  Reading.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  problems  and  procedures  of  instruction  in  the  development  of  basic 
reading  skills  from  the  readiness  programs  of  Early  Childhood  Education  to  the  more  com- 
prehensive techniques  required  for  the  teaching  of  reading  in  the  elementary  and  middle 
schools.  Effective  reading  programs,  courses  of  study,  teaching  and  learning  materials,  and 
research  studies  in  this  field  are  investigated  and  evaluated. 

Prerequisite:  Elementary  Education  270. 

344.   Health  and  Safety  Education.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  course  includes  a  study  of  basic  health  and  safety  practices  and  procedures  as 
applied  to  the  elementary  school,  a  program  of  physical  education  for  elementary  school 
children,  an  American  Red  Cross-approved  program  of  first  aid,  and  an  evaluation  of  sources 
and  use  of  materials. 

Prerequisites:  Education  110;  Psychology  220. 

361/362.  Communications  and  Group  Processes  in  the  Elementary  School  I,  II. 

3:2:2  per  semester. 

A  course  dealing  with  fundamentals  for  language  growth  in  the  areas  of  oral  and 
written  expression,  correct  usage,  spelling,  and  handwriting  beginning  with  early  child- 
hood. The  development  of  basic  concepts  related  to  effective  citizenship  in  a  democracy.  A 
variety  of  learning  experiences  and  materials  will  be  used  and  evaluated;  especially,  stu- 
dents will  have  experience  in  preparing  an  individual  resource  unit. 

440.   Student  Teaching.  Twelve  semester  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

Each  student  spends  an  entire  semester  in  a  classroom  of  an  area  public  school  under 

53 


the  supervision  of  a  carefully  selected  cooperating  teacher.  Open  to  seniors  only.  A 
cumulative  grade-point  average  of  2.0  during  the  first  six  semesters  in  college  is  required. 

Student  teaching  begins  with  the  opening  of  the  public  schools.  College  residence 
halls  and  dining  hall  are  available  to  the  student  teachers. 

Prerequisites:  Education  110;  Psychology  220;  Elementary  Education  270,  332,  341, 
and  361/362. 

444.  Senior  Seminar.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  semester  gives  immediate  help  with  pertinent  problems  in  student  teaching. 
Topics  related  to  over-all  success  in  teaching  will  be  thoroughly  dealt  with:  professional 
ethics,  classroom  management,  home  and  school  relationships,  community  responsibilities, 
professional  standards,  and  other  related  areas. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
A  course  designed  for  the  student  who  desires  to  engage  in  independent  study  whether 
enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  or  not. 


SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

420.   Human  Growth  and  Development.  3:7V2:0.  Either  semester. 

This  course  deals  with  the  practical  application  of  principles  of  psychology  and 
human  learning  to  secondary  school  teaching.  Such  topics  as  classroom  management, 
inter-personal  relations  in  the  school  setting,  and  the  psychology  of  teaching  are  discussed 
and  studied. 

Required  of  all  seniors  in  secondary  education. 

Prerequisite:  Education  110. 

430.  Practicum  and  Methods.  3:7V2:0.  Either  semester. 

This  course  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  students  with  some  basic  behaviors  in  the 
classroom  that  will  help  the  prospective  teacher  in  any  subject  area.  A  text  serves  as  a  source 
of  information  about  "methods  of  teaching"  and  planning.  Students  work  independently  on 
the  problems  related  to  their  major  areas  and  teaching  reading  in  their  particular  fields. 
Visits  to  the  area  schools,  class  presentations  by  teachers  from  these  schools,  and  the 
students'  vidio-taped  presentations  for  their  own  analysis  all  help  to  prepare  them  for  the 
student  teaching  experience. 

This  course  is  required  of  all  seniors  in  secondary  education,  except  English  majors 
who  will  take  English  431. 

Prerequisite:  Education  110. 

440.  Student  Teaching.  Nine  semester  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Each  student  spends  one  semester  in  a  classroom  at  an  area  school  under  the 
supervision  of  a  carefully  selected  cooperating  teacher.  Open  to  seniors  only.  Requirements 
are:  (1)  a  cumulative  grade-point  average  of  2.0  during  the  first  six  semesters  in  college,  (2) 
the  written  recommendation  of  the  major  adviser,  (3]  the  approval  of  the  director  of 
secondary  student  teaching,  and  (4)  the  approval  of  the  dean  of  the  college. 

Prerequisites:  Education  110,  420;  Education  430  or  English  431. 


ENGLISH 

Professor  Ford,  ChQirman;  Professor  Emeritus  Strubie;  Professor  O'Donnell;  As- 
sociate Professors  Billings,  Kearney,  and  Woods;  Assistant  Professors  Berger, 
Kirby,  and  Markowicz 

Major:  Each  English  major  devises,  u^ith  his  adviser,  a  major  program, 
reflecting  the  major's  vocational  goals  and  allowing  him  or  her  to  demonstrate 
mastery  of  the  following  competencies: 

54 


An  English  major 

a.  Must  be  able  to  display  proficiency  in  grammatical  skills  and  writing 
conventions  and  to  communicate  effectively  with  rhetorical  skills  such  as 
limiting  a  subject,  thinking  out  a  thesis,  organizing  specific  and  general 
material,  formulating  sentences  which  reflect  logical  coordinate  and 
subordinate  relationships,  and  selecting  appropriate  words. 

b.  Must  be  broadly  knowledgeable  about  major  authors,  works,  trends,  and 
issues  of  Western  literature. 

c.  Must  display  a  deeper  knowledge  of  an  author(s),  work(s)  and  literary 
subject(s),  developing  critical  skills,  including  some  responsible  use  of 
secondary  sources,  sufficient  to  discuss  a  literary  work  as  a  separate 
esthetic  entity  and  as  a  representative  of  a  particular  genre  and  milieu. 

d.  Must  have  a  fundamental  knowledge  of  the  historical  development  and 
present  character  of  the  English  language. 

e.  (Secondary  education  majors]  Must  have  a  working  knowledge  of  at  least 
two  grammars. 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  English,  the  B.  A.  degree  is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  who  are  majoring  in  English  may  become  candidates  for  departmen- 
tal honors  if  they  have  a  grade-point  average  of  3.0  in  courses  in  English,  and  if 
they  receive  permission  from  the  chairman  of  the  department  and  the  dean  of  the 
college,  ordinarily  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  their  junior  year. 

The  specific  program  for  each  student  accepted  for  the  departmental  honors 
program  will  be  worked  out  by  that  student  in  consultation  with  the  chairman  of 
the  department. 


TEACHING  INTERN  PROGRAM 

A  senior  who  has  been  accepted  for  departmental  honors  and  who  looks 
forward  to  a  career  in  college  teaching  may,  upon  recommendation  of  the 
chairman  of  the  department  and  appointment  by  the  dean  of  the  college,  become 
an  intern  in  English,  to  render  such  assistance  in  the  duties  of  the  department  of 
English  as  will  in  some  measure  help  to  prepare  him  for  a  professional  career  in 
this  field.  Ordinarily  only  one  intern  will  be  appointed  in  any  one  academic  year. 


111/112.   English  Composition  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

Both  semesters  concentrate  on  developing  basic  skills  of  composition. 

211/212.   Word  Study  I,  II.  1:1:0   per  semester. 

This  course  has  a  twofold  purpose:  (1)  to  give  the  student  some  insight  into  linguistic 
processes,  particularly  as  they  pertain  to  the  growth  of  the  English  vocabulary;  and  (2)  to 
increase  the  range  of  the  student's  vocabulary,  in  order  that  he  may  have  greater  mastery 
over  his  native  tongue.  Problems  of  pronunciation  and  spelling  go  hand  in  hand  with 
vocabulary  building. 

215.   Writing  Workshop.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Practice  and  instruction  in  sound  principles  of  composition  with  the  student  choosing 
the  type  of  writing  he  or  she  wishes  to  pursue;  e.g.  journalistic,  technical,  scientific  or 
general  expository  writing. 

218.   Oral  Communication.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

This  course  is  designed  to  establish  basic  concepts,  understandings,  and  attitudes 
concerning  the  nature  and  importance  of  oral  communication  and  to  provide  experience  in 
speaking  and  in  competent  criticism  of  these  activities. 

55 


221/222.  American  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

First  semester:  a  survey  of  American  literature  from  the  beginnings  to  the  Civil  War. 
Second  semester:  a  survey  of  American  literature  from  the  Civil  War  to  the  present  day. 

223.  Creative  Writing.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

This  course  alternates  between  the  writing  of  fiction  and  the  writing  of  poetry. 

225/226.   Survey  of  English  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  study  of  English  literature  from  the  beginnings  to  our  own  time,  viewed  in 
perspective  against  the  background  of  English  life  and  thought. 

227/228.   World  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

While  the  organization  of  this  course  is  basically  chronological,  the  emphasis  is 
thematic:  Major  ideas  of  western  thought  are  traced  through  important  literary  works  from 
the  ancient  Greeks  to  the  moderns. 

250-299.   Studies  in  Literary  Contexts.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

This  sequence  of  courses,  several  of  which  are  offered  any  one  year,  examines  literary 
works  within  the  larger  contexts  of  social  and  intellectual  concerns. 

321/322.  Shakespeare  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  survey  of  English  drama  from  its  beginnings  to  and  including  Shakespeare:  (a)  a 
study  of  Shakespeare's  history  plays  and  their  place  in  the  Elizabethan  world,  and  an 
analysis  of  early  Shakespearean  comedy;  (b)  a  study  of  Shakespeare's  major  tragedies,  the 
problem  comedies,  and  the  late  romantic  comedies. 

331.  History  of  the  English  Language.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Historical  study  of  English  sounds,  grammatical  forms,  and  vocabulary;  and  brief 
survey  of  standards  of  correctness  and  current  usage. 

332.  Chaucer.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Intended  to  give  the  student  a  reasonable  familiarity  with  Chaucer  and  other  medieval 
authors,  and  to  develop  skill  in  the  reading  of  Middle  English. 

334.  Modern  Grammars.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  review  of  traditional  grammar  and  an  introduction  to  recent  concepts  in  grammar 
resulting  from  developments  in  structural  linguistics. 
Prerequisite:  English  331. 

337.  The  Novel.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  novel  in  England  from  Richardson  to  Joyce. 

338.  Contemporary  Drama.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  survey-workshop  of  Continental,  British,  and  American  drama  from  Ibsen  to  the 
present. 

339.  History  of  the  Theater.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  selection  of  Western  and  some  Oriental  dramas  from  Aeschylus  to  Ibsen  presented 
historically,  with  attention  to  theater  modes  and  techniques. 

344.  Theater  Workshop.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  elements  of  theater  art  oriented  toward  stage  presentation,  with  classroom  practice 
in  production  of  scenes  and  whole  plays. 

390.  Internship  1-9  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

431.  The  Teaching  of  Enghsh  in  Secondary  Schools.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Concerned  primarily  with  the  role  of  the  English  teacher  in  the  secondary  schools. 
Attention  may  be  given  to  the  teaching  of  composition,  mechanics,  speech,  and  literary  forms. 
Sessions  on  recent  research  in  the  field  of  English,  resource  materials,  mass  media,  and 
teaching  techniques  will  be  included. 

56 


440.   Special  Problems.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

Offered  according  to  interests  of  students  and  staff.  This  course  will  rotate  among 
faculty  members,  the  content  of  the  course  to  be  determined  by  the  instructor  with  the  advice 
of  the  department  and  consent  of  the  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college. 

Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 

444.  Seminar  in  English.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

This  capstone  course  for  English  majors  varies  in  content  depending  on  the  interests  of 
the  instructor. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit) 
For  the  student  who  desires  to  engage  in  a  project  of  independent  work  whether 
enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  or  not. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

Assistant  Professor  Iglesias,  Chairman;  Associate  Professors  Cantrell  and  Scott; 
Assistant  Professors  Markowicz,  Saylor,  and  Strange. 

The  study  of  a  modern  foreign  language  has  a  three-fold  aim.  The  first  is  to 
develop  fluency  in  the  basic  communication  skills — speaking,  listening  com- 
prehension, reading  and  wanting.  The  second  is  to  provide  a  direct,  concrete 
understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  literature,  civilization  and  cultural  heritage 
of  the  people  whose  language  is  studied  by  use  of  the  language  and  cultural 
elements.  The  third  aim  is  to  develop  an  understanding  of  language  as  the 
fundamental  medium  in  which  mankind  thinks,  perceives  and  interacts. 

The  department  prepares  the  language  major  for  a  career  in  many  crucial  and 
challenging  fields:  teaching,  diplomatic  and  government  service,  foreign  trade, 
business  and  industry,  and  social  service  fields.  Since  knowledge  of  a  foreign 
language  alone  is  often  insufficient  for  many  of  these  careers,  the  language  major 
should,  as  appropriate,  combine  study  of  foreign  languages  with  work  in  other 
disciplines. 

Major:  A  student  may  elect  to  major  in  a  foreign  language  or  in  foreign  lan- 
guages. A  major  in  one  language  requires  FL  252,  Introduction  to  Linguistics,  and 
24  hours  above  the  intermediate  level  in  the  language  studied.  A  major  in  foreign 
languages  has  the  same  requirements  plus  a  minimum  of  12  hours  above  the  in- 
termediate level  in  a  second  language.  If  a  certificate  to  teach  is  desired,  FL  440, 
Methods  of  Teaching  Foreign  Language,  is  also  required. 

In  French,  German  and  Spanish  at  least  one  advanced  course  in  offered  each 
semester.  All  courses  are  conducted  in  the  language  studied  with  the  exception  of 
Greek,  Latin,  and  Scientific  German. 

It  is  strongly  recommended  that  foreign  language  majors  be  proficient  in  more 
than  one  language,  and  that  the  junior  year  be  spent  in  study  abroad.  To  facilitate 
study  abroad.  Lebanon  Valley  College  has  become  a  cooperating  member  of  the 
International  Studies  Program  of  Central  College  (Pella,  Iowa).  This  program 
provides  for  11  or  12  months  study  of  German  in  Germany  and  Austria,  French  in 
France,  and  Spanish  in  Spain. 

Degree;  For  the  student  who  majors  in  foreign  languages,  French,  German,  or 
Spanish,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  who  are  majoring  in  foreign  languages  may  become  candidates  for 
departmental  honors  if  they  have  a  grade-point  average  of  3.0  in  departmental 

57 


courses,  and  if  they  receive  permission  from  the  departmental  staff  and  the  dean  of 
the  college,  ordinarily  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  their  junior 
year. 

Honors  work  will  involve  the  selection  of  a  topic  for  investigation  under  the 
guidance  of  the  department  adviser,  independent  reading  and  study,  frequent 
conferences  with  the  adviser,  preparation  of  a  paper  to  be  submitted  by  March  15  of 
the  senior  year,  satisfactory  defense  of  the  paper  before  a  committee  composed  of 
the  departmental  staff,  the  dean  of  the  college,  and  any  other  faculty  members  who 
may  be  invited  to  participate,  and,  finally,  an  oral  examination  in  the  language  of 
major  concentration.  If  these  requirements  are  satisfied,  the  student  will  be 
graduated  with  honors  in  his  major  language. 

FOREIGN  LANGUAGES 

252.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1981-82. 

An  introductory  study  of  language  as  a  communication  system,  designed  for  the  non- 
major  and  major  alike  and  taught  entirely  in  English.  The  course  studies  the  mechanisms  by 
which  language  functions  (sound  system,  syntax,  semantics),  the  major  theoretical  explana- 
tions for  them,  and  the  biological,  psychological,  sociological  and  historical  foundations  of 
language. 

315H/316H.  Contemporary  European  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0.  per  semester. 

Reading,  in  translation,  of  selected  works  by  Hesse,  Sartre,  Camus,  Brecht, 
Kazantzakis,  Solzhenitsyn,  and  others.  Designed  to  familiarize  students  with  important 
authors  and  trends  in  contemporary  European  literature. 

Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing. 

440.  Methods  in  Teaching  Foreign  Languages.   2:2:0.  Either  semester.  Offered  as  needed. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  modern  methods  of  foreign  language  teaching  in  secondary 
schools  with  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of  basic  skills. 

Prerequisites:  Foreign  Language  252  and  French,  Germaii  or  Spanish  116  or  216 
or  equivalent. 

French 

101,  102.  Elementary  French  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  beginning  course  in  French. 

Ill,  112.  Intermediate  French  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  French  102  with  further  practice  in  conversation,  comprehension, 
reading,  and  writing.  Basic  readings  from  literature  and  from  contemporary  French  sources. 
Attention  is  given  to  the  cultural  background  of  the  readings. 

Prerequisite:  French  102  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  French. 

115,  116.  Introduction  to  French  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  general  language  review  with  intensive  practice  in  the  four  basic  language  skills 
through  a  study  of  selected  literary  works  in  their  cultural  and  historic  contexts. 

Prerequisite:  four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students;  or  French  112. 

215.  French  Culture.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  modern  France  with  special  attention  to  those  qualities  and  characteristics 
which  are  uniquely  French.  Intended  both  to  provide  a  useful  background  for  the  study  of 
French  literature  and  to  prepare  students  to  spend  the  junior  year  in  France.  Taught  entirely 
in  French. 

Prerequisite:  four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students  or  French  112. 

221.  French  Literature  of  the  Middle  Ages.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  masterpieces  of  the  Medieval  French  Literature  in  the  context  of  the 
social  and  intellectual  climate  in  which  they  were  produced. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

58 


222.  French  Literature  of  the  Renaissance.        3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  major  works  of  the  French  Renaissance  as  a  literary  reflection  of  the 
tremendous  vitality  and  progress  achieved  in  all  sectors  of  society. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

331.  French  Literature  of  the  Age  of  Louis  XIV.     3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

A  study  of  the  major  authors  of  this  apogee  of  French  civilization,  and  how  the 
particular  social  structure  and  institutions  of  the  time  influenced  these  authors. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

332.  French  Literature  of  the  Enlightenment.      3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

A  study  of  the  main  literary  and  philosophical  currents,  with  particular  attention  to 
their  influence  on  the  French  and  American  Revolutions. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

441.  The  Modern  Novel  in  France.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  modern  French  novel. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

442.  Modern  Drama  and  Poetry  of  France.        3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  modern  drama  and  poetry  of  France. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

445/446.  Seminar  I,  IL  1-3  hours  credit  per  semester. 

This  seminar  is  designed  to  supplement  and  integrate  the  student's  knowledge,  to 
stimulate  individual  study  and  research,  and  to  prepare  him  for  future  work  in  his  field.  The 
course  content  varies  according  to  the  needs  of  the  group  involved.  For  those  students  who 
are  planning  to  teach,  the  seminar  will  provide  instruction  in  teaching  methods. 

Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
This  course  is  designed  for  the  student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  independent  study 
whether  enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  or  not. 
Prerequisite:  French  116  or  equivalent. 


German 

101,  102.   Elementary  German  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  beginning  course  in  German. 

Ill,  112.   Intermediate  German  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  German  102  with  practice  in  conversation,  dictation,  reading  and 
writing.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  cultural  and  historical  background  of  the  literature  that  is 
read. 

Prerequisite:  German  102  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  German. 

113,  114.  Scientific  German  I,  IL  3:3:0   per  semester. 

Practice  in  reading  scientific  and  technical  German  with  emphasis  on  vocabulary  and 
the  special  difficulties  inherent  in  this  type  of  writing.  General  readings  followed  by 
readings  in  the  student's  major  field. 

115,  116.   Introduction  to  German  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  general  language  review  with  intensive  practice  in  the  four  basic  language  skills 
through  a  study  of  selected  literary  works  in  their  cultural  and  historic  contexts. 

Prerequisite:  four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students;  or  German  112. 

215.   German  Culture.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  modern  Germany  with  special  attention  to  those  qualities,  characteristics 
and  traditions  which  are  uniquely  German.  Intended  to  provide  a  useful  background  for  the 

59 


study  of  German  literature  and  as  a  preparation  for  the  junior  year  abroad.  Taught  entirely  in 
German. 

Prerequisite:  Four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students;  or  German  112. 

216.  Advanced  Conversation  and  Composition.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980 

and  every  other  year 

Intensive  practice  in  spoken  and  written  German  on  an  advanced  grammatical  and 
stylistic  level. 

Prerequisite:  German  115  or  215,  or  equivalent. 

221.  German  Literature  from  the  Beginnings  to  1750.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  representative  literary  works  from  the  early  Middle  Ages  through  the  ba- 
roque. Emphasis  is  on  the  generation  writing  ca.  1200. 
Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

331.  German  Literature  from  1750  to  1848.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

Studies  the  effects  of  the  enlightenment  in  Germany  and  the  subsequent  development 
of  German  romanticism.  Offers  a  close  reading  of  major  works  and  extensive  background 
readings  in  the  history  and  esthetics  of  the  period. 

Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

332.  Goethe  and  Schiller.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

Offers  an  introduction  to  the  biographies,  society  and  artistic  achievements  of  these 
preeminent  literary  figures. 

Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

410.  Special  Topics  in  German  Language.  3:3:0.  Either  semester.  Offered  as  needed. 

Advanced  study  of  an  aspect  of  the  German  language.  Topic  varies  according  to  the 
needs  of  the  students,  e.g..  Advanced  Grammar,  Stylistics,  History  of  the  German  Language. 
This  course  is  ordinarily  offered  once  every  three  years  unless  demand  arises  more  fre- 
quently. 

Prerequisite:  German  116  or  216,  or  equivalent. 

441.  German  Literature  from  1848  to  the  Present.        3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  examination  of  masterpieces  of  German  fiction,  drama  and  poetry  with  special  at- 
tention to  the  changing  role  of  the  artist  in  society. 
Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

442.  Topics  in  Modem  German  Literature.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Offers  a  detailed  study  of  one  aspect  of  modern  German  literature,  e.g.,  the  novel,  con- 
temporary authors,  twentieth  century  drama,  literary  expressionism. 
Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
This  course  is  designed  for  the  student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  independent  study 
whether  enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  or  not. 
Prerequisite:  German  116  or  equivalent. 

Greek 

101,  102.  Elementary  Greek  I,  IL  3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  intensive  course  in  the  basic  elements  of  ancient  Greek.  A  study  of  forms  and 
syntax,  with  easy  prose  composition. 

Ill,  112.  Intermediate  Greek  I,  11  3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

First  semester:  readings  from  the  New  Testament  Gospels. 

Second  semester:  readings  from  Xenophon's  Anabasis.  A  review  of  grammar  through- 
out the  year. 

Prerequisite:  Greek  102. 

60 


321.  Readings  from  the  Book  of  Acts.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Prerequisite:  Greek  212. 

322.  Readings  in  Hellenistic  Greek.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Selections  from  the  Septuagint,  the  Greek  church  fathers. 
Prerequisite:  Greek  212. 

431.  Readings  from  the  Epistles  of  Paul.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Prerequisite:  Greek  212. 

432.  Readings  from  the  Greek  Philosophers.     3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Prerequisite:  Greek  212. 


Latin 

101.  Elementary  Latin  I.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

A  beginning  course  covering  the  basic  grammar  and  syntax,  with  some  reading  of 
ancient  writers. 

102.  Elementary  Latin  IL  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

A  review  of  Latin  grammar  and  syntax  via  translation  of  English  to  Latin;  and,  reading 
of  Latin  prose  selections  including  Cicero. 
Prerequisite:  Latin  101  or  equivalent. 

111.  112.   Intermediate  Latin.  3:3:0  per  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Review  of  forms  and  syntax  and  readings  of  selections  from  prose  works  such  as 
Cicero's  Essays. 

Prerequisite:  Latin  102,  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  Latin. 


Spanish 

101,102.   Elementary  Spanish  I,  n.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  beginning  course  in  Spanish;  audio-active  technique. 

111.  112.   Intermediate  Spanish  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

A  continuation  of  Spanish  102  with  further  practice  in  conversation,  dictation,  and  in 
reading  and  writing.  Attention  is  given  to  Spanish  literature  in  its  cultural  and  historical 
context. 

Prerequisite:  Spanish  102  or  two  years  of  secondary  school  Spanish. 

115,  116.  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester, 

A  general  language  review  with  intensive  practice  in  the  four  basic  language  skills 
through  a  study  of  selected  literary  works  in  their  cultural  and  historic  contexts. 

Prerequisite:  four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students;  or  Spanish  112. 

215.   Hispanic  Culture.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  Hispanic  culture  as  found  in  modern  Spain  and  its  reflection  in  American 
countries  and  in  the  Spanish  language.  Intended  both  as  a  useful  background  for  the  study  of 
literature  and  as  a  preparation  for  the  junior  year  abroad.  Taught  entirely  in  Spanish. 

Prerequisite:  Four  years  of  secondary  school  language  or  three  years  for  specially 
qualified  students;  or  Spanish  112. 

221.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Middle  Ages  and  Early  Renaissance. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Reading  of  the  outstanding  works  of  the  period  with  emphasis  on  the  beginnings  of  the 
Renaissance  in  Spain. 

Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

222.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Golden  Age.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offererd  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  major  works  of  the  Renaissance  period  in  Spain. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

61 


331.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  18th  and  19th  Centuries. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

Readings  from  the  Enlightenment  in  Spain  and  a  study  of  the  major  works  of 
Romanticism  and  Realism. 

Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

332.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  20th  Century.      3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

Sarting  with  the  Generation  '98  and  Modernism,  a  study  of  all  the  movements  and 
some  of  the  outstanding  works  of  this  century. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

441.  Spanish  American  Literature  to  the  20th  Century. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Readings  of  the  representative  authors  from  the  Colonial  and  Independence  periods  of 
Spanish  American  literature. 

Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

442.  Spanish  American  Literature  of  the  20th  Century. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  important  writers  of  the  early  part  of  the  century,  with  emphasis  on  recent 
developments  in  the  literature  of  Spanish  America. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

445/446.  Seminar  I,  IL  1-3  hours  credit  per  semester. 

This  seminar  is  designed  to  supplement  and  integrate  the  student's  knowledge,  to 
stimulate  individual  study  and  research,  and  to  prepare  him  for  future  work  in  his  field.  The 
course  content  varies  according  to  the  needs  of  the  group  involved.  For  those  students  who 
are  planning  to  teach,  the  seminar  will  provide  instruction  in  teaching  methods. 

Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
This  course  is  designed  for  the  student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  independent  study 
whether  enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  or  not. 
Prerequisite:  Spanish  116  or  equivalent. 


GEOGRAPHY 

Professor  Ehersole;  Assistant  Professor  Jacques 

111.  World  Geography  I  (Physical  Geography).  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

The  first  course  of  a  two-course  sequence  required  of  elementary  education  majors  and 
those  who  wish  to  be  certified  to  teach  comprehensive  social  studies  in  secondary  school. 
The  course  explores  the  physical  aspects  of  the  earth,  its  place  in  the  solar  system,  earth 
movements,  time,  seasons,  use  of  globes  and  maps,  earth's  waters,  land  forms,  climate,  soil 
types,  weather  phenomena,  and  processes  which  form  and  change  the  earth's  surface. 

112.  World  Geography  II  (Regional  Cultural  Geography).  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

This  course  is  recommended  for  elementary  education  majors  and  is  required  for  those 
wishing  to  be  certified  in  comprehensive  social  studies.  The  course  examines  various 
countries  and  regions  of  the  world,  relating  the  geographic  features  of  each  to  the  life  and 
culture  of  the  people.  Natural  resources  and  economy  of  each  region  are  studied  as  well  as 
such  facts  as  states  and  capitals,  population  density,  food  supply,  and  ecological  factors. 

German 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  59. 

Greek 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  60. 
62 


HISTORY  AND  POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Professor  Geffen,  Chairman;  Professor  Fehr;  Associate  Professor  Norton;  Assistant 
Professor  Joyce. 

The  aim  in  the  teaching  of  history  is  to  acquaint  the  student  with  human 
behavior  in  the  dimension  of  past  time,  in  the  belief  that  by  thus  extending  the 
range  of  his  knowledge  he  may  also  enlarge  the  scope  of  his  sympathies  and 
become  more  richly  human. 

The  aim  in  the  teaching  of  political  science  is  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the 
many-sided  aspects  of  government,  in  the  belief  that  by  thus  enlarging  the  extent 
of  his  knowledge  he  may  expand  the  scope  of  his  understanding  and  adopt  a  critical 
and  objective  attitude  toward  the  problems  of  modern  society. 

The  department  also  prepares  students  for  graduate  and  law  schools  and  for 
careers  in  teaching,  government,  and  business. 

HISTORY 

Major:  Four  one-semester  courses  in  European  history  as  approved  by  the 
adviser;  History  125  and  235/236  or  History  126  and  225/226  or  History  225/226 
and  235/236  in  American  history;  one  course  from  among  History  343,  344,  345, 
346;  and  History  213  and  412,  for  a  minimum  of  30  hours.  Substitution  may  be 
approved  by  the  chairman  upon  request. 

Degree;   For  the  student  who  majors  in  history,  the  B.  A.  degree  is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  majoring  in  history  may  participate  in  the  departmental  honors 
program  when  they  fulfill  the  following  requirements:  (1)  demonstrate  in  their 
academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship  required  to  undertake  an  extensive 
research  project;  (2)  achieve  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  departmental  courses  and 
a  2.5  grade-point  average  in  all  college  courses;  and  (3)  apply  for  and  receive 
permission  for  such  participation  from  the  departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of 
the  college  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year. 

The  student  may  work  for  from  one  to  three  semester  hours  credit  per 
semester  for  a  maximum  of  nine  semester  hours  in  the  departmental  honors 
program.  A  member  of  the  departmental  staff  will  serve  as  his  honors  adviser. 

During  his  participation  in  the  program,  the  student  must  (1)  submit  to  his 
honors  adviser  periodic  progress  reports;  (2]  show  progress  at  a  rate  and  level  in- 
dicating that  he  will  complete  the  program  on  time  and  at  the  desired  level  of 
achievement;  and  (3)  maintain  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  departmental  courses 
and  a  2.5  grade-point  average  in  all  college  courses. 

The  participant  must  (1)  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  research  topic;  (2) 
prepare  an  essay  on  the  subject  selected  for  research  under  the  guidance  of  his 
honors  adviser;  (3)  complete  the  writing  of  the  essay  by  March  1  of  the  senior  year; 
and  (4)  defend  the  essay  in  a  manner  to  be  determined  by  the  departmental  staff 
and  the  dean  of  the  college.  Upon  fulfilling  these  requirements,  the  student  will  be 
recommended  by  the  departmental  chairman  to  the  dean  of  the  college  for 
graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

111/112.  History  of  Western  Civilization  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

The  first  semester  covers  the  development  of  Western  European  culture  in  all  its 
aspects  from  its  Near  Eastern  origins  to  about  1715.  The  second  semester  covers  its  evolution 
during  the  eighteenth,  nineteenth,  and  twentieth  centuries. 

125/126.  Survey  of  United  States  History  I,  IL  3:3:0  per  semester. 

The  first  semester  covers  the  development  of  the  United  States  to  1865,  the  second 
semester  from  1865  to  the  present.  Special  emphasis  throughout  the  course  is  placed  upon 
historiographical  philosophy  and  method. 

63 


211.  Greek  and  Roman  History.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  examination  of  the  origins,  structure,  and  values  of  Greek  and  Roman  societies  from 
about  1200  B.  C.  to  about  500  A.  D.  The  Mediterranean  nature  of  these  cultures  and  the 
historians'  treatment  of  them  are  emphasized. 

212.  The  Middle  Ages.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  emergence  of  a  European  society  from  500  to  1300.  Emphasis  is  on  the 
social  and  intellectual  aspects  of  medieval  life,  and  the  historiographical  record  is  analyzed. 

213.  Introduction  to  Historiography.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

Theory  and  practice  in  the  writing  of  history.  The  work  of  selected  historians  is  studied 
and  each  student  conducts  and  reports  upon  his  own  research.  Training  is  given  in  research 
methods  and  in  the  preparation  of  research  reports. 

221.  The  Renaissance  and  Reformation:  1300  to  1600. 

3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  beginnings  of  the  modern  era,  paying  particular  attention  to  the 
inter-relationships  between  its  political,  social,  economic,  and  intellectual  aspects. 

222.  The  Old  Regime:  17th  and  18th  Centuries. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  investigation  of  the  impact  of  modern  science  and  thought  upon  the  development 
of  Western  European  culture.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  nature  of  European  society 
before  the  era  of  revolutions. 

224.  British  History  from  the  Tudors  to  the  Present.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Offered  1979-1980. 

A  survey  focused  on  the  British  Isles  from  Henry  VII  to  Elizabeth  II.  The  cultural  evolu- 
tion of  the  English  people  is  studied  with  emphasis  on  the  political-social-intellectual  con- 
figuration. 

225.  American  History  to  1800.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  examination  is  made  of  all  aspects  of  the  development  of  the  United  States  from  its 
European  origins  to  1800.  Historiographical  issues,  methods,  and  problems  are  stressed. 

226.  American  History  from  1800  to  1865.        3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

The  developments  of  nineteenth  century  American  history  to  the  end  of  the  Civil  War 
are  studied,  with  special  attention  to  historiographical  concerns. 

235.  The  United  States:  1865  to  1900.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

The  post-Civil  War  developments  of  American  history  during  the  nineteenth  century 
are  analyzed  and  interpreted,  with  emphasis  upon  historiography. 

236.  The  United  States:  1900  to  the  Present.     3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

The  twentieth  century  history  of  the  United  States  is  studied  in  all  its  aspects. 
Historiographical  interpretation  is  stressed. 

331.  The  Era  of  Revolutions:  1789  to  1870.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  political  and  economic  changes  in  Europe  from  1789  to  1870  and  the 
total  cultural  impact  of  these  changes. 

332.  Modern  Europe:  1870  to  1945.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  analysis  of  the  nineteenth  century  state  system,  its  economic  and  social  bases,  its 
ideology,  and  its  evolution  through  world  wars  and  technological  revolutions. 

333.  The  Western  Tradition  Since  1945.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

Beginning  with  the  reconstruction  following  World  War  II,  the  course  focuses  upon  the 
intellectual,  social,  and  broadly  political  significance  of  the  period  in  the  context  of  the 
continuing  Western  tradition. 

334.  European  Intellectual  History.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

The  course  examines  main  currents  of  European  thought  from  the  Renaissance  to  the 

64 


present.  Major  themes  to  be  studied  will  be  war  and  peace,  social  and  economic  reform,  and 
revolution.  Primary  materials  will  be  emphasized. 

343.  History  of  Russia.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  survey  of  Russian  history  from  ancient  times  to  the  present,  with  special  attention  to 
developments  since  the  seventeenth  century. 

344.  History  of  the  Far  East.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  cultural  institutions  of  the  Far  East,  with  emphasis 
upon  the  trends  since  1500. 

345.  History  of  Latin  America.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  sur\'ey  of  the  Latin  American  republics  from  their  colonial  beginnings  to  the  present 
time. 

346.  Introduction  to  the  History  of  African  CuUure. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  survey  of  African  culture  from  the  tenth-century  Sudanic  origins  to  the  present  day. 
Emphasis  is  on  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries. 

349.   Select  Problems  in  History.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  course  to  provide  the  student  with  an  opportunity  to  explore  in  depth  a  topic  of 
special  interest. 

Open  to  junior  and  senior  history  majors  and  to  other  students  by  permission  of  the 
instructor. 

390.  Internship.  3-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  15  hours  credit) 

412.   Senior  Seminar  in  History.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  review  of  the  student's  college  program  in  history,  with  reading,  discussion,  and 
writing  to  serve  the  following  purposes:  (1)  synthesis  of  previous  course  work  in  history;  (2) 
relation  of  the  academic  discipline  of  history  to  other  fields  of  knowledge;  and  (3) 
formulation  and  expression  of  a  personal  philosophy  of  history  by  each  student. 

Open  only  to  senior  departmental  majors. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  3  semesters) 
A  course  designed  for  students  who  wish  to  undertake  an  independent  study  project  in 
history.  Open  to  all  students,  subject  to  the  following  qualifications; 

Those  who  do  not  desire  departmental  honors  are  admitted  by  permission  of  the 
instructor  who  agrees  to  accept  supervision  of  the  student's  work. 
Students  desiring  departmental  honors  must  meet  the  conditions  set  forth  above  under 
"Departmental  Honors." 

POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Major:  Political  Science  111/112.  211,  212.  217.  311,  312.  411,  412,  413. 
Substitutions  may  be  approved  by  the  chairman  upon  request.  Majors  are  also 
required  to  take  History  125  and  235/236  or  History  126  and  225/226,  for  a 
minimum  of  39  hours.  History  225/226  and  235/236  may  be  taken  in  place  of  the 
combination  of  either  with  History  125/126  in  which  case  the  student  will  have  a 
total  of  42  hours. 

Degree;  For  the  student  who  majors  in  Political  science,  the  B.  A.  degree  is 
offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  majoring  in  political  science  may  participate  in  the  departmental 
honors  program  when  they  fulfill  the  following  requirements:  (1)  demonstrate  in 
their  academic  work  the  caliber  of  scholarship  required  to  undertake  an  extensive 
research  project:  (2)  achieve  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  departmental  courses  and 
a  2.5  grade-point  average  in  all  college  courses;  and  (3)  apply  for  and  receive 

65 


permission  for  such  participation  from  tlie  departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of 
the  college  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year. 

The  student  may  work  for  from  one  to  three  semester  hours  credit  per 
semester  for  a  maximum  of  nine  semester  hours  in  the  departmental  honors 
program.  A  member  of  the  departmental  staff  will  serve  as  his  honors  adviser. 

During  his  participation  in  the  program,  the  student  must  (1]  submit  to  his 
honors  adviser  periodic  progress  reports;  (2)  show  progress  at  a  rate  and  level 
indicating  that  he  will  complete  the  program  on  time  and  at  the  desired  level  of 
achievement;  and  (3)  maintain  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  departmental  courses 
and  a  2.5  grade-point  in  all  college  courses. 

The  participant  must  (1)  obtain  departmental  approval  of  a  research  topic;  (2) 
prepare  an  essay  on  the  subject  selected  for  research  under  the  guidance  of  his 
honors  adviser;  (3)  complete  the  writing  of  the  essay  by  March  1  of  the  senior  year; 
and  (4)  defend  the  essay  in  a  manner  to  be  determined  by  the  departmental  staff 
and  the  dean  of  the  college.  Upon  fulfilling  these  requirements,  the  student  will 
be  recommended  by  the  departmental  chairman  to  the  dean  of  the  college  for 
graduation  with  departmental  honors. 


111/112.  American  National  Government  I,  II.  3:3:0   per  semester. 

The  first  semester  concentrates  on  backgrounds,  theories,  principles,  processes,  and 
practices  of  American  national  government.  Subject  areas  include:  the  nature  of  democracy, 
constitutional  backgrounds,  federalism  and  its  problems,  civil  rights,  public  opinion  forma- 
tion, voting  behavior,  political  parties,  campaigns  and  elections.  Special  attention  is  given  to 
contemporary  racial  and  student  unrest  in  the  United  States. 

The  second  semester  stresses  institutional  surveys  and  the  actual  work  of  government, 
the  structure,  functions,  and  processes  of  the  main  organs  of  national  government — The 
Presidency,  the  Congress,  the  judiciary,  and  the  bureaucracy — are  examined.  Subject  areas 
covered  include:  the  role  of  government  as  regulator,  promoter,  and  manager;  national 
defense;  foreign  policies;  and  international  development. 

211.  Comparative  Government.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  comparative  study  of  important  political  systems  of  the  world,  including  an 
introduction  to  the  basic  methodologies.  The  course  examines  both  totalitarian  and 
representative  forms  of  government.  It  is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science 
111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

212.  Foreign  Relations.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.! 

A  survey  of  the  external  relations  of  American  government,  with  emphasis  onj 
twentieth  century  developments.  Subject  areas  include  diplomacy,  military  affairs,  geo- 
graphic and  regional  problems,  trade  and  aid,  technology  and  underdevelopment,  alliances, 
nuclear  problems,  and  opposing  ideologies.  Consideration  is  given  to  recruitment,  training, 
and  problems  of  the  United  States  foreign  service  and  to  the  multiple  influences  shaping 
American  foreign  policies.  It  is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be 
taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

217.  Research  Methods  in  Political  Science.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  course  in  the  conduct  and  interpretation  of  research  in  political  science.  Topics 
covered  include:  formulation  of  a  research  problem,  research  design,  techniques  of  scaling 
and  measurement,  data  collection  and  analysis,  and  writing  the  research  report. 

Prerequisites:  a  major  in  Political  Science  and  sophomore  standing,  or  permis- 
sion of  the  instructor.  Mathematics  170,  Elementary  Statistics,  is  strongly  recommended. 

219.   State  and  Local  Government.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

This  course  deals  with  governmental  institutions  and  political  characteristics  of  state 
and  local  political  systems.  It  will  treat  major  urban  problems  in  the  context  of  the  legal 
dependency  of  cities  on  state  governments  and  constitutions.  It  will  also  examine  the  major 
intergovernmental  problems  in  state  and  local  relationships  with  the  national  government.  It 
is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

66 


311.  Political  Parties  in  the  United  States.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  origins  and  history  of  American  poHtical  parties,  their  development, 
organization,  leaders,  conventions,  platforms,  and  campaigns.  Emphasis  is  given  to  recent 
changes  in  American  political  patterns.  It  is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science 
111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

312.  American  Constitutional  Law.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  growth  and  development  of  the  Constitution  through  the  medium  of 
judicial  construction.  Recent  decisions  illustrating  its  application  to  new  conditions  of  the 
present  age,  and  proposals  for  court  modification  are  given  particular  attention.  It  is  strongly 
recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

313.  Foundations  of  American  Law.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

This  course  provides  an  historical  survey  of  the  Western  legal  tradition  from  classical 
times  through  eighteenth  century  conceptions  of  the  English  common  law  as  an  introduc- 
tion to  the  study  of  the  evolution  of  American  law.  It  supplements  the  study  of  American 
Constitutional  law  but  does  not  duplicate  the  content  of  Political  Science  312.  It  is  strongly 
recommended  for  pre-law  students. 

Prerequisite:  permission  of  the  instructor. 

314.  Public  Opinion.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  analysis  of  the  nature  and  sources  of  contemporary  public  opinion,  with  special 
attention  to  methods  of  determining  public  opinion. 

350.   Select  Problems  in  Political  Science.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  course  to  provide  the  student  with  an  opportunity  to  explore  in  depth  a  topic  of 
special  interest.  It  is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be  taken 
previously  or  concurrently. 

390.  Internship.  3-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  15  hours  credit) 
Supervised  academic  and  field  experience  in  a  governmental  agency,  with  an  elected 
public  official,  or  in  electoral  activity.  Participants  will  be  selected  by  members  of  the  De- 
partment staff. 

Prerequisite:  Political  Science  111/112. 

411.  Political  Theory.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  survey  of  the  different  philosophies  and  theories  of  government,  ancient  and 
modern,  with  special  reference  to  political  philosophy  since  the  sixteenth  century.  It  is 
strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

412.  Senior  Seminar  in  Political  Science.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Reading,  discussion,  and  written  assignments  to  accomplish  the  following  purposes: 
1)  relation  of  the  discipline  to  other  fields  of  knowledge  and  (2)  development  and 
expression  of  an  individual  political  philosophy  by  the  student. 

Prerequisites:  a  major  in  political  science  and  senior  standing;  or  permission  of 
the  instructor. 

413.  International  Politics.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  course  in  the  origin,  forms,  dynamics,  and  prospects  of  the  international  political 
pattern,  with  emphasis  on  current  developments  and  changing  concepts  in  world  politics.  It 
is  strongly  recommended  that  Political  Science  111/112  be  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  3  semesters) 
A  course  designed  for  students  who  wish  to  undertake  an  independent  study  project  in 
political  science.  Open  to  all  students,  subject  to  the  following  qualifications: 

Those  who  do  not  desire  departmental  honors  are  admitted  by  permission  of  the 
instructor  who  agrees  to  accept  supervision  of  the  student's  work. 
Students  desiring  departmental  honors  must  meet  the  conditions  set  forth  above  under 
"Departmental  of  Honors." 

67 


HUMANITIES 


Genera]  Adviser:  Professor  Ford.   Concentration  Area  Advisors:  English,  Pro- 
fessor Ford;  French,  German,  Spanish,  Dr.  Iglesias;  Philosophy,  Mr.  Thompson. 

The  humanities  major  examines  the  spectrum  of  mankind's  response  to  his 
speculative  and  creative  urges.  The  humanities  comprise  the  family  of  know^ledge 
that  deals  with  what  it  has  been — and  is — to  be  human,  to  make  value  judgments, 
to  select  the  wiser  course  of  action.  Specifically,  the  humanities  major  explores 
human  values,  as  expressed  through  literature  in  English,  French,  German,  and 
Spanish;  art;  music;  and  philosophy.  This  interdisciplinary  approach  allows  the 
student  to  explore  the  humanities  in  more  breadth  than  do  the  traditional  majors 
and  at  the  same  time  allows  for  a  degree  of  concentration  in  one  area  of  the 
humanities. 

All  courses  are  taught  by  the  respective  departments  and  share  the  objectives 
of  those  departments.  These  objectives  and  specific  course  content  are  described 
in  the  respective  departmental  sections  in  this  catalog. 

The  program  is  concerned  with  the  full  intellectual  development  of  the 
person  as  well  as  with  vocational  preparation,  such  as  for  graduate,  theological, 
and  law  schools,  and  for  careers  in  business  and  government. 

Basic  Requirements:  Art  110,  Art  201  or  203;  English  227/228;  Foreign 
Language  115,  116  (French,  German,  or  Spanish);  Music  100,  Philosophy  110, 
228;  History  111/112,  for  a  total  of  33  hours. 

Concentration  Requirements:  (One  of  the  following): 

English:  English  221,  222,  322,  337,  for  a  total  of  12  hours. 

Foreign  Language:  12  additional  hours  in  the  same  language  above  the  116 

level. 
Philosophy:  Philosophy  120,  323,  or.  333,  and  any  other  two  (2)  courses  in 

philosophy  for  a  total  of  12  hours. 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  humanities,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 

INDIVIDUALIZED  MAJOR  I 

Occasionally  a  student  finds  that  his  career  goals  cannot  be  met  by  a 
traditional  major  at  the  college.  For  this  student  an  individualized  major  may  be  a 
logical  choice.  Working  with  two  advisors  a  student  develops  a  plan  of  study 
including  a  rationale  for  the  specific  major,  a  schedule  for  taking  existing  college  \ 
courses  which  relate  to  the  individualized  major,  as  well  as  describing  those  i 
courses  which  the  student  needs  to  pursue  on  an  independent  study  basis  or 
perhaps  take  at  another  college.  The  plan  of  study  must  also  include  those  courses 
to  fulfill  the  general  requirements  of  the  college.  The  curriculum  is  then  submitted 
to  the  Dean  of  the  College  for  approval. 

Requirements:  Those  courses  specified  within  the  approved  individualized 
major  plus  those  courses  to  meet  the  general  requirements  of  the  college. 

Degrees:  B.A.  or  B.S.  degree  (depending  upon  concentration)  with  an  indi- 
vidualized major. 


INTERDISCIPLINARY  COURSES 

130.  Philosophy  in  Literature.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester  upon  demand. 

A  detailed  critical  examination  of  v^arious  Hterary  works  having  philosophical  con- 
tent. Exact  topics  and  works  to  be  considered  will  vary  from  year  to  year. 
Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructors. 

68 


332.   Seminar  in  Psychology  and  Literature.  3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

A  consideration  of  major  psychological  theories  for  use  in  literary  interpretation. 
Prerequisite:  a  major  in  psychology  or  English,   junior  or  senior  standing  and/or 
permission  of  the  staff. 

334.  Seminar  in  Philosophy  and  Psychology.  3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

A  detailed  consideration  of  matters  of  common  interest  to  philosophy  and  psychology, 
taught  by  members  of  both  departments.  Topics  will  vary  from  3  ear  to  year. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructors. 

LANGUAGES 

See  Foreign  Langues,  page  58. 


MATHEMATICAL  SCIENCES 

Professor  Mayer,  Chairman;  Associate  Professors  Fleischman  and  Hearsey;  Assis- 
tant Professor  Burras;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Baxter. 

The  department  of  Mathematical  Sciences  offers  majors  in  Actuarial  Science, 
Computer  Science,  and  Mathematics  with  concentrations  in  classical  mathema- 
tics, applied  mathematics,  operations  research,  and  secondary  school  teaching. 

A  unique  program  among  undergraduate  colleges  in  the  United  States,  the 
Actuarial  Science  program  specifically  prepares  students  for  the  first  four  exami- 
nations of  the  Society  of  Actuaries  and  the  Casualty  Actuarial  Society. 

The  Computer  Science  major  has  a  strong  scientific  orientation  conforming 
with  the  recommendations  of  the  Association  for  Computing  Machinery.  Expo- 
sure to  computer  applications  is  assured  through  an  internship  in  a  business 
computer  operation. 

Majors  in  the  mathematics  area  are  prepared  for  work  in  business,  industry 
and  government;  in  secondary  teaching;  or  for  advanced  degree  study  in  graduate 
schools.  Computer  Science  and  Operations  Research  also  are  areas  in  which 
Lebanon  Valley  College  graduates  do  advanced  work. 

REQUIREMENTS; 

Core  Courses:  All  majors  must  complete  Mathematics  111,  112,  211,  201,  242, 
266,  321. 

B.S.  with  major  in  Actuarial  Science.  Core  Courses  and  Mathematics  385,  386, 
481,  482,  Ma  471,  472;  also  Economics  110,  120,  Accounting  151,  152.  Examina- 
tion of  the  Society  of  Actuaries  must  be  passed  by  the  fall  of  the  senior  year. 

B.S.  with  major  in  Computer  Science.  Core  Courses  and  Mathematics  322, 
341,  342,  363,  364,  441,  444;  also  EngUsh  215,  Psychology  110,  337,  Philosophy 
228,  Physics  103,  104,  212. 

B.S.  with  major  in  Mathematics.  Core  Courses  and  12  semester  hours  in 
courses  numbered  above  300  (no  more  than  three  hours  in  seminar).  Suggested 
choices  are: 

Graduate  School  preparation:  Mathematics  322,  363,  364,  400,  412,  450. 

Operations  Research:  Mathematics  341,  342,  363,  364,  450,  466,  471,  472. 

Secondary  School  Teaching:  Mathematics  322,  331,  400,  452,  471,  472. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  may  participate  in  the  departmental  honors  program  if  they  have 
demonstrated  high  scholastic  ability  and  have  received  permission  for  such 
participation  from  the  departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college  no  later 
than  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year. 

69 


A  student  may  receive  upon  graduation,  departmental  honors  if  he  has 
maintained  a  3.0  grade-point  average  in  mathematics  and  has  satisfactorily 
completed  the  departmental  honors  program. 

100.   Basic  Concepts  of  Mathematics.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Outlines  of  some  basic  mathematical  concepts. 

102.  Algebra  and  Trigonometry.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

College  algebra  and  trigonometry. 

Ill,  112.  Analysis  I,  II.  5:5:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  introduction  to  continuity,  derivative,  integral,  and  series,  for  mathematics 
and  actuarial  science  majors. 

161,  162,  Calculus  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

Introduction  to  derivative,  integral,  series,  and  partial  derivative  with  emphasis  on 
applications. 

166.  Calculus  II  and  Differential  Equations.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  alternative  continuation  of  Mathematics  161  w^ith  emphasis  on  applications  in  the 
biological  and  medical  sciences. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  161. 

170.  Elementary  Statistics.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

Descriptive  and  inferential  statistics.  An  introductory  course  requiring  no  calculus. 

201.   Foundation  of  Mathematics.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Introduction  to  logic,  set  theory,  real  numbers. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  112.* 

211.   Analysis  III.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  continuation  of  Analysis  I,  II. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  112.* 

242.  Introduction  to  Computer  Science.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Computer  logic  and  languages,  algorithmic  procedures,  computer  design,  applica- 
tions. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  112.* 

261.  Calculus  III.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Vector  calculus,  differential  equations  and  applications. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  162.* 

266.  Differential  Equations.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

First  and  second  order  linear  differential  equations,  power  series  solutions,  special 
functions.  Introduction  to  partial  differential  equations.  Special  topics. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  211  or  261. 

321.  Linear  Algebra.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Vector  spaces,  transformations,  matrices,  systems  of  equations.  j 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  112.*  ^ 

322.  Abstract  Algebra.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Fundamentals  of  groups,  rings,  and  fields. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  321.* 

331.   Geometry.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Introduction  to  the  axioms  of  geometries;  Euclidean  and  non-Euclidean  geometries. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  112.* 


*Prerequisites  may  be  waived  by  the  department. 
70 


341.  Computer  Organizer  and  Assembler.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Computer  architecture,  assembly  language,  I/O  routines. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  242. 

342.  Data  Structures.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Graphs,  file  structures,  sort  and  search  routines,  advanced  applications. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  242. 

361,  362.   Methods  of  Applied  Mathematics  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

Linear  vector  spaces,  matrices,  determinants,  integral  equations,  partial  differential 
equations,  integral  formulas. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  266.* 

363,  364.   Classical  and  Numerical  Analysis,  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

Taylor's  theorem,  Newton's  method,  numerical  integration,  power  series,  perturbation 
series,  asymtotic  series.  Fourier  series,  Runge-Kutta  method,  finite  differences,  interpola- 
tion. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  266.* 

385.  Seminar  in  Actuarial  Science  I;  Theory  of  Interest.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

386.  Seminar  in  Actuarial  Science  II;  Numerical  Analysis  for  Actuaries. 

3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

400.  Seminar.  1:1:0.  Either  semester. 

A  seminar  devoted  to  problem  solving  techniques. 

412.   Functions  of  a  Complex  Variable.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Analytic  functions,  contour  integration,  Cauchy  theorem,  residue  theory,  conformal 
mapping. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  211.* 

441.  Programming  Languages  and  Compiler  Construction.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Grammars  and  languages,  recognizers,  symbol  tables,  storage  allocation. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  242. 
Corequisite:  Mathematics  341. 

444.  Internship  in  Computer  Science.  3  hours  credit. 

Field  experience  in  a  business  or  industrial  computer  operation. 
Prerequisite:  Junior  standing  in  Computer  Science. 

450.   Special  Topics.  3:3:0.  each  semester. 

A  junior/senior  course  whose  contents  are  chosen  according  to  student  interest. 
Examples  are  Topology,  Graph  Theory,  Applied  Linear  Algebra. 

452.   Seminar  for  Teachers.  1:1:0.  Second  semester. 

A  seminar  for  prospective  mathematics  teachers.  This  seminar  is  required  of  those 
students  who  wish  to  become  certified  to  teach  mathematics. 

466.  Topics  in  Operations  Research.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Linear  programming,  transportation  and  assignment  problems,  basic  game  theory, 
introduction  to  other  topics. 

Prerequisites:  Mathematics  211  or  261,  and  264. 

471.  Mathematical  Probability.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Sample  space,  random  variables,  probability  laws  and  distributions,  limit  theorems. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  211.* 

472.  Mathematical  Statistics.  3:3:0  Second  semester. 

Generating  functions,  frequency  distributions,  decision  theory,  tests  of  hypotheses. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  471*. 

*Prerequisites  may  be  waived  by  the  department. 

71 


481.  Life  Contingencies  I.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

The  life  contingencies  material  for  the  Part  4  SOA  exam  is  studied.  This  includes  sin- 
gle life  tables,  annuities,  insurances,  reserves,  multiple  life  tables,  pensions. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  472. 

482.  Life  Contingencies  IL  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  life  contingencies  material  for  the  Part  5  SOA  exam  is  studied.  In  addition  to 
further  study  of  the  Mathematics  481  topics,  this  includes  modified  reserves,  compound 
contingent  functions,  and  revisionary  annuities. 

Prerequisite:  Mathematics  472. 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Independent  work  for  majors  enrolled  in  the  departmental  honors  program  and  others. 


METROPOLITAN  SEMESTER  COURSES 

240.  Theology  in  the  City.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

An  intensive  study  of  the  process  of  theological  thinking,  using  the  student's  experi- 
ences in  the  city  as  primary  data;  study  of  the  life  of  the  church  and  its  engagement  in  so- 
ciety; study  of  the  poor  and  oppressed  and  the  relationship  of  the  church  to  such  people. 
The  course  will  be  taught  largely  by  the  inductive  method,  relying  to  a  great  extent  on  the 
student's  initiative  in  being  involved  in  urban  life. 

Prerequisite:  Consent  of  the  instructor. 

250.  Work  Internship.  6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Internships  in  service,  technical  and  business  agencies  and  institutions  of  choice  of 
students  are  supervised  by  staff  members  of  the  Metropolitan  Semester.  Three-and-one-half 
or  four  days  per  week. 

260.  Metropolitan  Seminar.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

The  seminar  surveys  the  major  issues  in  urban  America,  using  Philadelphia  as  the 
point  of  reference. 

270.  The  City  and  Fine  Arts.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

An  introductory  survey  of  fine  arts  related  to  urban  life  as  exemplified  in  Philadel- 
phia. Regular  seminar  work  is  supplemented  by  field  studies  in  institutions  such  as  the  Art 
Museum,  Philadelphia  Orchestra,  Theatre,  and  the  like. 

280.  Social  Sciences  Research  Seminar.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

The  seminar  surveys  the  nature  of  social  research  with  special  emphasis  on  methods  of 
collecting  valid  data.  Students  design  and  complete  a  small  research  study  on  a  relevant 
urban  problem. 

290.  Values  Seminar.  3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Students  examine  ethical  issues  and  moral  dilemmas  which  arise  from  personal  life, 
work  in  large  organizations,  and  the  conduct  of  public  policy. 


MUSIC 

Associate  Professor  Lau,  Chairman;  Professors  Emeritus  Bender,  Lanese,  and 
Thurmond;  Professors  Curfman  and  Getz;  Associate  Professors  Fairlamh,  Richard- 
SON,  Smith,  Stachow  and  Siviegart;  Assistant  Professors  Alhrecht,  Burrichter, 
Engiebright,  Geissel,  and  Morgan;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Chandler  and 
Knisley;  Adjunct  Instructors  Bilger,  Binkley,  Bowers,  Chahitnoy,  Dunn,  Gingrich, 
Goehel,  Myers,  Nixon,  Reed,  Stamhach,  and  Strohman. 

72 


The  aims  of  the  department  of  music  are  to  prepare  performers,  church 
musicians,  and  teachers,  to  teach  music  historically  and  aesthetically  as  an  ele- 
ment of  liberal  culture,  and  to  offer  courses  that  give  a  thorough  and  practical 
understanding  of  theoretical  subjects. 

Attendance  at  a  portion  of  faculty  and  student  recitals  is  compulsory. 

All  majors  in  the  department  are  required  to  take  private  instruction  on 
campus  in  their  principal  performance  medium. 

Participation  in  music  organizations  may  be  required  of  all  majors. 

One-half  hour  of  private  instruction  is  included  in  the  basic  tuition. 

For  additional  music  fees  see  page  16. 

MUSIC 

(Bachelor  of  Arts  degree] 

This  program  is  designed  for  those  students  desiring  a  liberal  arts  context  in 
their  preparation  for  a  career  in  applied  music. 

For  the  student  w/ho  chooses  the  course  of  study  in  applied  music,  a  minimum 
of  49  hours  is  required. 

Special  Requirements 

All  majors  are  required  to  take  an  hour  lesson  per  v^eek  in  their  principal 
performance  medium  and  are  expected  to  perform  a  half  recital  in  the  junior  year 
and  a  full  recital  in  the  senior  year. 

All  majors  outside  of  the  keyboard  area  are  required  to  study  piano  (private  or 
class)  until  the  minimum  requirements  have  been  met. 

For  the  recommended  plan  of  study  in  this  program  see  page  102. 

SACRED  MUSIC 

(Bachelor  of  Arts  degree] 

This  program  is  designed  for  those  students  preparing  for  a  career  as  full-time 
directors  of  church  music,  as  ministers  of  music,  or  as  college  teachers.  The 
principal  performance  medium  must  be  voice  or  organ  unless  approval  is  granted 
for  other  performance  media  by  the  department  chairman  and  the  adviser  in 
sacred  music. 

For  the  student  who  chooses  the  course  of  study  in  sacred  music,  a  minimum 
of  55  hours  is  required. 

All  majors  are  expected  to  acquire  sufficient  skill  to  assume  responsibilities  as 
a  qualified  parish  church  musician. 

Majors  whose  principal  performance  medium  is  organ  are  expected  to  study 
voice  for  at  least  two  years,  one  of  which  may  be  class  experience. 

Majors  whose  principal  performance  medium  is  voice,  upon  admission  to  the 
program  are  expected  to  show  sufficient  keyboard  proficiency  so  that  after  two 
additional  years  of  piano  study  (normally  by  the  end  of  the  sophomore  year)  they 
may  benefit  from  a  year  of  organ  study. 

For  the  recommended  plan  of  study  in  the  program  see  page  102. 

MUSIC  EDUCATION 

(Bachelor  of  Science  degree) 

This  program  has  been  approved  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Educa- 
tion and  the  National  Association  of  Schools  of  Music  for  the  preparation  of 
teachers  of  public  school  music. 

A  "track  system"  permits  the  student  to  select  an  area  of  concentration:  (1) 
general,  (2)  instrumental,  (3)  keyboard/vocal. 

For  the  student  w^ho  chooses  the  general  track  system  a  minimum  of  72  hours 
is  required.  For  the  student  who  chooses  the  instrumental  track  system  a 
minimum  of  69  hours  is  required.  For  the  student  who  chooses  the  keyboard/vocal 
track  system  a  minimum  of  66y2  hours  is  required. 

73 


The  music  education  curriculum  requires  voice  instruction  (class  or  private) 
for  a  minimum  of  one  year  and  piano  instruction  (class  or  private)  for  a  minimum 
of  two  years.  A  competency  jury  must  be  passed  successfully  in  each  area. 

For  the  recommended  plan  of  study  in  this  program  see  page  103. 

During  the  student  teaching  semester,  no  student  w^ill  be  permitted  to  par- 
ticipate in  any  extra-curricular  activity  v^ithout  departmental  approval. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

1.  A  candidate  must  have  achieved  a  minimum  grade-point  average  of  3.00  at  the 
end  of  the  sophomore  year,  and  must  maintain  this  minimum  to  remain  eligible 
for  honors  status. 

2.  The  private  instructor  in  the  candidate's  principal  performance  medium  must 
recommend  the  student  for  full  recital  privileges  during  the  senior  year,  and 
will  serve  as  adviser  to  the  individual's  departmental  honors  program. 

3.  The  candidate  through  reading  and  research  will  produce  a  thesis  or  an  essay, 
based  on  a  problem  or  subject  of  his  own  choosing  under  the  direct  supervision 
of  his  faculty  adviser.  Creative  work  will  be  encouraged  with  reference  to,  or 
emphasis  upon,  his  principal  performance  medium. 

4.  Honors  recognition  shall  be  dependent  upon  the  quality  of  the  prepared  thesis 
or  essay  and  the  level  of  the  candidate's  recital  performance,  both  to  be 
reviewed  by  a  committee  of  three,  including  the  private  instructor  (adviser),  the 
chairman  of  the  department,  and  a  third  music  faculty  member  to  be  designated 
by  the  chairman  with  the  approval  of  the  adviser. 

5.  In  addition  to  any  established  pattern  of  announcing  honors  candidates  and 
recipients,  the  printed  recital  program  shall  also  indicate  "in  partial  fulfillment 
of  requirements  for  Honors  in  Music." 

6.  A  maximum  of  9  hours  credit  can  be  earned  in  departmental  honors. 

7.  Upon  the  completion  of  the  above  requirements  at  a  satisfactory  level,  the 
student  will  be  recommended  by  the  reviewing  committee  to  the  dean  of  the 
college  for  graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

I:  THEORY  OF  MUSIC 
Sight  Singing 

111.  Sight  Singing  I.  1:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  beginning  course  in  music  reading  with  the  use  of  syllables,  incorporating  the 
elements  of  melody  and  rhythm  within  the  beat  and  its  division.  The  following  are 
studied:  basic  beat  patterns,  simple  and  compound  time,  diatonic  intervals,  implied 
harmonic  structure  within  the  melodic  line,  the  C  clefs,  modulations.  Phrasing  and  the 
application  of  dynamics  are  stressed. 

112.  Sight  Singing  II.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  continuation  of  music  reading,  using  more  difficult  melodies  and  rhythms,  the 
beat  and  its  subdivision,  and  additional  interval  problems.  Exercises  in  four  clefs, 
employing  modal  melodies,  remote  modulation,  superimposed  background  and  meter, 
changing  and  less  common  time  signatures. 

Ear  Training 

113.  Ear  Training  I.  1:2:0.  First  semester. 

The  study  of  the  basics  of  music  notation  essential  for  the  writing  of  melodic  and 
rhythmic  dictation.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  aural  recognition  of  intervals,  scales,  triads 
and  their  inversions,  and  simple  harmonic  progressions  and  cadences.  Harmonic 
dictation  is  begun  in  the  latter  half  of  the  course.  Correlated  with  Sight  Singing. 

114.  Ear  Training  II.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  more  difficult  tonal  problems  including  seventh  and  ninth  chords, 
chromaticism,  modulation,  and  modality.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  harmonic  and 
corrective  dictation.  Correlated  with  Sight  Singing. 

74 


Harmony 

115.  Harmony  I.  2:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  rudiments  of  music  including  notation,  scales,  intervals,  and  triads; 
the  connection  of  triads  by  harmonizing  melodies  and  basses  with  fundamental  triads; 
playing  of  simple  cadences  at  the  piano;  analysis  of  phrases  and  periods. 

116.  Harmony  H.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  inversions  of  triads,  seventh  and  ninth  chords,  harmonizations  of 
melodies  and  figured  basses;  analysis  and  composition  of  the  smaller  forms;  modulation. 

215.   Harmony  III.  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

The  use  of  dominant  and  diminished  sevenths  as  embellishments  of  and  substitutes  for 
diatonic  harmony;  harmonization  of  melodies  and  figured  basses;  analysis  of  two  and 
three-part  song  forms;  composition  in  two-part  song  form.  Playing  of  more  advanced 
cadences  and  modulations  at  the  piano. 

315.  Elementary  Composition*  on  special  announcement.  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

Melody  analysis  and  writing:  four-part  choral  writing;  continuation  of  two  and 
three-part  song-form  analysis  and  composition.  Composition  in  theme  and  variations, 
fantasia,  rondo,  and  dance  forms.  Study  of  contemporary  harmonic  ideas. 

316.  Keyboard  Harmony.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Work  at  the  piano  includes  reading  from  figured  bass  and  score  reading.  Additional 
work  includes  transposition  and  improvisation.  (Students  are  placed  in  elementary,  inter- 
mediate or  advanced  sections  on  the  basis  of  keyboard  ability.)  The  successful  completion 
of  a  piano  jury  is  required  for  admission  to  the  course. 

Additional  Theory  Courses 

217.  Basic  Concepts  of  Structure  and  Style.  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  course  designed  to  develop  the  student's  knowledge  of  specific  musical  styles 
resulting  from  the  synthesis  of  music's  constituent  and  expressive  elements.  The  study  is 
approached  through  listening  to,  discussing,  and  analyzing  compositions  representing  a 
variety  of  styles  and  media.  Other  course  objectives  include:  acquaintance  with  literature, 
comprehensive  application  of  the  basics  of  music  theory,  and  development  of  musicianship. 

224.  Counterpoint.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Introductory  work  in  strict  counterpoint  through  three  and  four-part  work  in  all  the 
species. 

226.  Form  and  Analysis  I.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  simple  and  compound  forms,  variations,  contrapuntal  forms,  rondo  and 
sonata  forms.  Compositions  in  these  forms  are  studied  primarily  for  their  structural  content. 
Course  includes  extensive  listening. 

329.  Form  and  Analysis  II**  on  special  announcement  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  through  analysis  and  listening  of  fugal  forms,  suite,  overture,  complete  sonata 
forms  (evolution  of  the  symphony),  string  quartet,  the  tone  poem.  Analysis  of  classical  and 
contemporary  works  in  these  forms. 

400.   Arranging  and  Scoring  for  the  Stage  Band.  2:2:0.  Either  semester. 

Study  of  modern  harmony,  modulation,  style  analysis,  special  instrumental  effects  as 
applied  to  modern  arranging.  Laboratory  analysis  and  demonstration  of  sectional  and 
ensemble  voicings. 

410.   Composition,  Schillinger  System.  Private  teaching. 

A  scientific  system  of  music  composition  created  by  the  late  Joseph  Schillinger, 
teacher  of  such  accomplished  professionals  as  George  Gershwin  and  Ted  Royal  Dewar. 

The  major  aims  of  the  system  are  to:  (1)  generalize  underlying  principles  regarding  the 
behavior  of  tonal  phenomena;  (2)  classify  all  the  available  resources  of  our  tonal  system;  (3) 

*Majors  in  music  and  sacred  music. 
**Majors  in  music. 

75 


teach  a  comprehensive  application  of  scientific  method  to  all  components  of  the  tonal  art,  to 
problems  of  melody,  rhythm,  harmony,  counterpoint,  orchestration,  and  to  composition 
itself 

The  system  is  best  studied  in  the  light  of  a  traditional  background  and  admission  to 
course  or  private  instruction  is  by  special  permission  only. 

416.   Orchestration.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Study  of  instrumentation,  devices,  techniques,  and  mechanics  of  scoring  transcrip- 
tions, arrangements  and  solos  for  orchestra  and  concert  band;  special  work  in  scoring  for 
mixed  ensembles  as  they  occur  in  public  schools.  Laboratory  analysis  and  demonstration  of 
various  instrumental  colors  and  combinations.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  creative  scoring. 


II.  METHODS  AND  MATERIALS 

333.  Methods  and  Materials,  General  Music:  Elementary.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  comprehensive  study  of  general  music  teaching  at  the  elementary  level,  including 
the  rationale  for  building  a  music  education  curriculum,  current  emphases  in  music 
education,  varied  approaches  for  developing  conceptual  learning,  movement,  playing 
classroom  instruments,  introduction  to  Orff  and  Kodaly  techniques,  creative  applications, 
guided  listening,  the  child  voice,  materials,  and  interest  centers  for  open  classrooms. 

334.  Methods  and  Materials,  General  Music:  Junior  High  School.   3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Materials  and  approches  for  junior  high  school  general  music,  attention  to  the 
organization  and  presentation  of  a  varied  program,  and  recent  trends  in  teaching.  Adoles- 
cent voices,  creative  applications,  improvisation,  guided  listening,  interest  centers,  units  of 
study,  and  characteristics  of  youth. 

335.  Methods  and  Materials,  Instrumental:  Fourth,  Fifth  and  Sixth  Grades. 

2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  methods  and  materials  used  in  teaching  band  and  orchestral  instruments  to 
children  in  these  grades,  with  emphasis  on  a  sound  rhythmic  approach.  Both  individual  and 
class  techniques  are  studied.  Musical  rudiments  as  applied  to  instrumental  teaching  are 
reviewed. 

336.  Methods  and  Materials,  Instrumental:  Junior  and  Senior  High  School. 

2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  intermediate  and  advanced  instrumental  teaching  techniques;  methods  of 
organizing  and  directing  school  orchestras  and  bands;  fundamentals  of  miusicianship. 

402.   Seminar  in  Advanced  Instrumental  Problems.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  general  and  specific  problems  which  confront  the  director  of  school 
orchestras,  bands,  and  instrumental  classes.  Problems  of  general  interest  include:  organiza- 
tion and  management,  stimulating  and  maintaining  interest;  selecting  beginners;  scheduling 
rehearsals  and  class  lessons;  financing  and  purchasing  instruments,  uniforms,  and  other 
equipment;  marching  band  formations  and  drills;  evaluating  music  materials;  organizing 
festivals,  contests,  and  public  performances. 

404.  Music  Education  Seminar:  Secondary  Level.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  aspects  of  secondary  school  vocal  music  curriculum  and  related  course 
offerings.  Topics  with  which  a  high  school  choral  teacher  or  director  of  music  will  need  to  be 
knowledgeable  are  investigated  with  particular  attention  given  to  those  problems  relating  to 
the  responsibilities  of  the  vocal  music  teacher.  Philosophy  of  music  education,  music 
theater,  tests  and  measurements,  elective  courses,  planning  inservice  events,  and  choral 
materials. 

405.  Methods  in  Piano  Pedagogy.  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  methods  of  teaching  piano  to  children  and  adults.  The  course  includes  the 
song  approach  method,  presentation  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  rhythm,  sight  reading, 
tone  quality,  form,  technique,  pedaling,  transposition,  and  the  harmonization  of  simple 
melodies.  Materials  are  examined  and  discussed. 

76 


412.  Electronic  Music.  1:1:1.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  use  and  function  of  synthesizers  and  their  application  to  the 
electronic  music  field,  with  special  attention  to  the  education  area,  live  performance,  and 
integration  with  studio  equipment. 

422.  Church  Music  Methods  and  Administration.*  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Offered  1979-1980. 

A  course  designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  organization,  direction  and 
management  of  the  church  music  program.  General  and  specific  problems  which  confront 
the  church  musician  are  discussed.  Topics  of  concern  include  the  planning  and  develop- 
ment of  a  sound  choir  program  with  emphasis  on  solicitation  of  participants  and  the 
maintenance  of  interest;  the  methods  and  techniques  of  rehearsal;  the  preparation  of  budget 
and  the  management  of  funds;  the  incorporation  of  the  church  year  in  the  selection  of 
literature;  committee  and  pastoral  relationships. 

III.  STUDENT  TEACHING 

441.   Student  Teaching.  12  semester  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

Each  student  spends  a  semester  in  the  music  department  of  an  area  public  school  under 
the  supervision  of  cooperating  teachers.  Experiences  are  provided  according  to  the  indi- 
vidual student's  selection  of  a  track  program,  with  emphasis  on  general,  instrumental,  or 
keyboard/vocal  areas.  Requirements  are:  (1]  a  cumulative  grade-point  average  of  2.0  during 
the  first  six  semesters  in  college,  (2)  ability  to  demonstrate  proficiency  in  the  competencies 
for  music  teachers  as  set  forth  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education,  (3)  approval  by 
the  music  faculty. 

IV.  INSTRUMENTAL  COURSES 

Class  Instruction  in  Band  and  Orchestral  Instruments. 

Practical  courses  in  which  students,  in  addition  to  being  taught  the  fundamental 
principles  underlying  the  playing  of  all  band  and  orchestral  instruments,  learn  to  play  on 
instruments  of  each  group,  viz.,  string,  woodwind,  brass,  and  percussion.  Problems  of  class 
procedure  in  public  schools  are  discussed:  transposition  of  all  instruments  is  taught. 
Ensemble  playing  is  an  integral  part  of  these  courses. 

Brass  Instruments  (Trumpet  [Cornet].  Horn,  Trombone,  Baritone,  Tuba] 

123.  Brass  I.  1:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  two  of  the  above  instruments. 

124.  Brass  II.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  instruments. 

Percussion  Instruments  (Snare  Drum,  Timpani,  Bass  Drum,  etc) 

227.   Percussion  I.  V2:l:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  snare  drum  only. 

328.   Percussion  II.  V2:l:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  instruments. 

Woodwind  Instruments  ((Clarinet,  Mute,  Piccolo,  Oboe,  Saxophone,  Bassoon) 

231.  Woodwind  I.  1:2:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  clarinet. 

232.  Woodwind  II.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  remainder  of  the  above  instruments. 

String  Instruments  (Violin,  Viola,  Cello,  String  Bass) 

337.   String  I.  1:2:0.  First  Semester. 

A  study  of  all  of  the  above  instruments. 


*Ma)ors  in  sacred  music. 


11 


338.  String  II.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

A  continuation  of  the  study  of  all  of  the  above  instruments. 

Instrumental  Seminar.  1/2:1 :0  or  1:2:0.  First  or  second  semester. 

Application  of  specific  techniques  to  problems  of  class  instruction. 

420.   Brass  Prerequisite:  Music  124. 

430.  Percussion  Prerequisite:  Music  328. 

440.   String  Prerequisite:  Music  338. 

450.   Woodwind  Prerequisite:  Music  232. 


V.  MUSIC  ORGANIZATIONS 

Opportunities  for  ixidividual  performance  in  a  group  experience  are  provided  by  music 
organizations.  Membership  in  the  organizations  is  open  on  an  audition  basis  to  all  students 
of  the  college. 

601.  Symphonic  Band.  0:3:0  per  semester. 

The  Blue  and  White  Marching  Band  of  L.V.C.  is  noted  for  its  half-time  performances 
during  the  football  season.  In  the  Symphonic  Band  the  finest  original  music  for  band  is  per- 
formed, as  w^ell  as  arrangements  of  the  standard  repertoire.  Membership  in  the  band  is 
dependent  upon  the  ability  of  the  applicant  and  the  instrumentation  of  the  band.  Students 
from  all  departments  of  the  college  are  invited  to  audition. 

602.  All-Girl  Band.  0:1:0  per  semester. 

L.V.C.  is  unique  in  having  one  of  the  few  all-girl  bands  in  the  nation.  All  girls  in  the 
college  with  ability  as  instrumentalists  are  welcome  to  audition.  Mem.bership  depends  upon 
proficiency  and  the  needs  of  the  band  regarding  instrumentation. 

603.  Symphony  Orchestra.  0:3:0  per  semester. 

The  Symphony  Orchestra  is  an  organization  of  symphonic  proportions  maintaining  a 
high  standard  of  performance.  A  professional  interpretation  of  a  wide  range  of  standard 
orchestral  literature  is  insisted  upon. 

604.  Concert  Choir.  0:3:0  per  semester. 

The  Concert  Choir  is  composed  of  approximately  fifty  voices,  selected  by  audition.  All 
phases  of  choral  literature  are  studied  intensively.  In  addition  to  on-campus  programs  and 
appearances  on  radio  and  television,  the  Concert  Choir  makes  an  annual  tour. 

605.  College  Chorus.*  0:1:0  per  semester. 

The  College  Chorus  provides  an  opportunity  to  study  and  participate  in  the  presenta- 
tion of  choral  literature  of  major  composers  from  all  periods  of  music  history.  It  is  open  to  all 
students  who  are  interested  in  this  type  of  musical  performance  and  who  have  had  some 
experience  in  singing. 

606.  Chapel  Choir.  0:1:0  per  semester. 

The  Chapel  Choir  is  composed  of  approximately  forty  voices,  selected  by  audition.  The 
main  function  of  this  choir  is  to  provide  musical  leadership  in  the  college's  chapel  services. 
In  addition,  seasonal  services  of  choral  music  are  prepared. 

607.  Beginning  Ensemble.  0:1:1  per  semester. 

A  training  band  and  orchestra  in  which  students  play  secondary  instruments  and 
become  acquainted  with  elementary  band  and  orchestral  literature.  Opportunity  is  given  for 
advanced  conducting  students  to  gain  experience  in  conducting. 

608.  Wind  Ensemble.  0:1:0  per  semester. 

The  Wind  Ensemble  provides  an  opportunity  for  advanced  players  of  wind  and 
percussion  instruments  to  play  the  growing  repertoire  of  music  being  written  for  this 
medium.  In  addition,  standard  classical  works  for  wind  and/or  percussion  instruments  are 
played.  The  members  of  this  organization  are  chosen  by  audition. 

*Majors  in  sacred  music. 
78 


Instrumental  Small  Ensembles.*  0:1:0  per  semester. 

Open  to  the  advanced  player  on  an  audition  basis. 

611.  String  Trio  617.  Saxophone  Trio 

612.  String  Quartet  618.  Saxophone  Quartet 

613.  Clarinet  Choir  619.  Saxophone  Quintet 

614.  Woodwind  Quintet  620.  Saxophone  Ensemble 

615.  Brass  Ensemble  621.  Flute  Ensemble 

616.  Percussion  Ensemble  622.  Horn  Ensemble 

VI.  THE  HISTORY  AND  APPRECIATION  OF  MUSIC 

100.   History  and  Appreciation  of  Music.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  course  for  the  non-music  major  designed  to  increase  the  individual's  musical 
perceptiveness.  Through  selective,  intensive  listening,  the  student  develops  concepts  of 
musical  materials  and  techniques.  The  vocabulary  this  gained  is  utilized  in  a  survey  of 
Western  music  beginning  with  the  20th  century  and  progressing  backwards  to  the  Middle 
Ages.  This  course  is  designed  primarily  for  the  student  with  no  previous  musical 
background.  May  not  be  taken  if  student  completed  Music  341  and/or  342. 

321.  Hymnology*  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

Offered  1978-1979. 

A  study  of  the  historic;al  development  of  hymns  and  hymn  singing  and  an  in-depth 
approach  to  the  current  hymncxlical  practices  of  the  Christian  churc;hes. 

322.  Sacred  Choral  Literature  Seminar.*  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Offered  1978-1979. 

A  study  of  sacred  choral  literature  to  extend  the  scope  of  the  student's  familiarity  with 
major  works  and  to  promote  further  investigation.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  development 
of  sound  aesthetic  judgment  in  selecting  literature  for  various  liturgical  settings.  Examina- 
tion is  made  of  standard  oratorios,  requiems,  cantatas  and  anthems;  sources  for  materials  are 
identified. 

341/342.   History  and  Literature  of  Music  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  survey  course  of  the  history  of  Western  music.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  various 
stylistic  developments  which  have  occurred  from  one  era  to  another,  cm  the  composers  who 
have  been  responsible  for  these  developments,  and  the  music  written  during  these  various 
eras  illustrating  these  stylistic  trends.  For  this  purpose,  extensive  use  of  recordings  is  made  a 
part  of  the  course.  The  first  semester  includes  the  development  of  music  up  to  the  IBaroque 
era,  the  second  semester  from  the  Baroque  to  the  present.  May  not  be  taken  if  student  com- 
pleted Music  100. 

351  352  353  354.  Organ  Seminar  I,  II,  III,  IV.  2:2:0.  per  semester. 

A  four-semester  sequence  based  upon  the  investigation  and  study  of  the  following: 
,351.   Organ  Design  and  Registration. 
,'352.   Organ  History  and  Literature. 

(Early  times  through  the  mid-Baroque  with  emphasis  upon  French  and  German 

music.) 
3,53.   Organ  History  and  Literature. 

(An  investigation  of  the  organ  literature  of  ).  S.  Bach  and  his  contemporaries; 

organ  literature  of  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries.) 
354.   (Church  Service  Playing. 

Required  for  organ  students  majoring  in  music  and  sacred  music;  open  to  other 
students  with  the  approval  of  the  instructor. 

406.   Piano  Seminar.  2:2:0.  Second  semester,  on  demand. 

A  survey  of  the  history  of  the  piano  including  a  brief  review  of  its  predecessors;  a  study 
of  the  literature  for  the  instrument,  with  special  emphasis  on  that  available  to  the  average 
student;  a  study  of  the  problems  encountered  in  the  preparation  of  piano  material,  its 
presentation  in  recital,  and  related  pedagogical  problems. 

Required  for  all  piano  students  majoring  in  music;  open  to  other  students  with  the 
approval  of  the  instructor. 

*Majors  in  sacred  music. 

79 


421.  Liturgy.*  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  music  and  its  forms  as  related  to  the  historical  development  and  the 
current  practice  of  the  service  of  the  Christian  churches. 

462.  Music  Literature  Seminar.**  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  study  of  music  literature  to  extend  the  scope  of  students'  familiarity  with  major 
instrumental  works  and  to  promote  further  investigation.  Designed  especially  for  the  major 
in  music  with  application  of  accumulated  knowledge  in  theory,  music  history,  and  musical 
form.  The  course  includes  examination  of  various  theories  of  aesthetics  as  they  apply  to 
music,  a  survey  of  orchestral  literature,  study  of  twentieth-century  compositions,  and 
student  pursuit  of  a  project  of  each  individual's  own  interest. 

VII.  CONDUCTING 

246.   Principles  of  Conducting.  2:2:0.  Second  semester. 

Principles  of  conducting  and  the  technique  of  the  baton  are  presented.  Each  student 
conducts  vocal  and  instrumental  ensembles  made  up  of  the  class  personnel. 

345.   Instrumental  Conducting.  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

Emphasis  on  practical  work  with  instrumental  groups.  Rehearsal  techniques  are 
applied  through  individual  experience. 

347.  Choral  Conducting,  2:2:0.  First  semester. 

Further  refinement  of  the  conductor's  basic  technique  applied  to  the  choral  idiom. 
Laboratory  situations  will  provide  for  training  in  areas  of  rehearsal  procedures,  materials, 
and  special  problems  of  choral  conducting:  diction,  tonal  development  and  style. 

VIII.  APPLIED  MUSIC  INSTRUCTION 

132.  Diction  for  Singers.  1:2:0.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  pronunciation  of  singer's  English.  German,  French,  Italian,  and 
Latin,  utilizing  the  International  Phonetic  Alphabet.  Required  for  all  voice  students  majoring 
in  music,  all  students  majoring  in  sacred  music,  and  all  keyboard-vocal  track  students 
majoring  in  music  education;  open  to  other  students  with  the  approval  of  the  instructor. 

510.  Class  Piano  Instruction.  1:1:0  per  semester. 

520.   Class  Voice  Instruction.  1:1:0  per  semester. 

530.   Individual  Instruction.  1:V2:0  per  semester. 

(Voice,  Piano,  Organ,  Orchestral  and  Band  Instruments.) 

Piano  study  (private  or  class)  is  required  for  a  minimum  of  two  years. 

540.  Individual  Instruction.  2:1:0  per  semester. 

(Voice,  Piano,  Organ,  Orchestra  and  Band  Instruments.) 
A  charge  is  made  for  the  second  half-hour  of  instruction. 

IX.  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  AND 
INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

500.  Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester, 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 

A  course  designed  for  the  student  who  desires  to  engage  in  independent  study,  either 

u^ith  or  without  departmental  honors.  (See  information  on  page  74  for  Departmental  Honors.) 

THE  STUDENT  RECITALS 

The  student  recitals  are  of  inestimable  value  to  all  students  in  acquainting 
them  with  a  wide  range  of  the  best  musical  literature,  in  developing  musical  taste 
and  discrimination,  in  affording  experience  in  appearing  before  an  audience,  and 
in  gaining  self-reliance  as  well  as  nerve  control  and  stage  demeanor. 

Students  at  all  levels  of  performance  appear  in  these  student  recitals. 
*Majors  in  sacred  music. 
**Majors  in  music. 

80 


PHILOSOPHY 

Associate  Professor  Thompson,  Chairman;  Assistant  Professor  Heffner 

The  department  of  philosophy  serves  a  major  purpose  in  the  curriculum  by 
attempting  to  make  the  student  aware  of  the  need  for  a  critical  evaluation  and 
analysis  of  the  ideas,  beliefs,  and  faiths — scientific  and  humanistic — w^ithin  the 
Western  intellectual  tradition. 

Part  of  the  rationale  for  the  study  of  philosophy  at  the  college  is  found  in  the 
value  of  its  attempt  to  examine  the  history  of  ideas  as  it  comes  to  us  from  the 
ancient  Greeks.  But  more  than  this,  philosophy  seeks  to  interpret  and  analyze 
these  ideas  as  they  relate  to  the  student's  own  existence  and  that  of  mankind  as  a 
whole.  The  study  of  philosophy  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  takes  both  inspiration 
and  justification  from  the  maxim  of  Socrates  that  "the  unexamined  life  is  not 
worth  living." 

Major:  A  total  of  twenty-four  hours,  including  Philosophy  120,  is  required  for 
the  philosophy  major. 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  philosophy,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 


INDEPENDENT  STUDY   AND  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  who  wish  to  do  independent  work  in  philosophy  beyond  the  scope 
of  courses  listed  in  the  college  catalog  may  elect,  with  departmental  approval,  to 
take  Independent  Study,  Philosophy  500,  which  is  conducted  in  a  tutorial  fashion. 

A  junior  or  senior  student  may,  with  departmental  permission,  undertake  to 
do  individual  study  for  honors  by  enrollment  in  Philosophy  500,  Independent 
Study.  This  involves  the  writing  and  oral  defense  of  a  detailed  research  project  or 
critical  study  on  an  approved  topic.  This  program  is  open  ordinarily  only  to 
departmental  majors  who  have  done  well  in  their  course  work  and  are  aiming  at 
advanced  work  in  philosophy;  it  is  not,  however,  limited  to  such  students.  The 
student  who  successfully  meets  the  requirements  of  the  program  shall  be  recom- 
mended to  the  dean  of  the  college  for  graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

110.   Problems  of  Philosophy.  3:3:0,  Either  semester. 

An  introducticjn  to  some  of  the  main  problems  of  philosophy  and  to  the  ways  in  which 
leading  philosophers  have  dealt  with  them.  As  part  of  this  course,  students  learn  the  critical 
analysis  of  ideas. 

120.   General  Logic.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  rules  of  clear  and  effective  thinking.  Attention  is  given  to  the 
logic  of  meaning,  the  logic  of  valid  inference,  and  the  logic  of  factual  inquiry.  Main 
emphasis  is  laid  upon  deductive  logic,  and  students  are  introduced  to  the  elements  of 
symbolic  logic  as  well  as  to  traditional  modes  of  analysis. 

228.   Ethics.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  inquiry  into  the  central  problems  of  ethics,  with  an  examination  of  the  responses  of 
major  ethical  theories  to  those  problems. 

231.   Philosophy  of  Religion.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  issues  raised  for  philosophy  by  contemporary  religious  and  theological 
thought.  A  critical  examination  of  such  problems  as  faith  and  reason;  the  meaning  of 
revelation,  symbolism,  and  language;  the  arguments  for  the  existence  of  God;  faith  and 
history;  religion  and  culture. 

240.   Philosophy  in  the  United  States.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  survey  of  philosophical  thought  in  the  United  States  from  the  colonial  period  to  the 
present,  with  emphasis  on  the  work  of  Peirce,  James,  and  Dewey. 

81 


323.  Greek  Philosophy.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  evolution  of  philosophy  from  its  origin  in  the  speculations  of  the 
pre-Socratic  nature  philosophers  to  the  work  of  Hellenistic  philosophers  of  the  fourth 
century,  with  emphasis  on  the  thought  of  Plato  and  Aristotle. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

326.  Medieval  Philosophy.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

The  history  of  philosophy  is  traced  from  the  decline  of  the  Hellenistic  Age  to  the 
Renaissance,  with  emphasis  on  the  development  and  subsequent  criticism  of  the  systematic 
elaborations  of  the  schoolmen  of  the  late  Middle  Ages. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

333.   Modern  Philosophy.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Not  offered  1979-1980. 

This  course  follows  the  development  of  philosophic  thought  in  the  writings  of  the 
principal  thinkers  from  the  Renaissance  to  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century,  with 
emphasis  on  the  work  of  Hume  and  Kant. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

336.  Twentieth  Century  Philosophy.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  examination  of  the  foremost  American,  British,  and  Continental  philosophers  from 
1900  to  the  present. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

340.  Aesthetics.  3:3:0.  Offered  either  semester  on  sufficient  demand  only. 

A  study  of  the  nature  and  basis  of  criticism  of  works  of  art. 
Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

341.  Metaphysics.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  detailed  consideration  of  the  theory  of  reality,  as  interpreted  by  representative 
philosophers  from  the  pre-Socratics  to  the  British  and  American  linguistic  analysts, 
including  the  twentieth-century  phenomenologists. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

346.  Epistemology.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Not  offered  1979-1980. 

A  critical  and  analytical  study  of  the  chief  questions  involved  in  "knowing,"  as 
formulated  by  representative  thinkers  from  the  time  of  Plato  to  the  present. 
Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

365.  Philosophy  of  Science.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Not  offered  1979-1980. 

An  examination  of  the  philosophical  foundations  of  the  physical  sciences.  Topics 
include:  experimental  method,  structure  and  confirmation  of  theories,  inductive  logic, 
causality,  philosophy  of  space  and  time.  One  of  these  topics  is  selected  for  special 
emphasis.  Students  are  strongly  urged  to  have  taken  a  course  in  physics  or  chemistry. 

Prerequisite:  Philosophy  110  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

442.   Seminar.  3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

Discussion  of  selected  problems  of  philosophy. 

Open  to  upperclassmen  only,  with  consent  of  the  instructor. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

See  information  on  page  81.  (Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.] 

Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor. 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor  Petrofes,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Reed;  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor Satalin;  Instructors  Correll,  and  Harriger 

The  aims  of  this  department  are  (1]  to  encourage  attitudes  and  habits  of  good 
82 


total  health;  (2)  to  develop  the  student's  physical  capacities;  (3)  to  provide 
activities  which  will  enrich  leisure  throughout  one's  life. 

Two  (2)  semesters  of  physical  education  are  required. 

In  addition  to  the  family  physician's  report,  it  is  strongly  recommended  that 
all  entering  students  also  undergo  a  thorough  visual  examination. 

Student  are  required  to  wear  the  regulation  gymnasium  outfit,  which  may  be 
purchased  at  the  college  store. 

110.   Physical  Education  (Men)  (Women).  0:2:0  per  semester. 

(Men)  The  physical  education  activities  include:  physical  fitness  and  conditioning, 
touch  football,  basketball,  softball,  volleyball,  badminton,  handball,  tennis,  swimming,  soc- 
cer, paddleball,  and  weight  training. 

(Women)  The  physical  education  activities  include:  soccer,  softball,  swimming,  ar- 
chery, volleyball,  badminton,  tennis,  speedball,  field  hockey,  basketball,  and  paddleball. 


PHYSICS 

Professor  Rhodes,   Chairman;  Professor  Emeritus  Grimm;  Associate  Professor 
O'Donnell;  Assistant  Professor  Thompson 

The  department  of  physics  attempts  to  develop  in  the  student  an  increased 
understanding  of  the  basic  laws  of  nature  as  they  relate  to  our  physical  environ- 
ment, and  to  indicate  the  possible  extent,  as  well  as  the  limitations,  of  our 
knowledge  of  the  physical  world. 

The  course  Physics  100  is  designed  especially  for  the  non-science  major  who 
may  wish  only  a  one-semester  introduction  to  the  role  of  physics  and  its  impact  on 
society.  The  introductory  course  Physics  103,  104  is  intended  for  students  who 
desire  a  one-year  survey  course  in  physics  without  the  calculus  prerequisite.  The 
sequence  of  courses  111,  112  and  211,  212  provides  suitable  training  for  students 
who  anticipate  additional  work  in  the  physical  sciences,  whether  it  be  in  physics, 
chemistry,  engineering,  applied  mathematics,  or  some  other  area  for  which  a 
strong  background  in  physics  is  essential.  Laboratory  work  is  an  integral  part  of  all 
the  physics  courses  at  the  freshman  and  sophomore  level;  laboratory  work  at  the 
junior  and  senior  levels  is  provided  in  Physics  327/328  and  Physics  500.  These 
are  courses  designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  experimental  techniques 
and  the  measuring  instruments  appropriate  to  the  various  areas  of  investigation, 
and  to  give  experience  in  the  interpretation  and  communication  of  experimental 
results.  Laboratory  facilities  include  a  neutron  howitzer,  beta  and  gamma  detec- 
tion equipment  with  a  multi-channel  pulse  height  analyzer,  lasers,  a  50  kV  X-ray 
diffractometer,  and  a  harmonic  wave  analyzer. 

The  department  prepares  students  for  graduate  study,  for  research  and 
development  work  in  governmental  and  industrial  laboratories,  and  for  teaching 
physics  in  the  secondary  schools.  It  also  provides  background  courses  in  physics 
appropriate  for  work  in  various  basic  and  applied  areas  of  the  physical  sciences, 
such  as  astrophysics,  biophysics,  space  science,  and  computer  technology. 

Major:  Physics  111,  112,  211,  311,  312,  321,  322,  and  six  additional  semester 
hours,  of  which  at  least  two  shall  be  in  experimental  physics,  for  a  total  of  30 
hours;  Math  161,  162,  261.  266  (12  hours)  or  111,  112,  211,  266  (16  hours). 
Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  physics,  the  B.S.  degree  is  offered. 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY  AND  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Independent  Study,  Physics  500,  is  available  to  all  physics  majors  with  the 
approval  of  the  departmental  chairman.  Experimental  facilities  are  available  in  the 
department  for  independent  investigations  in  X-ray  diffraction,  neutron  reactions, 
radioactivity,   Mossbauer  effect,   gamma  ray  spectroscopy,  and   wave  analysis. 

83 


Theoretical  problems  may  be  chosen  from  classical  physics,  statistical  mechanics, 
or  quantum  mechanics. 

Physics  majors  who  have  demonstrated  high  academic  ability  may,  with  the 
permission  of  the  departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college,  participate 
in  the  departmental  honors  program  in  physics.  Application  for  ad-^ission  to  this 
program  should  be  made  before  the  end  of  the  junior  year.  A  student  admitted  to 
the  program  enrolls  in  Physics  500  and  works  on  an  experimental  or  theoretical 
research  project,  normally  for  a  period  of  a  year,  with  departmental  supervision. 
Upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of  an  approved  project  and  the  formal  presenta- 
tion of  a  research  paper  before  an  examining  committee,  the  student  will  be 
recommended  to  the  dean  of  the  college  for  graduation  with  departmental  honors. 

100.  Physics  and  Its  Impact.  4:3:2.  Either  semester. 

A  course  designed  to  acquaint  the  student,  especially  the  non-science  major,  with 
some  of  the  important  concepts  of  physics,  both  classical  and  modern,  and  with  the 
scientific  method,  its  nature  and  its  limitations.  The  role  of  physics  in  the  history  of  thought 
and  its  relationships  to  other  disciplines  and  to  society  and  government  are  considered.  The 
weekly  two-hour  laboratory  period  provides  experience  in  the  acquisition,  representation, 
and  analysis  of  experimental  data,  and  demonstration  of  the  physical  phenomena  with 
which  the  course  deals.  No  mathematics  or  science  prerequisite. 

103,  104.   General  College  Physics  I,  II.  4:3:3  per  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  fundamental  concepts  and  laws  of  the  various  branches  of 
physics,  including  mechanics,  heat,  sound,  electricity,  magnetism,  optics,  and  atomic  and 
nuclear  structure,  with  laboratory  work  in  each  area. 

110.  The  Physics  of  Music.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

This  course,  for  students  with  an  interest  in  music,  comprises  a  study  of  wave  motion, 
the  analysis  and  synthesis  of  waves,  resonance,  physical  characteristics  of  music  sounds, 
musical  instruments,  the  reproduction  and  amplification  of  sound,  and  the  acoustical 
properties  of  rooms.  Whenever  feasible,  laboratory  exercises  and  physical  demonstrations 
will  supplement  or  replace  classroom  instruction.  A  working  knowledge  of  algebra  and 
trigonometry  is  required. 

111,  112.   Principles  of  Physics  I,  II.  4:3:3  per  semester. 

An  introductory  course  in  classical  physics,  designed  for  students  who  desire  a  more 
rigorous  mathematical  approach  to  college  physics  than  is  given  in  Physics  103,  104. 
Calculus  is  used  throughout.  The  first  semester  is  devoted  to  mechanics  and  heat,  and  the 
second  semester  to  electricity,  magnetism,  and  optics,  with  laboratory  work  in  each  area. 
This  course  should  be  followed  by  Physics  211. 

Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Mathematics  111  or  161. 

211.  Atomic  and  Nuclear  Physics.  4:3:3.  First  semester. 

An  introduction  to  modern  physics,  including  the  foundation  of  atomic  physics,  the 
quantum  theory  of  radiation,  the  atomic  nucleus,  radioactivity,  and  nuclear  reactions,  with 
laboratory  work  in  each  area. 

Prerequisite:  Physics  104  or  112. 

212.  Introduction  to  Electronics.  4:3:3.  Second  semester. 

The  physics  of  electrons  and  electronic  devices,  including  vacuum  tubes,  diodes, 
transistors,  power  supplies,  amplifiers,  oscillators,  switching  circuits,  and  ser- 
vomechanisms,  with  laboratory  work  in  each  area. 

Prerequisite:  Physics  104  or  112,  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

311,  312.   Analytical  Mechanics  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  study  of  classical  mechanics,  including  the  motion  of  a  single  particle,  the 
motion  of  a  system  of  particles,  and  the  motion  of  a  rigid  body.  Damped  and  forced  harmonic 
motion,  the  central  force  problem,  the  Euler  description  of  rigid  body  motion,  and  the 
Lagrange  generalization  of  Newtonian  mechanics  are  among  the  topics  ^"^eated. 

Prerequisites:  Physics  111  and  Mathematics  266. 

84 


321,  322.  Electricity  and  Magnetism  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  study  of  the  basic  phenomena  of  electromagnetism,  together  with  the 
application  of  fundamental  principles  to  the  solving  of  problems.  The  electric  and  magnetic 
properties  of  matter,  direct  current  circuits,  alternating  current  circuits,  the  Maxwell  field 
equations,  and  the  propagation  of  electromagnetic  waves  are  among  the  topics  treated. 

Prerequisites:  Physics  112  and  Mathematics  266. 

327/328.   Experimental  Physics  I,  II.  1:0:3  per  semester. 

Experimental  work  selected  from  the  areas  of  mechanics,  A.C.  and  D.C.  electrical 
measurements,  optics,  atomic  physics,  or  nuclear  physics,  with  emphasis  on  experimental 
design,  measuring  techniques,  and  analysis  of  data. 

Prerequisite:  Physics  211. 

421,  422.   Modern  Physics  I,  II.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  rigorous  study  of  selected  topics  in  modern  physics,  utilizing  the  methods  of 
quantum  mechanics.  The  Schrodinger  equation  is  solved  for  such  systems  as  potential 
barriers,  potential  wells,  the  linear  oscillator,  the  rigid  rotator,  and  the  hydrogen  atom. 
Perturbation  techniques  and  the  operator  formalism  of  quantum  mechanics  are  introduced 
where  appropriate. 

Prerequisites:  Physics  211  and  Mathematics  266. 

430.  The  Teaching  of  Physics  in  Secondary  Schools.  1:1:0.  Either  semester. 

A   course   designed   to   acquaint  the   student   with   some   of  the   special   methods, 
programs,  and  problems  in  the  teaching  of  physics  in  secondary  schools. 
Required  for  secondary  certification  in  physics. 

480.   Special  Topics  in  Physics.  3:3:0  per  semester. 

A  seminar  in  one  or  more  of  the  following  areas  of  physics  is  offered  each  semester,  and 
is  open,  with  the  approval  of  the  instructor,  to  juniors  and  seniors  from  any  department. 

(a)  Thermodynamics.  A  study  of  the  laws  of  thermodynamics  from  which  the 
following  topics  are  developed:  thermodynamic  variables,  equations  of  state,  phase  transi- 
tions, specific  heats,  entropy,  and  low  temperature  phenomena. 

(b)  Statistical  Mechanics.  Maxwell-Boltzmann,  Bose-Einstein,  and  Fermi-Dirac  statis- 
tics are  derived  and  used  to  discuss  specific  heats,  paramagnetism,  the  properties  of 
molecules,  photons,  and  electrons,  and  fluctuations. 

(c)  Wave  Theory.  A  study  of  the  theory  of  waves  as  it  applies  to  electrodynamics, 
optics,  and  acoustics.  The  topics  covered  include  propagation  of  wave  motion,  wave  guides, 
diffraction  and  interference  phenomena,  and  polarization. 

(d)  Nuclear  Physics.  The  topics  covered  include  properties  of  nuclei,  nuclear  force, 
nuclear  models,  properties  of  alpha,  beta,  and  gamma  decay,  fission,  and  fusion. 

(e)  Solid  State  Physics.  The  topics  covered  include  the  properties  of  crystals,  elec- 
tronic states  in  solids,  semiconductors,  and  the  electric  and  magnetic  properties  of  solids. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
An  experimental  or  theoretical  investigation  in  a  selected  area  of  physics  under  the 

supervision  of  a  physics  staff  member.  Open  to  all  physics  majors  with  the  permission  of  the 

departmental  chairman. 

See  Information  on  page  83. 


PSYCHOLOGY 


Professor  Davidon,  Chairman:  Professors  Lasky  and  Love;  Assistant  Professor 
Carlson;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Anolik;  Adjunct  Instructor  Smith 

The  program  presents  psychology  from  its  scientific  and  professional 
perspectives,  and  provides  a  means  for  student's  pyscho-social  development 
through  increased  know^ledge.  As  a  behavioral  science,  the  program  is  designed  to 

85 


contribute  to  students'  general  ediTcation,  to  provide  a  background  for  many 
human  service  occupations,  and  to  prepare  some  for  later  graduate  v^ork.  There  is 
a  complete  program  for  those  preparing  for  graduate  school  studies  in  either 
experimental,  clinical,  educational,  or  school  psychology  or  counseling. 

Many  who  major  in  psychology  are  employed  upon  graduation  in  agencies, 
hospitals,  and  industry.  Furthermore,  many  of  the  courses  provide  an  important 
background  for  those  preparing  for  careers  in  others  fields  such  as  medicine, 
business  and  teaching. 

There  is  a  program  for  majors  who  wish  to  qualify  for  teaching  psychology  in 
high  school,  with  Pennsylvania  Teaching  Certification  in  Social  Studies  upon 
graduation.  A  double  major  in  psychology  and  elementary  education  provides 
certification  to  teach  in  elementary  school,  as  well  as  preparation  for  graduate 
work. 

Major:  Psychology  110,  216,  236,  343  and  443;  either  235  or  444,  or  both; 
either  332  or  335,  and  at  least  two  of  the  following:  321,  346,  431,  for  a  minimum 
of  27  hours.  Certain  substitutions  may  be  approved  by  the  Department.  Students 
preparing  for  graduate  school  are  advised  to  include  Psychology  237  or  238. 

Degree;  For  the  student  who  majors  in  psychology,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY  AND  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

For  the  capable  student  who  wishes  to  take  part  in  selecting  and  planning  his 
own  investigation  within  particular  areas  of  psychology,  a  program  of  indepen- 
dent study  and  research  for  credit  may  replace  courses.  The  student  is  assisted  by 
a  member  of  the  faculty  with  whom  he  has  individual  conferences.  The  student's 
investigation  is  designated  as  Independent  Study  (Psychology  500),  whether  or 
not  he  is  a  candidate  for  departmental  honors. 

In  order  to  begin  a  program  of  individual  study  for  departmental  honors,  a 
psychology  major  is  required  to:  (1)  have  an  over-all  grade-point  average  of  2.5;  (2) 
have  an  average  of  3.0  in  psychology  courses;  (3)  show  consistently  high  interest 
and  initiative;  and  (4)  obtain  the  approval  of  the  departmental  staff  and  the  dean  of 
the  college. 

Graduation  with  honors  in  psychology  will  depend  on  the  quality  of  inde- 
pendent study,  the  written  and  oral  reports,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  grade- 
point  averages  specified  for  admission  to  the  study  program. 

110.  General  Psychology.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  introduction  to  scientific  studies  and  humanistic  approaches  to  behavior  and  ex- 
perience. Topics  include:  learning  and  memory,  perceiving,  the  brain  and  behavior,  states  of 
consciousness,  personality,  development,  abnormality,  psychotherapies.  and  social  inter- 
action. 

216.  Experimental  Methods  in  Behavioral  Science.  3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

The  various  methods  which  enable  students  to  critically  evaluate  behavioral  research 
findings.  Experimental  and  correctional  procedures  are  applied  to  problems  in  behavioral 
research,  biomedical  research,  and  program  evaluation  in  health  and  human  service 
agencies. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110  taken  previously  or  concurrently. 

220.  Educational  Psychology.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

Review  of  the  psychological  literature  concerning  cognitive,  behavioral,  emotional 
and  social  effects  of  typical  educational  influences.  Required  for  state  certification  in  ele- 
mentary and  music  education. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

235.   Experimental  Psychology  I:  Sensory  and  Perceptual  Processes.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Review  of  major  areas  of  investigation  of  visual,  auditory  and  other  sensory  systems. 
Psychophysical  methods,  and  principles  of  sensory  differentiation  and  field  organization  are 
included. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

86 


236.  Experimental  Psychology  II:  Learning  and  Motivation.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Instrumental  and  classical  conditioning  techniques  are  compared  and  related  to 
theories  of  human  and  animal  learning  and  motivation.  Basic  methods  in  the  investigation  of 
verbal  learning  are  introduced.  Analyses  of  learning  include  cognitive  processes. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

237.  Laboratory  Investigations  I:  Sensory  and  Perceptual  Processes. 

1:0:3.  First  semester. 

Experiments  with  human  subjects,  coordinated  with  topics  in  Psychology  2:^5. 
Students  select  sensory/perceptual  problems  for  investigation,  have  a  part  in  the  design  of 
experiments,  conduct  trials,  do  statistical  computation,  and  interpret  the  results. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

Corequisite:  Psychology  235. 

238.  Laboratory  Investigations  II:  Learning.  1:0:3.  Second  semester. 

Animal  and  human  learning  experiments  coordinated  with  topics  in  Psychology  236. 
Simple  learning  situations  are  demonstrated.  Students  conduct  investigations,  analyze  data, 
and  write  reports. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

Corequisite:  Psychology  236. 

300.  Cinematic  Conceptions  of  Man.  3  hours  credit. 

Viewing  films  as  literary  works,  an  examination  of  the  thematic,  stylistic,  and 
structural  statements  and  assertions  concerning  man's  actions  and  psychology  that  are  made 
by  auteurs,  and  involved  in  film  genres  and  historical  periods.  Specific  topics  (e.g.,  Fellini, 
Antonioni,  the  Western,  and  Neo-Realism)  to  be  selected  each  term,  and  discussions  will  be 
based  upon  films  in  a  film  series  illustrating  the  topic,  a  series  held  in  conjunction  with  the 
course.  May  be  taken  twice  for  credit. 

321.  Childhood  and  Development.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

The  study  of  cognitive,  social  and  emotional  change  over  the  life  span,  as  well  as  the 
psychological  effects  of  physical  growth.  Special  attention  is  given  to  research  studies,  de- 
velopmental mechanisms  and  theories  of  development.  Students  are  encouraged  to  conduct 
research  with  children. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

332.   Psychological  Testing  and  Assessment.  3:2:2.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  basic  psychometric  theory,  and  an  overview  of  selected  personality, 
ability  and  attitude  measures. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110;  Psychology  216.  Mathematics  170,  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 

335.  Research  Design  and  Statistics.  3  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

The  student  evaluates  published  studies  and  identifies  problems  in  the  design  and 
execution  of  both  laboratory  and  applied  studies.  Factorial  designs,  multivariate  techniques, 
and  non-parametric  statistics  are  covered  in  clinical,  organizational,  educational  and 
laboratory  settings. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110,  216,  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

337.  Organizational  Psychology.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

The  application  of  basic  psychological  principles  and  findings  to  problems  of  orga- 
nizational behavior  and  psychology  in  industry.  Topics  to  include  ecological  psychology — 
man  environment  relations,  systems  design  and  analysis,  human  factors  engineering,  and 
the  evaluation  of  the  impact  of  the  organization  on  the  individual. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

343.  Personality.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Reasons  for  individuality  and  consistency  in  the  lives  of  persons  are  studied.  Attention 
is  typically  given  to  the  role  of  aggression,  altruism,  anxiety,  competence,  dependency, 
and  sexuality.  Psychoanalysis,  existential-phenomenology  and  social  learning  are  among 
the  major  personality  theories  to  be  studied. 

Prerequisites:  Psy  110;  junior  or  senior  standing,  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

87 


346.  Social  Psychology.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

The  study  of  how  groups  or  other  individuals  interpersonally  and  intrapersonally  af- 
fect the  individual.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  review  of  research  studies  and  theories.  Topics 
include:  attitude  development  and  change,  conformity,  persuasion,  person  perception,  at- 
tribution, attraction,  norms,  and  small  groups. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110;  junior  or  senior  standing,  or  permission  of  the  instruc- 
tor. 

350-399.  Special  Topics  in  Psychology.  1-3  hrs.  credit.  Either  semester. 

An  area  of  investigation  of  special  topics  will  be  considered  through  individual 
or  group  study.  The  courses  will  offer  the  opportunity  for  intensive  readings,  research  and 
theories  and  issues;  and  prepare  papers  on  selected  topics. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110;  junior  or  senior  standing;  other  prerequisites  may  be 
required  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  course;  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

431.  Abnormal  Behavior  and  Experience.  3  hours  credit.  First  semester. 

The  study  of  personal  problems,  including  alcohol  and  drug  dependence,  brain  dis- 
orders, criminal  and  psychopathic  behavior,  psychoneurosis,  psychosomatic  reactions,  psy- 
choses, sexual  deviations,  subnormal  intelligence,  suicide,  and  the  disorders  of  childhood 
and  adolescence. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110;  junior  or  senior  standing,  or  permission  of  the  instruc- 
tor. 

432.  Introduction  to  Clinical  Psychology.  3  hours  credit.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  work  of  psychologists  in  understanding  and  assisting  persons 
who  have  problems.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  clinical  interviewing;  projective 
techniques,  testing  and  diagnosing;  individual  and  group  therapy;  marriage  and  family 
counseling;  and  play  therapy  with  children.  Field  work  in  a  clinical  setting. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110;  431  or  nursing  training  with  psychiatric  affiliation,  or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 

443.  History  and  Theory.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Philosophical  issues,  areas  and  trends  of  investigation,  and  "schools  of  psychology" 
prior  to  1940. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110  and  236;  junior  or  senior  standing,  or  permission  of  the 
instructor. 

444.  Physiological  Psychology.  3:2:2.  Second  semester. 

How  biological  processes  interrelate  with  behavioral  events  in  learning,  thinking, 
feeling,  perceiving,  and  striving,  including  neural  and  hormonal  bases  for  learning, 
memory,  and  personality.  Findings  in  biofeedback,  sexuality,  sleep,  and  behavior  disorders 
are  examined. 

Prerequisite:  Psychology  110. 

490.  Internship.  1-6  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit,  or. 
with  approval  of  Departmental  Faculty, 
15  hours  credit) 
An  applied  and  academic  program  which  combines  work  in  community  mental  health 
and  related  agencies,  hospitals  and  schools,  with  discussions,  guided  reading,  and  sys- 
tematized observations. 

Prerequisites:  Psy  110;  junior  or  senior  standing;  approval  of  instructor,  based  on 
relevant  coursework  in  psychology  and  personal  attributes;  approval  of  community  agency. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

Individual  investigation  of  a  selected  topic  in  psychology,  involving  either  an  experi- 
ment, a  project  in  the  community,  or  a  systematic  program  of  reading,  each  under  the 
supervision  of  a  memer  of  the  department.  This  includes  conferences  with  the  instructor. 
See  information  on  page  86. 

Prerequisites:  Psychology  110,  one  additional  psychology  course,  and  permission  of 
the  department. 

88 


READING  AND  STUDY  SKILLS 

110.  Reading  and  Study  Skills.  1:2:0.  Either  semester. 

A  study  of  techniques  intended  to  improve  those  skills  important  to  reading  and  to 
study  at  the  college  level.  Texts  assigned  for  students'  own  classes  are  utilized,  and 
additional  resource  materials  are  available  in  the  Media  Center.  Students  who  have  SAT 
verbal  scores  below  450  are  strongJy  advised  to  take  the  course. 

RELIGION 

Professor   Wethington,   Chairman;  Professor  Troutman;  Associate  Professors 
Byrne  and  Cantrell;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Shearer 

The  aim  of  this  department  is  to  provide  opportunity  for  the  academic  study 
of  the  meaning  of  man's  religious  experience. 

Toward  this  end.  the  department  offers  courses  which  introduce  the  student  to 
the  various  historical  and  contemporary  expressions  of  the  Christian  heritage  as 
well  as  courses  which  acquaint  him  with  the  diverse  religious  traditions  of 
mankind. 

As  pre-professional  preparation,  courses  are  provided  for  those  who  are 
looking  toward  graduate  studies  in  the  humanities,  social  sciences,  world  cul- 
tures, the  Christian  ministry,  world  missions,  and  other  church  vocations,  as  well 
as  the  academic  teaching  of  religion. 

Major:  A  total  of  twenty-four  semester  hours  is  required,  including  at 
least  one  advanced  course  in  Biblical  studies  (202,  211.  212),  222,  331,  and  404. 
A  total  of  six  hours  of  New  Testament  Greek  and  Philosophy  of  Religion 
may  also  count  towards  the  major.  Philosophy  110  is  a  required  elective,  and  the 
following  courses  are  strongly  recommended  for  a  major  in  religion:  Biology  101, 
History  111/112,  Psychology  110,  and  Sociology  110. 

Degree:For  the  student  who  majors  in  religion,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 

DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

Students  wishing  to  participate  in  the  departmental  honors  program  in  the 
department  may  do  so  by  fulfilling  the  following  requirements:  (1]  achieve  high 
academic  standing  in  departmental  courses;  (2)  submit  a  paper  in  connection  with 
a  course  beyond  the  first  year  courses;  (3)  apply  and  receive  approval  for 
participation  in  departmental  honors  from  the  departmental  chairman  and  the 
dean  of  the  college  by  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year;  (4)  prepare  an 
essay  of  10,000  words  or  more  under  the  direction  of  a  member  of  the  department 
to  be  submitted  by  March  15  of  the  senior  year;  (5)  defend  the  essay  before  a 
faculty  committee  selected  by  the  department  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the 
college. 

On  the  basis  of  his  performance  in  the  essay  and  the  oral  examination,  the 
departmental  chairman  and  the  dean  of  the  college  will  determine  whether  or  not 
the  candidate  is  to  receive  departmental  honors. 

111.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Thought.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  examination  of  some  of  the  basic  themes  of  Biblical  religion  in  relation  to  their 
historical  context  and  their  contemporary  implications. 

112.  Introduction  to  the  Christian  Faith.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  systematic  inquiry  into  the  areas  of  religious  languages,  religious  knowledge,  and 
the  doctrines  of  God,  man,  Christ,  and  the  Church. 

120.   Religion  in  America.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  study  of  contemporary  Judaism,  Roman  Catholicism,  and  Protestantism  in  the 

89 


United  States,  including  a  brief  historical  background  of  each.  Some  attention  is  given  to  the 
various  religious  sects  and  cults. 

130.   American  Folk  Religion.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  both  of  the  folk  traditions  of  selected  American  denominations  and  sects, 
and  of  the  theological  implications  of  "secular"  folklore.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
field-v^ork  as  well  as  on  analysis. 

Prerequisite:  Religion  120  or  permission  of  instructor. 

140.  World  Religions.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

An  examination  of  the  rise  and  development  of  religion  along  with  a  study  of  the  ideas, 
and  cultic  and  ethical  practices  of  the  great  world  faiths.  Special  attention  given  to  Asian 
religions. 

202.  The  Prophets.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  lives  and  writings  of  the  Old  Testament  prophets,  and  an  analysis  of 
their  contributions  to  Hebrew-Christian  religious  thought. 
Prerequisite:  Religion  111. 

206.  Near  East  Archaeology  and  the  Bible.        3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1983-1984. 

An  examination  of  archaeology  in  biblical  lands,  its  methods,  objectives,  and  contribu- 
tions to  the  areas  of  history,  culture,  and  religion. 

Prerequisite:  Religion  111  or  permission  of  instructor. 

211.  Life  and  Teachings  of  lesus.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  intensive  study  of  the  life  and  message  of  Jesus  as  set  forth  in  the  Gospels. 
Prerequisite:  Religion  111. 

212.  Life  and  Epistles  of  Paul.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

A  study  of  the  life,  writings,  and  theological  thought  of  Paul  and  their  relationship  to 
the  practices,  problems,  and  beliefs  of  the  early  church. 
Prerequisite:  Religion  111  or  112. 

222.  Christian  Ethics.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  systematic  analysis  of  the  implications  of  the  Christian  faith  both  for  personal  moral 
decision,  and  for  social  policy  in  such  areas  as  government  and  political  life,  work  and  the 
economic  order.  Required  of  majors  and  strongly  recommended  for  all  pre-theological 
students. 

Prerequisite:  Religion  111  or  112. 

331.  Christian  Tradition  and  Reform.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  the  major  and  continuing  strains  in  the  history  of  Christianity  and  the 
principal  reform  movements.  Required  of  majors  and  strongly  recommended  for  all 
pre-theological  students. 

332.  Theological  Issues  in  Contemporary  Secular  Authors.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

Offered  1980-1981. 

Identification,  analysis,  and   interpretation  of  issues  of  special  theological  import 
raised  by  thinkers  representing  "non-theological"  disciplines. 
Prerequisite:  Religion  112  or  consent  of  instructor. 

340.  Introduction  to  Christian  Nurture.        3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Not  offered  1980-1981. 

An  investigation  of  some  of  the  principles  and  problems  of  religious  education  as  they 
are  related  to  higher  education,  the  public  school,  the  church  school,  and  the  home. 
Prerequisite:  Religion  111  or  112. 

403.  Seminar  in  Classical  Christian  Thinkers.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

(Not  offered  1980-1981.) 

An  intensive  study  of  the  thought  of  such  classical  religious  thinkers  as  Augustine, 
Aquinas,  Luther,  and  others. 


90 


404.  Seminar  in  Selected  Religious  Problems.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  study  of  selected  problems  arising  from  recent  theological  efforts.  Research 
methodology  is  stressed. 

Required  of  majors  and  strongly  recommended  for  all  pre-theological  students;  others 
by  permission  of  the  chairman  of  the  department. 

Prerequisite:  Religion  111  and  112. 

500.   Independent  Study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Request  guidelines  from  adviser. 
For  departmental  honors  see  information  on  page  89. 


SOCIAL  SCIENCE 


Genera]  Adviser:  Professor  Geffen.  Upon  choice  of  an  area  of  concentration  the 
student  is  given  an  adviser  in  that  discipline. 

The  social  sciences  examine  the  structure  of  society  and  the  behavior  of 
human  beings  in  group  relationships  within  that  structure.  This  interdisciplinary 
program  provides  an  opportunity  for  the  student  to  explore  the  basic  concepts  of  a 
broad  spectrum  of  social  science  disciplines — economics,  history,  political  sci- 
ence, and  sociology — and  then  to  do  more  concentrated  work  in  his  choice  of  one 
of  these  subject  areas. 

All  courses  are  taught  by  the  respective  departments  and  share  the  objectives 
of  those  departments.  These  objectives  and  specific  course  content  are  described 
in  the  respective  departmental  sections  in  this  catalog. 

The  general  purpose  of  the  program  is  to  develop  the  student's  understanding 
of  the  nature  of  the  social  processes  in  which  he  is  involved  as  a  human  being  and 
the  structure  within  which  he  lives  as  a  member  of  society,  in  order  that  he  may 
function  more  effectively. 

The  program  also  offers  basic  preparation  for  graduate,  theological,  and  law 
schools,  and  for  careers  in  business,  government,  social  work,  and  teaching. 

Basic  Requirements:  Economics  110/120,  History  125/126,  Political  Science 
111/112,  Sociology  110  and  121,  for  a  total  of  24  hours. 

Concentration  Requirements  (One  of  the  following]: 

Economics:  Economics  490  and  any  other  three  courses  in  Economics  for  a 

minimum  of  12  hours. 
History:  History  213,  412,  and  any  other  courses  in  history  for  a  minimum  of 

12  hours. 
Political  Science:  Political  Science  217,  412,  and  any  other  two  courses  in 

Political  Science  for  a  minimum  of  12  hours. 
Sociology:  Sociology  311,  421,  and  any  other  courses  in  Sociology  for  a 

minimum  of  12  hours. 

Degree:  For  the  student  who  majors  in  social  science,  the  B.A.  degree  is 
offered. 


SOCIOLOGY  AND  SOCIAL  SERVICE 

Associate  Professor  Welch,  Acting  Chairman;  Assistant  Professors  Clay,  Hanes, 
and  Raiten;  Adjunct  Instructor  Lindenberg. 

The  Department  of  Sociology  and  Social  Service  assists  students  in  develop- 
ing their  understanding  of  the  general  character  of  human  relationships  and  of  the 

91 


specific  nature  and  processes  of  group  life.  In  addition  to  helping  prepare  students 
for  further  study  in  graduate  schools  of  sociology  and  social  work,  the  department 
also  provides  pre-professional  training  for  students  who  plan  to  pursue  vocations 
in  social,  religious,  and  community  service. 

Major  in  Sociology:  Sociology  110,  311,  421,  and  432,  plus  15  additional 
hours  in  the  department.  Psychology  346  may  be  counted  toward  the  27  hours 
required  for  a  major. 

Major  in  Social  Service:  Sociology  110,  262,  311,  331,  341,  9  semester  hours  of 
Sociology  410  plus  one  of  the  following  options:  No  Concentration — Two  courses 
selected  from  Sociology  122,  232,  272,  and  282,  for  a  total  of  32-33  hours;  Criminal 
Justice  Concentration — Sociology  271,  272,  and  302,  for  a  total  of  36  hours;  Family 
Intervention  Concentration — Sociology  232,  242,  342,  for  a  total  of  34  hours; 
Gerontology  Concentration— Sociology  232,  242,  291,  and  302,  for  a  total  of  37 
hours;  Thanatology  Concentration — Sociology  232,  242,  342,  and  351,  for  a  total  of 
37  hours. 

Degree;  for  the  student  who  majors  in  sociology,  the  B.A.  degree  is  offered. 
For  the  student  who  majors  in  Social  Service,  the  B.S.  degree  is  offered. 


DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 

The  departmental  honors  program  is  an  encouragement  to  superior  students 
to  undertake  a  concentrated  program  of  directed  study.  The  student  must  apply  for 
and  receive  admission  to  the  program  by  the  conclusion  of  the  first  semester  of 
his/her  junior  year.  Admission  to  the  program  will  be  granted  by  the  department 
chairperson  and  the  dean  of  the  college.  The  student  must  meet  the  following 
requirements:  (1)  complete  15  hours  of  sociology  prior  to  admission  into  the 
program;  (2]  have  and  maintain  a  3.2  grade-point  average  in  sociology  and  a  3.0 
grade-point  average  overall;  (3)  complete  a  major  research  or  study  program;  (4) 
present  and  defend  the  results  of  his/her  work  before  a  faculty  committee  and 
interested  departmental  majors;  and  [5)  receive  final  approval  of  the  departmental 
honors  from  the  chairperson  of  the  department  and  the  dean  of  the  college. 

Sociology  110  is  a  prerequisite  to  all  of  the  courses  in  the  department  except 
Sociology  251. 

110.  Introduction  to  Sociology.  3:3:0.  Either  semester. 

A  systematic  study  of  the  major  concepts,  methods,  and  areas  of  sociology  focusing  on 
the  nature  of  society,  the  behavior  of  social  groups,  and  the  impact  of  society  on  individuals. 

122.  Social  Problems.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  in-depth  investigation  of  selected  problems  of  contemporary  life  as  seen  through 
different  analytical  perspectives. 

211.  Urbanology.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  inquiry  into  the  nature  and  degree  of  urbanization  in  the  United  States  and  the 
world,  and  of  the  impact  of  urban  life  on  contemporary  society. 

232.  Family  Sociology.  2:4:0.  First  seven  weeks.  Second  semester. 

An  intensive  study  of  the  family  as  a  social  institution  which  varies  from  one 
social-historical  context  to  another. 

242.  Marriage  Making.  2:4:0.  Second  seven  weeks.  Second  semester. 

A  look  at  the  marriage  pattern,  from  initial  dating  to  final  dissolution,  which  most 
Lebanon  Valley  students  can  expect  to  encounter. 

251.  Introduction  Anthropology.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

A  general  survey  of  the  uses  and  methods  of  anthropology  focusing  on  the  interaction 
of  physical,  economic,  and  cultural  factors  in  the  development  of  people  and  their  behavior. 

92 


262.  Social  Welfare.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

An  introduction  to  the  nature  and  functions  of  social  welfare  in  contemporary  society, 
stressing  its  history,  its  problems,  and  its  prospects. 

271.  Criminal  Justice.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  in-depth  examination  of  the  strengths  and  weaknesses  of  our  criminal  justice 
system  and  of  possible  alternatives  to  it. 

272.  Criminology.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  investigation  of  the  social  phenomenon  of  crime,  including  consideration  of  the 
nature,  causes,  and  responses  to  behavior  which  is  defined  as  criminal  or  deviant. 

282.  Social  Inequality.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1979-1980. 

An  analysis  of  relations  within  and  between  racial  and  other  ethnic  groups.  Considera- 
tion is  given  to  unique  historical  contexts,  basic  social  processes,  and  emergent  contempo- 
rary developments. 

291.  Gerontology.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1981-1982. 

An  investigation  of  the  ways  in  which  individuals,  families,  communities,  and  society 
as  a  whole  respond  to  the  problems  created  by  aging. 

302.  Community  Organization.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  study  of  the  structure,  action,  and  change  of  communities  as  a  whole  and  the 
organizations  which  comprise  them. 

311.  Research  Methods  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

Students  learn  to  develop  research  design,  to  code  data,  to  interpret  and  communicate 
findings,  and  to  utilize  and  evaluate  the  research  of  others. 

Prerequisite:  Sociology  major,  junior  or  senior  status,  or  permission  of  department 
chairperson. 

322.   Sociology  of  Religion.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  investigation  of  the  structure  and  functions  of  religious  organizations  and 
phenomena,  with  particular  emphasis  on  the  varieties  of  religious  expression  in  American 
society. 

331.  Social  Service  Theory.  3:3:0  First  semester. 

A  study  of  process  change,  with  particular  emphasis  on  various  theories  and  models  of 
intervention  and  treatment. 

341.  Intervention  Methods  I.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  examination  of  the  knowledge  and  skills  required  for  professional  social  work, 
emphasizing  the  methods  of  social  casework,  social  group  work,  community  organization 
and  social  action. 

Prequisite:  Sociology  331. 

342.  Intervention  Methods  II.  3:3:0.  Second  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

A  further  examination  of  the  knowledge  and  skills  required  for  professional  social 
work,  emphasizing  in  particular  individual  and  group  counselling. 

351.  Thanatology.  3:3:0.  First  semester.  Offered  1980-1981. 

An  exploration  of  some  of  the  basic  legal,  medical,  ethical,  and  social  issues  related  to 
death  and  dying  in  contemporary  society. 

360-399.  Topical  Seminars  in  Sociology.  3:3:0.  per  semester. 

A  consideration  of  selected  social  issues  which  are  of  academic  interest  to  students  and 
faculty  members. 

410.  Field  Experience  in  Social  Welfare.  3-12  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  15  hours  credit) 
An  extension  and  application  of  knowledge  through  a  supervised  field  placement 
experience  in  a  public  or  private  social  service  agency  or  program. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology  331. 


421.  Social  Theory.  3:3:0.  First  semester. 

An  intensive  exploration  of  the  major  sociological  theorists  and  movements. 
Prerequisite:  12  hours  in  the  department. 

432.  Seminar  in  Sociology.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  critical  analysis  of  selected  themes  and  issues  in  contemporary  sociology. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology  421. 

442.  Seminar  in  Social  Work.  3:3:0.  Second  semester. 

A  detailed  study  of  selected  terms  and  issues  from  the  areas  of  group  vi^ork,  family  and 
children's  case  work,  community  organization  and  for  social  action. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology  341,  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

500.  Independent  study.  1-3  hours  credit.  Either  semester. 

(Maximum  of  9  hours  credit.) 
Directed  work  in  areas  approved  by  the  instructor. 

Prerequisites:  18  hours  in  sociology,  a  cumulative  2.5  average,  and  a  contract  with  the 
instructor  prior  to  registration  for  the  course. 


SPANISH 

See  Foreign  Languages,  page  61. 


94 


SPECIAL  PLANS  OF  STUDY 

The  adviser  to  each  of  these  programs  should  be  consuhed  for  the  details  of 
the  program's  requirements  and  recommendations. 

ACTUARIAL  SCIENCE 

Advisers:  Dr.  Mayer,  Dr.  Hearsey 

The  actuarial  science  program  (see  page  71  for  requirements)  is  designed  to 
prepare  students  for  the  first  four  of  the  nine  examinations  required  by  the  Society 
of  Actuaries  for  Admission  as  a  Fellow.  The  college  is  a  testing  center  for  the 
Society  of  Actuaries,  and  each  of  the  four  examinations  may  be  taken  on  campus. 
In  addition,  the  choice  of  courses  available  to  the  actuarial  science  major  is  broad 
enough  to  qualify  him  as  a  major  in  mathematics. 

BIOLOGY  (Professional  Biology,  Environmental  Biology,  Pre-Medicine, 
Pre-Dentistry,  Pre- Veterinary  Programs) 

Advisers:  Dr.  Wolf,  Dr.  Henninger,  Dr.  Pollack,  Dr.  Verhoek,  Dr.  Williams,  Dr. 
Wolfe 


First  Year 

Bi  111/112,  General  Biology  I,  II 

Ch  111,  112,  Principles  of  Chem.  I,  II 

For.  Lang.  6  hrs. 

Ma  161,  162,  Calculus  I,  II* 

PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Bi  electives  (4  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Ch  213,  214,  Organic  Chemistry  I,  II 
Ch  216,  Lab.  Investigations  I 
En  111/112 

English  Composition  I,  II 
Other  Cen.  Requirements  (6  hrs.  each 
sem.1 


Third  Year 

Bi  elective  (4  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Phy   103,   104  or   111,   112.  Gen  Coll. 

Physics  I,  II  or  Prin.  of  Physics  I,  II 
General  Requirements,  9  hrs. 
Electives  (3-6  hrs.  1st  sem.] 

Fourth  Year 

Bi  elective  (4  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Bi  411  or  412  Biology  seminar  (1-2  hrs. 

either  sem.) 
Electives  fl6-19  hrs.) 


*Ma   161   required;   Ma   162   and   170  rec- 
ommended. 


95 


CHEMISTRY 

Advisers:  Dr.  Neidig,  Dr.  Lockwood,  Dr.  Spencer 

Students  entering  with  advanced  placement  in  chiemistry  are  asked  to  consult 
the  advisers. 

Program  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Chemistry  (part  of  the 
requirements  for  American  Chemical  Society  certified  degree). 


First  Year 

Ch  111,  112,  Principles  of  Chem.  I,  II 
En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
For.  Lang.   Ill,   112,  Interm.  Fr,  Ger, 

or  Sp  I,  IP 
Ma  161,  162,  Calculus  I,  II 
Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Ch  213,  214,  Org.  Chem.  I,  II 
Ch  216,  Lab.  Investigations  I 
Ma  261,  Calculus  IIP* 
Phy  111,  112,  Prin.  of  Physics  I,  II 
Soc.  Sci.  or  Hum.  dist  req.  (3  hrs.  1st 
sem.,  6  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 


Third  Year 

Ch  311,  312,  Physical  Chemistry  1,  II 
Ch  314,  Instrumental  Analysis 
Ch  315,  316,  Lab.  Investigations  II,  III 
Ch  319,  Chemical  Equilibria 
Ch  321,  322,  Lab.  Investigations  IV,  V 
Elective  (3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 
Soc.    Sci.   or   Hum.,   dist.    req.    (6   hrs, 
1st  sem.,  3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 

Fourth  Year 

Ch  411,  412,  Adv.  Inorganic  Chem.  I, 

II 
Ch  413,  Adv.  Analytical  Chemistry 
Ch  414,  Adv.  Organic  Chemistry 
Ch  500,  Independent  Study  (both  sem.) 
Electives  (9  hrs.  1st  sem.  and  2nd  sem.] 


*Ger  113,  114  recommended 
*Ma  261  and  266  recommended 


96 


ECONOMICS  AND  BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

Advisers:  Dr.  Knight,  Mr.  Fletcher,  Dr.  Krebs,  Mr.  Stone,  Dr.  Tom 


First  Year 

Ac     151,     Principles     of    Financial 

Accounting 
Elective  (3-4  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 
CP  110,  Introduction  to  Timesharing 
BA  100,  Introduction  to  Business 
Ec  110/120,  Principles  of  Economics  I, 

II 
En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
For.   Lang    111,    112,   Interm.   Fr,   Ger, 

or  Sp  I,  II 
Ma  170,  Elementary  Statistics 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Distribution  req.  (3-4  hrs.  1st  sem.,  6-7 

hrs.  2nd  sem.) 
Ec  201,  Microeconomic  Analysis 
BA  180,  Principles  of  Management 
Ec  222,  Quantitative  Methods 
Ac,    Ec    or    BA    electives    (6    hrs.    2nd 

sem.]* 
Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.] 

Third  Year 

Distribution  req.  (6-7  hrs.  each  sem.] 
Ac,   Ec   or   BA   electives    (6   hrs.    each 

sem.]* 
Electives  (3  hrs.  each  sem.] 

Fourth  Year 

Ac  490  or  Ec  490  or  BA  490.  Sem.  & 
Special  Prob. 

Distribution  req.  3-4  hrs.  each  semes- 
ter 

Ac,  Ec  or  BA  electives  (6-9  hrs.  each 
sem.]* 

Electives  (3-6  hrs.  each  sem.] 

Economics: 

Ec  203,  Macroeconomic  Analysis 
Ec  301,  Labor  Economics  and 

Industrial  Relations 
Ec  312,  Money  &  Banking 
Ec  321,  Public  Finance 
Ec  332,  International  Economics 
Ec  401,  History  of  Economic 

Thought 


Ec  411,  Economic  Growth  and  De- 
velopment 

Business  Administration: 

BA  361,  Corporation  Finance 
BA  362,  Investments 
BA  371,  Business  Law  I 
BA  372,  Business  Law  II 
BA  382,  Marketing 

Accounting: 

Ac   152.   Principles  of  Managerial 
Accounting 

Ac    251/252.    Intermediate   Account- 
ing I,  II 

Ac  351,  Advanced  Accounting 

Ac  352  Government  and  Non-Profit 
Accounting 

Ac  452,  Income  Tax  Accounting 

Ac  454,  Advanced  Cost  and  Mana- 
gerial Accounting 

Ac  455,  Auditing 

For  students  who  are  interested  in 
■receiving  Pennsylvania  Teaching  Cer- 
tification in  Social  Studies,  the  follow- 
ing courses  are  required: 

Ec  110/120,  Prin.  of  Economics  I,  II 
Ec  201,  Microeconomic  Analysis 
Ec  222  Quantitative  Methods 
Ec  490,  Seminar  &  Special  Problems 
Ac  151,  Principles  of  Financial 

Accounting 
BA  100,  Introduction  to  Business 
BA  180,  Prin.  of  Management 
Ma  170,  Elementary  Statistics 

With  electives  chosen  from  among: 
Ec  203  Macroeconomic  Analysis 
Ec  301,  Labor  Economics  and 

Industrial  Relations 
Ec  312,  Money  &  Banking 
Ec  321,  Public  Finance 
Ec  332,  International  Economics 
Ec  401,  Hist,  of  Economic  Thought 
Ec  411,  Economic  Growth  and 

Development 
BA  371.  Business  Law  I 
BA  372,  Business  Law  II 


*Students   majoring   in  areas   designated 
should  schedule  courses  as  indicated: 


97 


ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Advisers:  Dr.  Ehersole,  Mrs.  Herr 

Program  for  majors  in  elementary  education. 

First  Year  Third  Year 

Ed   110,  Foundations  of  Education  EE  332,  Physical  Sci.  in  Elem.  Sch. 

(2nd  sem.)  EE  341,  Teaching  of  Reading 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  11  EE  344,  Health  &  Safety  Education 

For.  Lang.   Ill,   112,  Interm.   Fr,  Ger,  EE  361/362,  Communications  &  Group 

or  Sp  1,  11  Processes  I,  11 

Geo  111,  World  Geography  1  Ma   100,   Basic  Concepts   of  Math,   or 

Nat.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3-4  hrs.  each  sem.)  one  of  the  following:  102,  111,  112, 

Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.)  161,  or  162.  as  background  indicates. 

Psy  321,  Childhood  &  Development 
Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.)* 

Second  Year  Elective  (3  hrs.  either  sem.) 

EE  220,  Music  in  El.  Sch.  (2nd  sem.)  Fourth  Year 

EE  250,  Math,  for  El  Gr.  (either  sem.)  a     /.r^-i     a  ^  •     ^u    t-i           .        o  i       i 

EE  270,  Children's  Lit.  (either  sem.)  ^L  *P3„  ^^  '"  ''^^  Elementary  School 

Hi  111.  112.  125  or  126,  (3  hrs.  either  ll  A  °-.           "i*  Teaching   (1st  sem.) 

'                               '  ^  EE  444,  Senior  Semmar  (2nd  sem.) 

sem  I  '                              V.                 ^ 

Hum.  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  either  sem.)  """;■.■  '^'f,  '''^-  (t^*^""'-  2"'^  '"'"■'>' 


Psy  110,  General  Psychology  (1st  sem. 


Electives  (6-9  hrs.  2nd  sem. 


Psy  220,  Educational  Psych.  (2nd  sem.)       ^Education  342  is  also  required  and  may  be 
Electives    (3-6    hrs.    1st   sem.    6-9   hrs.       taken  the  second  semester  of  either  the  third 
2nd  sem.)  or  fourth  year. 


COOPERATIVE  ENGINEERING  PROGRAM 

Adviser;  Dr.  Rhodes 

Lebanon  Valley  College  offers  a  cooperative  program  in  engineering  v^hereby 
a  student  may  earn  a  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  from  Lebanon  Valley  College  and 
a  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  in  one  of  the  fields  of  engineering  from  the  University 
of  Pennsylvania  or  other  cooperating  institution. 

Students  who  pursue  this  cooperative  engineering  program  take  three  years  of 
work  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  in  the  liberal  arts  and  also  in  the  mathematics  and 
physics  courses  prerequisite  for  engineering.  Then,  if  recommended  by  Lebanon 
Valley  College,  they  may  attend  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  or  other  cooperat- 
ing institution  for  two  additional  years  of  work  in  engineering.  After  the 
satisfactory  completion  of  the  fourth  year  of  the  program  the  student  is  granted  the 
Bachelor  of  Science  degree  by  Lebanon  Valley  College.  At  the  completion  of  the 
fifth  year  the  University  grants  the  appropriate  engineering  degree. 

The  College  also  participates  in  a  4-1  program  in  engineering  with  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania.  In  this  program  the  student  completes  his  four-year 
baccalaureate  program  at  Lebanon  Valley  College  and  then  moves  into  an 
engineering  curriculum  at  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  which  leads  to  the 
Master  of  Science  degree  in  a  field  of  engineering. 

At  the  University  of  Pennsylvania  the  student  may  select  from  among  eight 
different  curricula — bioengineering,  chemical  engineering,  civil  and  urban  en- 
gineering, computer  science  and  engineering,  electrical  engineering  and  science, 
mechanical  engineering  and  applied  mechanics,  metallurgy  and  materials  science, 
or  systems  science  and  engineering.  A  typical  program  for  the  first  three  years  of 
the  cooperative  engineering  program  is  given  below,  but  each  student's  program 
is  planned  to  meet  his  particular  needs. 

98 


First  Year 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
For.  Lang.,  gen  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Ma  161,  162.  Calculus  I,  II 
Phy   111,   112,  Principles  of  Physics 

I,  II 
Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Elective  (3  hrs.  1st  sem.) 

Humanities,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Ma  242,  Intro,  to  Computer  Science 

Ma  261,  Calculus  III 

Ma  266,  Differential  Equations 

Phy  211,  Atomic  &  Nuclear  Physics 


Phy  212,  Introduction  to  Electronics 
Social  Science,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each 
sem.] 


Third  Year 

Ch  111,  112,  Principles  of  Chemistry 
I,  II 

Humanities,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.) 

Ma  361,  362,  Methods  of  Applied 
Math.  I,  II 

Phy   311,   312,   Analytical   Mechanics, 

I,  II 

Phy  321,  322,  Electricity  and  Mag- 
netism, I,  II 

Social  Science,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.) 


COOPERATIVE  FORESTRY 
PROGRAM 

Adviser:  Dr.  WiUiQms 

Students  completing  a  three  year 
program  at  Lebanon  Valley  College 
studying  the  liberal  arts  and  the  sci- 
ences basic  to  forestry  may  apply  for 
admission  to  the  cooperative  forestry 
program  with  Duke  University.  Upon 
completion  of  the  first  year  of  the  two 
year  (plus  one  summer)  program  at 
Duke  University,  the  student  will  re- 
ceive the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree 
from  Lebanon  Valley  College.  After 
completion  of  the  program  at  Duke  the 
student  will  receive  the  professional 
degree  of  Master  of  Forestry  from  Duke 
University.  This  program  enables  stu- 
dents to  attain  the  Master  of  Forestry 
degree  of  Mastery  of  Forestry  (M.F.)  or 
Master  of  Environmental  Management 
(M.E.M.)  from  Duke  University.  This 
program  enables  students  to  attain  the 
M.F.  or  M.E.M.  degree  in  a  total  of  five 
years  and  one  summer. 


Students  with  biology,  economics, 
mathematics  or  political  science  majors 
at  L.V.C.  who  take  the  appropriate  core 
courses  in  the  forestry  and  environ- 
mental studies  program  qualify  to 
apply  to  Duke  for  the  three-two  pro- 
gram. Specific  curricula  in  each  major 
are  available  in  the  Admission's  Office 
and  from  the  Forestry  Adviser.  Duke 
School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental 
Studies  also  encourages  applications 
from  qualified  students  in  any  major 
who  have  taken  appropriate  courses 
and  who  have  strong  backgrounds  in 
political  science,  business,  economics, 
mathematics-actuarial  science  and  the 
biological  or  physical  sciences.  Stu- 
dents with  strong  backgrounds  in  quan- 
titative disciplines  are  particularly 
sought  after.  Students  may  also  apply 
for  the  Duke  program  after  completing 
four  years  at  L.V.C.  For  more  informa- 
tion see  the  Forestry  Adviser. 


MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY 

Adviser:  Dr.  Pollack 

The  medical  technology  student 
takes  three  years  of  courses  at  Lebanon 
Valley  College  in  order  to  fulfill  the 
requirements  of  the  college  and  of  the 
Board  of  Schools  of  the  American  Soci- 
ety of  Clinical  Pathologists.  Preceding 
or  during  the  third  year  of  the  program 
it  is  the  student's  responsibility  to  gain 
admission  to  a  hospital  with  an  Ameri- 
can Medical  Association-approved 
school  of  medical  technology,  where  he 
spends  the  fourth  year  in  training. 
Lebanon  Valley  College  is  affiliated 
with  the  following  hospitals:  Abington, 
Allentown  Sacred  Heart,  Harrisburg, 
Harrisburg  Polyclinic,  Lancaster  Gen- 
eral and  Reading.  This  program  leads  to 
the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Medical  Technology  from  Lebanon  Val- 
ley. 

First  Year 

Bi  111/112,  General  Biology  I,  II 
Ch  111,  112,  Principles  of  Chem.  I,  II 
En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
Ma  102  or  161,  Algebra  &  Trig,  or  Cal- 
culus I 


Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.) 

PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Bi  201,  Genetics 

Bi  202,  Animal  Physiology 

Ch  213,  214  Organic  Chem.  I,  II 

Ch  218,  Lab.  Investigations  I 

For.   Lang.   Ill,   112,  Interm.   Fr,  Ger, 

or  Sp  I.  II 
Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.) 
Soc.  Sci.  or  Hum.,  dist.  req.  (3  or  6  hrs. 

1st  sem.,  3  or  6  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 


Third  Year 

Bi  elective  (4  hrs.  1st  sem.)* 
Bi  306,  Microbiology 
Elective  (3  hrs.  either  sem.)** 
Phy  103.  104,  Gen.  Coll.  Physics  I,  II 
Soc.    Sci.   or   Hum.,    dist.   req.    (9   hrs. 
either  sem.) 


'Bi  304,  305  or  401  recommended. 
Ma  170  recommended. 


100 


MUSIC 

Adviser:  Mr.  Fairlamh 
First  Year 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
For.   Lang.   Ill,   112,  Interm.   Fr,  Ger, 

or  Sp  I,  II 
Mu  111,  112,  Sight  Singing  I,  II 
Mu  113,  114,  Ear  Training  I,  II 
Mu  115,  116,  Harmony  I,  II 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
Nat.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3-4  hrs.  each  sem.) 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Electives   (3   hrs.   1st  sem.,   1   hr.   2nd 

sem.] 
Mu  215,  Harmony  III 
Mu   217,   Basic   Concepts   Structure  & 

Style 
Mu  224,  Counterpoint 
Mu  226,  Form  &  Analysis  I 
Mu  246,  Prin.  of  Conducting 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 


Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Third  Year 

Electives  (5  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 

Hum.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Mu  315,  Elementary  Composition 

Mu  316,  Keyboard  Harmony 

Mu  329,  Form  &  Analysis  II 

Mu  341/342,  History  and  Lit.  of  Music 

I,  II 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
So.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  1st  sem.) 

Fourth  Year 

Electives  [7  hrs.  1st  sem.,  11  hrs.  2nd 

sem.) 
Art  110,  Intro,  to  Art  [hum.  dist.  req.) 
Mu  462,  Music  Lit.  Seminar 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
Nat.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  [3  hrs.  1st  sem.) 


*Study  of  voice,  organ,  piano,  and  band  and 
orchestral  instruments. 


SACRED  MUSIC 

Adviser:  Dr.  Getz 
First  Year 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 
For.  Lang.  Ill,  112,  Interm.  Fr,  Ger,  or 

Sp  I,  II 
Mu  111,  112,  Sight  Singing  I,  II 
Mu  113,  114,  Ear  Training  I,  II 
Mu  115,  116,  Harmony  I,  II 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs  each  sem.)* 
Nat.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  [3-4  hrs.  each  sem.) 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 

Second  Year 

Mu  132,  Diction  for  Singers 

Mu  215,  Harmony  III 

Mu  217,  Basic  Concepts  Structure  & 

Style 
Mu  224,  Counterpoint 
Mu  226,  Form  &  Analysis  I 
Mu  246,  Prin.  of  Conducting 
Mu,  applied  music  [2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
Psy  110,  Gen  Psych.  [1st  sem.) 


Religion,  gen.  req.  [3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  [3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Third  Year 

Electives  (2  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Hum.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Mu  315,  Elementary  Composition 

Mu  316,  Keyboard  Harmony 

Mu  321,  Hymnology 

Mu  322,  Sacred  Choral  Lit. 

Mu  341/342,  History  and  Lit.  of  Music 

I,  II 
Mu  347,  Choral  Conducting 
Mu,  applied  music  [2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 

Fourth  Year 

Electives  [8  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Hum.,  dist.  req.  [3  hrs.  1st  sem.) 

Mu421,  Liturgy 

Mu  422,  Church  Music  Meth.  &  Admin. 

Mu,  applied  music  [2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 

Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  [3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 


'Study  of  voice,  organ,  and  piano. 


102 


MUSIC  EDUCATION 

Adviser:  Mr.  Smith 

Variances  by  track  systems  are  iden- 
tified as: 

(a)  General  track 

(b)  Instrumental  track 

(c)  Keyboard-Vocal  track 

First  Year 

Bi  101/102,  Intro,  to  Biology  I,  II 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II 

For.   Lang.   Ill,   112,   Interm.   Fr,  Ger, 

Ru,  or  Sp 
Mu  111,  112,  Sight  Singing  I,  II 
Mu  113.  114,  Ear  Taining,  I,  II 
Mu  115,  116,  Harmony  I.  II 
Mu  123,  Brass  I 

Mu,  applied  music  [2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
PE  110/110,  Physical  Education 
(a-b)   Mu  124,  Brass  II 
(c)       Mu  132,  Diction  for  Singers 

Second  Year 

Ed   110,  Social  Foundation  of  Educa- 
tion (2nd  sem.] 
Mu  215,  Harmony  III 
Mu  217,  Basic  Concepts  of  Structure  & 

Style 
Mu  226,  Form  &  Analysis  I 
Mu  227,  Percussion  I 
Mu  231.  232,  Woodwind  I,  II 
Mu  246,  Principles  of  Conducting 
Mu.  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
Psy  110,  General  Psychology  (1st  sem.) 
Religion,  gen.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 

Third  Year 

Hum.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  each  sem.) 
Mu  316.  Keyboard  Harmony 


Mu    334,    Meth.    &    Mat.    Gen.    Music: 

Junior  High  School 
Mu   335,   Meth.   &   Mat.   Instrumental: 

Gr.  4-6 
Mu  337,  String  I 
Mu  341/342,  History  and  Lit.  of  Music 

I,  II 
Mu,  applied  music  (2  hrs.  each  sem.)* 
(a-b)   Mu  328,  Percussion  II 

Mu   336,   Meth.  &  Mat.   Instru- 
mental: ]r.-Sr.  High 
Mu  338,  String  II 
(a-c)   Mu  333,  Meth.  &  Mat.  Gen.  Mu- 
sic: Elementary 

(b)  Elective  (3  hrs.  1st  sem.) 

Mu   345,   Instrumental   Conduct- 
ing 

(c)  Elective  (3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 
Mu  347,  Choral  Conducting 

(a)  Mu  345  or  Mu  347 

Fourth  Year 

Elective  (3-6  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 

Hum.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 

Mu  441,  Student  Teaching 

Mu,  applied  music  (1   or  2  hrs.  each 

sem.)*t 
Psy  220,  Educational  Psych.  (2nd  sem.) 
Soc.  Sci.,  dist.  req.  (3  hrs.  2nd  sem.) 
(a-b)  Mu  416.  Orchestration 

(b)  Mu  402,  Sem.  in  Adv.  Instrmntl. 

Prob. 

(c)  Mu  404,  Mu.  Ed.  Sem.:  Secondary 

Level 
(a)       Mu  402  or  Mu  404 


and   band 


*Study   of  voice,   organ,   piano, 

and  orchestral  instruments. 

tPrivate  study  during  the  student  teaching 

semester  is  at  the  discretion  of  the  student. 


103 


NURSING 

Adviser:  Dr.  Wolf 

The  nursing  program  consists  of  the  two  or  three  year  program  of  an 
accredited  hospital  school  of  nursing  and  a  two-year  program  in  liberal  arts  at 
Lebanon  Valley  College.  The  two  phases  of  the  course  may  be  taken  in  either 
order.  Completion  of  the  program  and  receipt  of  the  R.N.  (registered  nursing) 
Certificate  will  result  in  the  awarding  of  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  by 
Lebanon  Valley  College. 

To  the  individuals  who  have  earned  an  R.N.  diploma  from  an  accredited 
hospital,  Lebanon  Valley  College  will  allow  a  total  of  56  credits.  A  suggested 
program  for  full-time  regular  students  is  shown  below: 

First  Year  Second  Year 

Bi  101/102,  or  Bi  111/112  Bi  453/454 

En  111/112,  English  Composition  I,  II  General  Requirements  (9  hrs) 

Foreign  Language  Electives^  (21  hrs.) 


PE  110/110,  Physical  Education!  tt- .     ,  .,  ,    ,     ,,      .u    t.  xt  r^    .-f 

^.1        ^  1  f)         •  X  Not  required  it  student  has  the  R.N.  Certifi- 

Otner  General  Requirements  .      ^ 

(6  hrs.  each  sem.)  2ch  m  (or  Ch  101  or  102)  and  Ma  170  are 


cate. 
^Ch  1 
strongly  recommended. 


TEACHING 

Advisers;  Dr.  Ehersole,  Dr.  AJbrecht,  iMrs.  Herr,  Dr.  Jacques,  Dr.  Eva  Knight 

The  requirements  listed  below  are  applicable  to  students  desiring  to  be 
certified  to  teach  in  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 


BASIC  REGULATIONS— PENNSYLVANIA 
INSTRUCTIONAL  I  CERTIFICATE 

A.  General  Education 

Certificates  are  based  on  the  completion  of  a  minimum  of  sixty  (60)  semester 
hours  of  acceptable  courses  in  general  education  with  not  less  than  twelve  (12) 
semester  hours  in  the  humanities  and  not  less  than  nine  (9)  semester  hours  in  each 
of  the  following  areas:  the  social  sciences  and  natural  sciences. 

These  requirements  apply  to  both  elementary  and  secondary  fields. 

B.  Elementary  Education — Subject  Matter  Requirements 

The  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  certificate  may  be  issued  to  those  who  have 
completed  the  approved  program. 

The  prospective  elementary  education  teacher  is  also  required  to  have  an 
academic  major  or  an  area  of  concentration  of  at  least  18  to  24  semester  hours. 

The  area  of  a  concentration  may  be  defined  as  follows: 

Study  in  a  single  subject  such  as  history;  study  in  a  broad  field  such  as 
sociology,  psychology,  and  anthropology  elected  from  social  science;  study  in  an 
interdisciplinary  field  such  as  courses  elected  from  the  humanities,  social  science, 
or  the  natural  sciences. 

C.  Professional  Education  for  Secondary  Teacher  Certification 

Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  certificates  are  based  on  the  completion  of  the 
approved  program  in  the  subject  field  to  be  taught  in  the  secondary  school  and  a 
minimum  of  eighteen  (18)  semester  hours  of  professional  education  distributed  in 
the  following  areas:  social  foundations  of  education,  human  growth  and  develop- 

104 


ment,  materials  and  methods  of  instruction  and  curriculum,  and  nine  (9)  semester 
hours  in  actual  practicum  and  student  teaching  experience  under  approved 
supervision  and  appropriate  seminars  including  necessary  observation,  participa- 
tion and  conferences  on  teaching  problems.  The  areas  of  methods  and  materials  of 
instruction  and  curriculum,  and  student  teaching  shall  relate  to  the  subject  matter 
specialization  field  or  fields. 

D.  Secondary  Student  Teaching  Program 

A  student  concentrating  in  a  major  area  of  interest  may,  upon  the  direction  of 
his  adviser  and  approval  of  the  dean  of  the  college,  enroll  in  his  senior  year 
in  the  Semester  of  Professional  Training,  as  follows: 

Ed.  420.  Human  Growth  and  Development.  3:7V2:0.  See  page  54  for  course, 
description. 

Ed.  430.  Practicum  and  Methods.  3:7V2:0.  See  page  54  for  course  description. 
Some   time   is   devoted   to   the   presentation   of  data   on   basic   reading 
instruction  to   fulfill   certification   requirements   for  the   Commonwealth   of 
Pennsylvania. 

Ed.  440.  Student  Teaching. 

Nine  semester  hours  credit. 

The  student  enters  on  a  full-time  student  teaching  experience  of  one 
semester.  He  is  under  the  direction  of  a  trained  teacher  in  an  accredited  sec- 
ondary school  and  is  counseled  and  directed  by  the  college  director  of  second- 
ary student  teaching.  The  student  teacher  also  is  observed  by  his  major  adviser. 

Prerequisites  for  Student  Teaching;  A  student  must  have: 

a.  Maintained  a  2.0  grade-point  average  in  his  major  field, 

b.  Completed  the  basic  courses  of  Education  110,  420,  and  430,  and 

c.  Secured  written  approval  of  his  major  adviser,  the  director  of  secondary 
student  teaching,  and  the  dean  of  the  college  in  order  to  be  accepted  for  student 
teaching  in  the  professional  semester  of  his  senior  year. 

Upon  completion  of  the  appropriate  approved  program  and  graduation,  the 
student  receives  the  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  certificate. 

A  student  may  also  return  to  the  College  following  graduation  to  complete  an 
approved  program  of  teacher  certification. 


105 


DIRECTORIES 


FACULTY  AND 
ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF, 
1979-1980 

Faculty: 

FREDERICK  P.  SAMPLE,  1968—; 

President. 
CARL  Y.  EHRHART,  1947—; 

Dean  of  the  College. 
WILLIAM  H.  FAIRLAMB,  1947—; 

Secretary  of  the  Faculty. 
FRANK  E.  STACHOW,  1946—; 

College  Marshal. 

Emeriti: 

JAMES  O.  BEAMESDERFER,  1959-1976; 
Chaplain  Emeritus. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1936; 
M.Div.,  United  Theological  Semi- 
nary, 1939;  S.T.M.,  Lutheran 
Theological  Seminary,  Phila.,  1945; 
S.T.D.,  Temple  University,  1951. 

RUTH  ENGLE  BENDER,   1918-1922; 
1924-1970; 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Music  Educa- 
tion. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1915; 
Oberlin  Conservatory;  graduate  New 
England  Conservatory. 

O.  PASS  BOLLINCER,  1950-1973; 
Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biol- 
ogy. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1928; 
M.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1937. 

D.  CLARK  CARMEAN,  1933-1972; 
Director  Emeritus  of  Admissions. 
A.B.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University, 
1926;   M.A.,  Columbia  University, 
1932. 

HILDA  M.  DAMUS,  1963-1976; 
Professor  Emeritus  of  German. 
M.A,,  University  of  Berlin  and  Jena, 
1932;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Berlin, 
1945. 

GLADYS    M.    FENCIL,     1921-1927; 
1929-1965. 
Registrar  Emeritus. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1921. 


DONALD     E.     FIELDS,     1928-1930; 
1947-1970; 
Librarian  Emeritus. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1924 
M.S.,  Princeton  University,   1928 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago,  1935 
A.B.  in  Library  Science,  University  of 
Michigan,  1947. 

SAMUEL  O.  GRIMM,  1912-1970; 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics. 
B.Pd.,  State  Normal  School,  Mil- 
lersville,  1910;  A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley 
College,   1912;   A.M.,   1918;   Sc.D., 
1942. 

THOMAS  A.  LANESE,  1954-1978; 
Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of 
Strings,  Conducting,  and  Theory. 
B.Mus.,  Baldwin-Wallace  College, 
1938;  Fellowship,  Juilliard  Graduate 
School;  M.Mus.,  Manhattan  School 
of  Music,  1952. 

SARA  ELIZABETH  PIEL,  Jan.   1960- 
1975; 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Languages. 
A.B.,  Chatham  College,  1928;  M.A., 
University  of  Pittsburgh,  1929;  Ph.D., 
1938. 

ALVIN   H.    M.    STONECIPHER,    1932- 
1958; 

Professor  Emeritus  of  Latin  Language 
and  Literature;  Dean  Emeritus. 
A.B.,  Vanderbilt  University.  1913; 
A.M.,   1914;   Ph.D.,   1917;   Litt.D., 
Lebanon  Valley  College,  1962. 

GEORGE  G.  STRUBLE,  1931-1970; 
Professor  Emeritus  of  English. 
B.S.    in   Ed.,    University   of  Kansas, 
1922;  M.S.  in  Ed.,  1925;  Ph.D.,  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin,  1931. 

JAMES  M.  THURMOND,  1954-1979; 
Professor  Emeritus  of  Music  Educa- 
tion and  Brass. 

Diploma,  Curtis  Institute  of  Music, 
1931;  A.B.,  American  University, 
1951;  M.A.,  Catholic  University, 
1952;  Mus.D.,  Washington  College  of 
Music,  1944. 


107 


Professors: 

GEORGE  D.  CURFMAN,  1961—; 

Professor  of  Music  Education. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1953. 

M.M.,  University  of  Michigan,  1957; 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1971. 
ROBERT  S.  DAVIDON,  1970—; 

Professor  of  Psychology;  Chairman  of 

the  Department  of  Psychology. 

A.B.,  University  of  Illinois,   1940; 

M.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

1946;  Ph.D.,  1951. 
CLOYD  H.  EBERSOLE,  1953—; 

Professor  of  Education;  Chairman  of 

the  Department  of  Education. 

A.B.,  Juniata  College,   1933;   M.Ed., 

The  Pennsylvania  State  University, 

1941;  D.Ed.,  1954. 
ALEX  J.  FEHR,  1951—; 

Professor  of  Political  Science. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1950; 

M.A.,  Columbia  University,   1957; 

Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University,  1968. 
ARTHUR  L.  FORD,  1965—; 

Professor  of  English;  Chairman  of  the 

Department  of  English. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1959; 

M.A.,  Bov^ling  Green  State  Univer- 
sity, 1960;  Ph.D.,  1964. 
ELIZABETH  M.  GEFFEN,  1958—; 

Professor  of  History;  Chairman  of  the 

Department  of  History  and  Political 

Science. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  University  of  Pennsylva- 
nia, 1934;  M.A.,  1936;  Ph.D.,  1958. 
*PIERCE  A.  GETZ,  1959—; 

Professor  of  Organ 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1951; 

M.S.M.,   Union  Theology   Seminary 

School    of    Sacred    Music,    1953; 

A.M.D.,  Eastman  School  of  Music, 

1967. 
DAVID  I.  LASKY,  1974—; 

Professor  of  Psychology 

A.B.,  Temple  University,  1956;  M.A., 

1958;  Ph.D.,  1961. 
KARL  L.  LOCKWOOD,  1959—; 

Professor  of  Chemistry. 

B.S.,   Muhlenberg  College,   1951; 

Ph.D.,  Cornell  University,  1955. 


'Sabbatical  leave,  full  year. 


JEAN  O.  LOVE,  1954—; 
Professor  of  Psychology. 
A.B.,   Erskine   College,    1941;   M.A., 
Winthrop  College,  1949;  Ph.D.,  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina,  1953. 

JOERG  W.  P.  MAYER,  1970—; 

Professor  of  Mathematics;  Chairman 

of  the  Department  of  Mathematical 

Sciences 

Dipl.   Math.,  University  of  Giessen, 

1953;  Ph.D.,  1954. 

HOWARD  A.  NEIDIG,  1948—; 

Professor  of  Chemistry;  Chairman  of 
the  Department  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943; 
M.S.,  University  of  Delav^^are,  1946; 
Ph.D.,  1948. 

AGNES  B.  O'DONNELL,  1961—; 
Professor  of  English. 
A.B.,   Immaculata  College,   1948; 
M.Ed.,  Temple  University,   1952; 
M.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
1967;  Ph.D.,  1976. 

JACOB  L.  RHODES,  1957—; 

Professor  of  Physics,  Chairman  of  the 

Department  of  Physics. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

1958. 

JAMES  N.  SPENCER,  1967—; 
Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,   Marshall   University,   1963; 
Ph.D.,  low^a  State  University,  1967. 

C.  F.  JOSEPH  TOM,  1954—; 

Professor  of  Economics  and  Business 

Administration. 

B.A.,  Hastings  College,  1944;  M.A., 

University  of  Chicago,  1947;  Ph.D., 

1963. 

PERRY  J.  TROUTMAN,  I960—; 
Professor  of  Religion. 
B.A.,    Houghton    College,     1949; 
M.Div.,  United  Theological  Semi- 
nary, 1952;  Ph.D.,  Boston  University, 
1964. 

L.  ELBERT  WETHINGTON,  1963—; 
Professor  of  Religion,  Chairman  of 
the  Department  of  Religion. 
B.A.,  Wake  Forest  University,  1944; 
B.D.,  Divinity  School  of  Duke  Uni- 
versity, 1947;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University, 
1949. 


108 


R.  GORDON  WISE,  1973—; 

Adjunct  Professor  of  Art. 

B.S.,   University   of  Missouri,   1960; 

M.A.,  Roosevelt  University,   1964; 

Ed.D.,  University  of  Missouri,  1970. 
PAUL  L.  WOLF,  1966—; 

Professor  of  Biology;  Chairman  of  the 

Department  of  Biology. 

B.S.,  Elizabethtown  College,   1960; 

M.S.,  University  of  Delaware,  1963; 

Ph.D.,  1968. 


ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS: 

DAVID  N.  BAILEY,  1971—; 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.S.,  Juniata  College,   1963;  Ph.D., 
Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technol- 
ogy, 1968. 

PHILIP  A.  BILLINCS,  1970—; 
Associate  Professor  of  English. 
B.A.,  Heidelberg  College,  1965;  M.A., 
Michigan   State  University,   1967; 
Ph.D.,  1974. 

DONALD  E.  BYRNE,  JR.,  1971—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Religion. 
B.A.,  St.  Paul  Seminary,  1963;  M.A., 
Marquette  University,   1966;  Ph.D., 
Duke  University,  1972. 

VOORHIS  C.  CANTRELL.  1968—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Beligion  and 
Greek. 

B.A.,  Oklahoma  City  University, 
1952;  B.D.,  Southern  Methodist  Uni- 
versity, 1956;  Ph.D.,  Boston  Univer- 
sity, 1967. 

WILLIAM  H.  FAIRLAMB,  1947—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Piano  and 
Music  History. 

Mus.B.,  cum  laude,  Philadelphia 
Conservatory.  1949. 

WILLIAM  M.  FLEISCHMAN,  1973—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 
B.A.,  Lehigh  University,  1959;  M.S., 
1964;  Ph.D.,  1967. 

G.     THOMAS     GATES,     1963-1970; 
1976—; 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Busi- 
ness Law. 

A.B.,  Brow^n  University,  1945;  J.D.. 
Boston  University,  1949. 


BRYAN  V.  HEARSEY,  1971—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 
B.A.,  Western  Washington  State  Col- 
lege, 1964;  M.A.,  Washington  State 
University,  1966;  Ph.D.,  1968. 

JUNE  EBY  HERR,  1959—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Elementary 
Education. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1943; 
M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Uni- 
versity, 1954. 

RICHARD  A.  ISKOWITZ,  1969—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Art;  Chairman 
of  the  Department  of  Art. 
B.F.A.,  Kent  State  University,  1965; 
M.F.A.,  1967. 

JOHN  P.  KEARNEY,  1971—; 
Associate  Professor  of  English. 
B.A.,    St.    Benedict's   College,    1962; 
M.A.,  University  of  Michigan,  1963; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin,  1968. 

ROYAL  E.  KNIGHT,  1975—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Economics 
and  Business  Administration; 
Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Eco- 
nomics and  Business  Administra- 
tion. 

B.S.,  Eastern  Illinois  University, 
1955;  M.S.,  1970;  Ed.D.,  University  of 
Northern  Colorado,  1976. 

ROBERT  C.  LAU,  1968—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Music;  Chair- 
man of  the  Department  of  Music. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1965; 
M.A.,  Eastman  School  of  Music, 
1970;  Ph.D.,  Catholic  University, 
1979. 

JOHN  D.  NORTON,  1971—; 

Associate  Professor  of  Political  Sci- 
ence. 

B.A..  University  of  Illinois,  1965; 
M.A.,  Florida  State  University,  1967; 
Ph.D.,  American  University,  1973. 

J.  ROBERT  O'DONNELL,  1959—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Physics. 
B.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Univer- 
sity, 1950;  M.S.,  University  of  Dela- 
ware, 1953. 

GERALD  J.  PETROFES,  1963—; 

Associate  Professor  of  Physical  Edu- 
cation; Chairman  of  the  Department 
of  Physical  Education. 
B.S.,  Kent  State  University,   1958; 
M.Ed.,  1962. 


109 


O.  KENT  REED,  1971—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Physical  Edu- 
cation. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Otterbein  College,  1956; 
M.A.  in  Ed.,  Eastern  Kentucky  Uni- 
versity, 1970. 

VERNAL  E.  RICHARDSON,  1978—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Strings,  Con- 
ducting and  Theory. 
B.M.  and  B.M.E.,  Indiana  University, 
1955;  M.M.,  1963;  D.M.A.,  Catholic 
University,  1977. 

JAMES  W.  SCOTT,  1976—; 
Associate  Professor  of  German. 
B.A.,   Juniata   College,    1965;   Ph.D., 
Princeton  University,  1971. 

ROBERT  W.  SMITH,  1951—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Music  Educa- 
tion. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1939; 
M.A.,  Columbia  University,  1950. 

FRANK  E.  STACHOW,  1946—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Theory  and 
Woodwinds. 

Diploma,  Clarinet,  Juilliard  School  of 
Music;  B.S.,  Columbia  University, 
1943;  M.A.,  1946. 

DENNIS  W.  SWEIGART,  1972—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Piano. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1963; 
M.M.,  University  of  Michigan,  1965; 
D.M.  A.,  University  of  lov^a,  1977. 

WARREN  K.  A.  THOMPSON,  1967—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy; 
Chairman  of  the  Department  of  Phi- 
losophy. 

A.B.,  Trinity  University,  1957;  M.A., 
University  of  Texas,  1963. 

EDWIN  H.  WELCH,  1975—; 
Adjunct    Associate    Professor    of 
Sociology;  Acting  Chairman  of  the 
Department  of  Sociology  and  Social 
Service. 

A.B.,  Western  Maryland  College, 
1965;  S.T.B.,  Boston  University 
School  of  Theology,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Bos- 
ton University,  1971. 

ALLAN  F.  WOLFE,  1968—; 
Associate  Professor  of  Biology. 
B.A.,  Gettysburg  College,  1963;  M.A., 
Drake  University,  1965;  Ph.D..  Uni- 
versity of  Vermont,  1968. 


GLENN  H.  WOODS,  1965—; 
Associate  Professor  of  English. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1951; 
M.Ed.,  Temple  University,  1962. 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS: 

ANGELA  M.  AGUIRRE,  1979—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Spanish. 

B.A.,  The  City  College  of  New  York, 

1970;  M.A.,  Queens  College  of  New 

York,  1974;  M.  Phil.,  City  University 

of  New  York,  1979. 
MADELYN  J.  ALBRECHT,  1973—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education. 

B.A.,  Northern  Baptist  College,  1952; 

M.A.,  Michigan  State  University, 

1958;  Ph.D.,  1972. 
TIMOTHY  E.  ALBRECHT,  1978—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Music. 

B.A.,   Oberlin  College,   1973;   B.M. 

1973;    M.M.,    Eastman    School    of 

Music,  1975;  D.M. A.,  1978. 
STEVEN  A.  ANOLIK,  1979—; 

Adjunct    Assistant    Professor    of 

Psychology. 

B.A.,   University  of  Connecticut, 

1973;    M.A.,    Queens    College    of 

CUNY;  1975;  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  Uni- 
versity, 1978. 
NANCY  H.  BAXTER,  1979—; 

Adjunct    Assistant    Professor    of 

Mathematics. 

B.A.,  Douglas  College,  1968;  Ph.D., 

Rutgers  University,  1978. 
RICHARD  C.  BELL,  1966—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry. 

B.S.  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1941; 

M.Ed.,  Temple  University,  1955. 
JERE  S.  BERGER,  1977—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  English. 

B.A.,  Oberlin  College,  1953;  S.T.B., 

Episcopal  Theological  School,  1956; 

S.T.M.,  Union  Theological  Seminary, 

1965;  M.F.A.,  Carnegie-Mellon  Uni- 
versity, 1969;  Ph.D.,  1973. 
FAY  B.  BURRAS,  1964—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1960; 

M.A.,  Smith  College,  1961. 


110 


RONALD  G.  BURRICHTER,  1968-1971; 
1973—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Music. 
B.M.E..   Wartburg   College,    1964; 
M.M..    Peabody    Conservatory    of 
Music,  1968. 

*ROGER  D.  CARLSON,  1972—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology. 
A.B.,  Sacramento  State  College,  1968; 
M.A.,  1969;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Ore- 
gon, 1972. 

ERWIN  P.  CHANDLER.  1978—; 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Brass. 
B.S.,  Ithaca  College,  1966;  M.M.,  In- 
diana University,  1971. 

ROBERT  A.  CLAY,  1978—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Sociology. 
A.B.,  St.  Mary's  Seminary  and  Uni- 
versity, 1962;  S.T.B.,  Pontifical  Gre- 
gorian University,  1964;  M.A.,  Cor- 
nell University,  1974. 

VIRGINIA  E.  ENGLEBRIGHT,  1971—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Voice. 
B.M.E.,  Florida  State  University, 
1969;  M.M.,  1970. 

CHARLES  E.  FLETCHER,  1977—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Accounting 
and  Business  Administration. 
B.S.,   University   of  Alabama,   1955; 
M.A..  New  Mexico  Highlands  Uni- 
versity, 1966. 

LEONARD  S.  GEISSEL,  JR.,  1970—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Music  Educa- 
tion and  Brass. 

B.A.,  University  of  Delaw^are,  1957; 
M.A.,  University  of  Iowa,  1971. 

CORINNE  JOY  GUERRETTE,  1979—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  German. 
B.A.,  University  of  California  at 
Berkeley,  1971;  M.A.,  1975. 

CAROLYN  R.  HANES,  1977—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Sociology. 
B.A.,   Central   Michigan   University, 
1969;    M.A.,    University    of    New 
Hampshire,  1973;  Ph.D.,  1976. 

JOHN  H.  HEFFNER,  1972—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1968; 
A.M.,  Boston  University,  1971;  Ph.D., 
1976. 


'Sabbatical  leave,  full  year. 


DIANE  M.  IGLESIAS,  1976—; 

Assistant    Professor    of   Spanish; 

Chairman    of  the   Department   of 

Foreign  Languages. 

B.A.,   Queens   College,    1971;   M.A., 

1974;  Ph.D.,  1979. 
L.  EUGENE  JACQUES,  1975—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Education. 

B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh,  1937; 

M.Ed.,  1941;  D.Ed.,  1952. 
RICHARD  A.  JOYCE,  1966—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  History. 

A.B.,   Yale   University,    1952;   M.A., 

San  Francisco  State  College,  1963. 
RICHARD  N.  W.  KIRBY,   1972-1973; 

1974—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  English. 

B.A.,  University  of  Leicester,  1966; 

M.A.,  1967;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Sus- 
sex, 1972. 
EVA  GOFF  KNIGHT,  1975—; 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Edu- 
cation. 

B.A.,  Goucher  College,   1955;  M.A., 

Columbia  University,  1963;  C.A.S.E., 

Johns  Hopkins  University,   1964; 

Ed.D.,  Columbia  University,  1968. 

NEVELYN  J.   KNISLEY,   1954-1958; 
1963;  1970—; 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Piano. 
Mus.B.,  Oberlin  Conservatory  of 
Music,  1951;  M.F.A.,  Ohio  Univer- 
sity, 1953. 

EDWARD  H.  KREBS,  1976—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Economics  and 
Business  Administration. 
B.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  Univer- 
sity. 1965;  M.S.,  University  of  Mas- 
sachusetts, 1965;  Ph.D.,  Michigan 
State  University,  1970. 

LEON  E.  MARKOVVICZ,  1971—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  English. 
A.B.,  Duquesne  University,   1964; 
M.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
1968;  Ph.D.,  1972. 

OWEN  A.  MOE,  JR.,  1973—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
B.A.,  St.  Olaf's  College,  1966;  Ph.D., 
Purdue  University,  1971. 

PHILIP  G.  MORGAN,  1969—; 
Assistant  Professor  of  Voice. 
B.M.E.,  Kansas  State  College,  1962; 
M.S.,  1965. 


Ill 


SIDNEY  POLLACK,  1976—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.A.,  New  York  University,   1963; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

1970. 
HOWARD  L.  RAITEN,  1979—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Sociology. 

B.S.,  City  University  of  New  York, 

1965;  M.S.W.,  University  of  Hawaii, 

1976. 
FRANCIS  P.  SATALIN,  JR.,  1975—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Edu- 
cation. 

B.A.,  St.  Bonaventure  University, 

1967;  M.S.  in  Counseling,  Syracuse 

University,    1971;   M.S.   in   Physical 

Education,  1974. 
MALIN  PH.  SAYLOR,  1961—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  French. 

Fil.  Kand.,  Universities  of  Upsala  and 

Stockholm,  1938. 
RODNEY  H.  SHEARER,  1976—; 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Reli- 
gion. 
RICHARD  G.  STONE,  1976—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics  and 

Business  Administration. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1957; 

M.S.,  Franklin  &  Marshall  College, 

1969;  M.B.A.,  University  of  Connec- 
ticut, 1972. 
ALICE  J.  STRANGE,  1976—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  French. 

A.B.,  Indiana  University,  1965;  M.A., 

1967. 
PHILLIP  E.  THOMPSON,  1974—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1968; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware,  1975. 
ANN  L.  HENNINGER  TRAX,  1973—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.A.,   Wilson   College,    1968;   Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan,  1973. 
STEPHEN  E.  WILLIAMS,  1973—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.A.,  Central  College,   1964;  M.S., 

University  of  Tennessee,  1966;  Ph.D., 

Washington  University,  1971. 
SUSAN    E.    VERHOEK    WILLIAMS, 

1974—; 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biology. 

B.A.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University, 

1964;  M.A.,  Indiana  University,  1966; 

Ph.D.,  Cornell  University,  1975. 


Instructors: 

DAVID  V.  BILGER,  1974—; 
Adjunct  Instructor  in  Woodwinds. 
B.M.,  Ithaca  College,  1967. 

DAVID    H.    BINKLEY,    II,    1975-78; 
1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Organ. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1971; 
M.S.M.,  Union  Seminary,  1973. 

TERESA  M.  BOWERS,  1978—; 
Adjunct  Instructor  in  Woodwinds. 
B.M.,  Susquehanna  University,  1973; 
M.S.,  Ohio  State  University,  1974. 

MICHAEL  W.  CHABITNOY,  1977—; 
Adjunct  Instructor  in  Brass. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1963. 

BRUCE  S.  CORRELL,  1972—; 
Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 
B.S.,  Bowling  Green  State  University, 
1971;  M.Ed.,  1972. 

M.    ELAINE   COSTELLO,   Jan. -May, 
1977;  1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Biology. 
B.S.,   Drew  University,    1973;   M.S., 
University  of  Maryland,  1977. 

JAMES  L.  DUNN,  1972—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Woodwinds. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1964; 

M.M.,  University  of  Michigan,  1968. 
MARY  F.  GINGRICH,  January,  1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Piano. 

Lebanon  Valley  College. 
JOSEPH  A.  GOEBEL,  Jr.,  1972—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Percussion. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Millersville  State  College, 

1961. 
JANET  L.  HARRIGER,  1977—; 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College,  1974. 
STEVEN  P.  LINDENBERG,  1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Sociology  and 

Social  Service. 

B.S.,  Millersville  State  College,  1968; 

M.Ed.,  Shippensburg  State  College, 

1974;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Georgia, 

1977. 
DAVID  E.  MYERS,  1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Organ. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1970; 

M.M.,  Eastman  School  of  Music, 

1973. 


112 


H.  WILLIAM  NIXON,  1979—; 
Adjunct  Instructor  in  Music. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1971; 
M.M.,  Pennsylvania  State  College, 
1967. 

H.  DONALD  REED,  1975—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Brass. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1964; 

M.Ed.,   West  Chester  State  College, 

1973. 
JOHN  S.  SMITH.  1979—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Psychology. 

B.S.,  Juniata  College,   1971;  M.A., 

Pepperdine  University,  1976. 
GLORIA  E.   STAMBACH.   1970-1973; 

1975—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Piano. 

Diploma.  Juilliard  School  of  Music, 

1952;  Post  Graduate  Diploma,  1956. 
THOMAS  M.  STROHMAN,  1977—; 

Adjunct  Instructor  in  Fiute. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1975. 


OFFICES  OF  ADMINISTRATION 

Office  of  the  President 

FREDERICK  P.  SAMPLE,  1968—; 
President 

B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1952; 
M.Ed.,  Western  Maryland  College, 
1956;  D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University,  1968;  Ph.D.,  Albright  Col- 
lege, 1968. 

Academic: 

Office  of  the  Dean  of  the  College: 

CARL  Y.  EHRHART,  1947—; 

Dean  of  the  College,  I960—; 

Vice  President,  1967—; 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1940; 

M.Div.,  United  Theological  Semi- 
nary,  1943:  Ph.D.,  Yale  University, 

1954. 
RALPH   S.    SHAY,    1948-1951;   Feb. 

1953—; 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College,  1967- 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1942; 

A.M.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

1947;  Ph.D.,  1962. 
EDWIN  H.  WELCH,  1975—; 

Assistant    Dean    of   the    College, 

1979—. 


Office  of  Admissions: 

GREGORY  G.  STANSON,  1966—; 

Director  o/ Admissions,  1972 — . 

B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1963; 

M.Ed.,  University  of  Toledo,  1966. 
KATHY  E.  BICKLSER.  1979—; 

CounseJJor  in  Admissions. 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University, 

1977. 

JAMES  E.  BINDSCHADLER,  1979—; 

CounseJior  in  Admissions. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1979. 
RONALD  K.  GOOD,  1979—; 

Counsellor  in  Admissions. 

B.S.,  Millersville  State  College,  1959; 

M.Ed.,  1966. 
WENDY  L.  THOMPSON,  1979—; 

Counseiior  in  Admissions. 

A.B.,  Westminster  College,   1977; 

M.A.,  Drew  University,  1978. 

Office  of  the  Registrar: 

RALPH   S.   SHAY,   1948-1951;   Feb., 
1953—; 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College  and 
Registrar,  1967—. 

Computer  Center: 

FAY  B.  BURRAS,  1964—; 

Director  of  the  Computer  Center, 

1979—. 
HENRY  H.  GRIMM,  1978—; 

Consultant,  Computer  Center. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1935; 

M.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 

1936. 
STEPHEN  SHOOP,  1978—; 

Assistant  Director  of  the  Computer 

Center. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1974. 

Library: 

WILLIAM  E.  HOUGH,  III,  1970—; 

Head  Librarian;  Associate  Professor. 

A.B.,   The   King's   College,    1955; 

Th.M.,  Dallas  Theological  Seminary, 

1959;  M.S.L.S.,  Columbia  University, 

1965. 
ELOISE  P.  BROWN,  1961—; 

Reference  Librarian. 

B.S.L.S.,  Simmons  College,  1946. 


113 


ALICE  S.  DIEHL,  1966—; 
Cataloging  Librarian. 
A.B.,  Smith  College,  1956;  B.S.,  Car- 
negie Institute  of  Technology,  1957; 
M.L.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh, 
1966. 

Media  Center: 

EVA  GOFF  KNIGHT,  1975—; 

Director  of  the  Media  Center,  1977. 

Auxiliary  Schools: 

EDWIN  H.  WELCH,  1975—; 

Director  of  the  Auxiliary  Schools, 
1977—. 

STUDENT  AFFAIRS: 
Student  Personnel  Office: 

GEORGE  R.  MARQUETTE,  1952—; 

Dean  of  Students,  1972—. 

A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1948; 

M.A.,  Columbia  University,   1951; 

Ed.D.,  Temple  University,  1967. 
LOUIS  A.  SORRENTINO,  1971—; 

Assistant  Dean  of  Students,  1974 — . 

Director  of  Placement,  1975 — . 

B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1954; 

M.A.,  Bucknell  University,  1961. 

ROSEMARY  YUHAS,  1973—; 

Assistant  Dean  of  Students,  1976 — . 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College,  1966; 

M.Ed.,  West  Chester  State  College, 

1970. 
MARY  P.  KELSEY,  Head  Resident, 

Mabel  I.  Silver  Hall. 
MARY  M.  COX,  Head  Resident, 

Vickroy  Hall. 
KATHRYN  E.  ROHLAND,  Head  Resi- 
dent, 

Mary  Capp  Green  Hall. 

College  Center: 

WALTER   L.    SMITH,   JR.,    1961-1969; 
1971—; 

College  Center  Director;  Coordinator 
of  Conferences. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1961; 
M.S.  in  Ed.,  Temple  University,  1967. 

Health  Services: 

ROBERT  F.  EARLY,  1971—; 
College  Physician. 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1949; 
M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College, 
1952. 


RUSSELL  L.  GINGRICH,  1971—; 

CoiJege  Physician. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1947; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College, 

1951. 
ROBERT  M.  KLINE,  1970—; 

College  Physician. 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1950; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College, 

1955;  B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College, 

1971. 
JULIANA    Z.     WOLFE,     1975-1978; 

1979—; 

Head  Nurse. 

R.N.,  St.  Joseph's  Hospital,  Carbon- 
dale,  1963. 
VIRGINIA  ALBRIGHT,  R.N.,  Resident 

Nurse. 
KAREN    FLEAGLE,    R.N.,   Resident 

Nurse. 

Office  of  the  Chaplain: 

RODNEY  H.  SHEARER,  1976—; 
College  Chaplain. 

B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1966; 
M.Div.,  United  Theological  Semi- 
nary, 1969. 

Office  of  Athletics: 

GERALD  J.  PETROFES,  1963—; 
Director  of  Athletics. 

Coaching  Staff: 

BRUCE  S.  CORRELL,  1972—; 

Lacrosse  Coach;  Soccer  Coach;  Direc- 
tor of  Intramurals  for  Men. 

JOHN  S.  DeFRANK,  1979—; 
Assistant  Football  Coach. 

HAROLD  G.  GETZ,  1978—; 
Assistant  Football  Coach. 

JANET  L.  HARRIGER,  1977—; 

Women's  Rasketball  Coach;  Wom- 
en's Lacrosse  Coach;  Director  of 
Intramurals  for  Women;  Assistant 
Field  Hockey  Coach. 

JOEL  E.  HOFFSMITH,  197&— ; 
Cross  Country  Coach. 

TERRENCE  L.  KNIGHT,  SR.,  1978—; 
Equipment  Manager. 

JOHN  T.  LOFTUS,  1975—; 
Assistant  Basketball  Coach. 
B.S.,  King's  College,  1969. 

GERALD  J.  PETROFES,  1963—; 
Golf  Coach;  Wrestiing  Coach. 


114 


O.  KENT  REED,  1971—; 

Assistant  Foothall  Coach;  Track 

Coach. 
FRANCIS  B.  SATALIN,  JR.,  1975—; 

Basketball  Coach;  Baseball  Coach. 
LOUIS  A.  SORRENTINO,  1971—; 

Football  Coach. 
PATRICK  R.  TRAINOR,  1979—; 

Sports  Information  Director,  Girl's 

Basketball  Coach. 
JACQUELINE  S.  WALTERS,  1965—; 

Field  Hockey  Coach. 
ROSEMARY  YUHAS,  1973—; 

Assistant  Women's  Lacrosse  Coach. 

College  Relations  Area: 
Development  Office 

ROBERT  M.  WONDERLING,  1967—; 

Executive  Director  of  Development 

and  College  Relations,  1976—; 

B.S.,  Clarion  State  College,   1953; 

M.Ed.,   University   of  Pittsburgh, 

1958. 
PRESTON  H.  HADLEY,  III,  1979—; 

Assistant  Director  of  Development. 

A.B.,  Bucknell  University,  1968. 

Public  Relations: 

HAROLD  D.  ULMER,  1973—; 

Director  of  Public  Relations,  1978 — ; 
B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1973. 

BETH  E.  EARLY  BRANDT,  1978—; 
Assistant  Director  of  Public  Rela- 
tions. 
B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1976. 

CAROL  J.  LENNOX,  1978—; 
Assistant  in  Public  Relations. 
B.A.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute 
and  State  University,  1978. 

Alumni  Office: 

DAVID  M.  LONG,  1966—; 
Director  of  Alumni  Relations. 
A.B.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1959; 
M.Ed.,  Temple  University,  1961. 


BUSINESS  MANAGEMENT: 
Office  of  the  Controller: 

ROBERT  C.  RILEY,  1951—; 

Controiier,  1962;  Vice  President, 
1967—. 

B.S.  in  Ed.,  Shippensburg  State  Col- 
lege, 1941;  M.S.,  Columbia  Univer- 
sity, 1947;  Ph.D.,  New  York  Univer- 
sity, 1962;  C.P.M.,  1976. 

ROBERT  C.  HARTMAN,  1969—; 
Accountant. 
B.S.,  Elizabethtow^n  College,  1962. 

DANE  A.  WOLFE,  1977—; 
Assistant  Controller, 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College,  1974. 

WILLIAM  JEFF  ZELLERS,  1977—; 
Financial  Aid  Officer. 
B.A.,  Muskingum  College,   1974; 
M.A.,  Bowling  Green  State  Univer- 
sity, 1975. 

ROBERT  HARNISH,  1967—; 
Manager  of  the  College  Store;  Busi- 
ness Manager  of  the  Concert  Choir 
and  Chamber  Orchestra. 
B.A.,  Randolph  Macon  College,  1966. 

HERMAN  W.  HEISEY,  1975—; 
Director  of  Security. 

RONALD   G.    EVANS,  Administrative 
Services. 


Buildings  and  Grounds: 

SAMUEL  J.  ZEARFOSS,  1952—; 

Superintendent  of  Buildings  and 

Grounds,  1969—; 
DELLA  M.  NEIDIG,  1962—; 

Director  of  Housekeeping,  1972 — . 

Food  Service: 

GEORGE  F.  LANDIS,  JR.,  1966—; 

Manager  of  Food  Service,  1970 — . 
MILDRED  J.  REESE,  1969—; 

Manager  of  the  Snack  Shop,  1973 — . 


115 


COMMITTEES  OF  THE  FACULTY— 1979-1980 


Central  Committee 

Dr.  Hearsey  Dr.  Rhodes 

Dr.  Henninger,  Chairperson  Dr.  Spencer 


Dr.  Verhoek 


Dean  Ehrhart,  Chairperson 

Dr.  Davidon 

Dr.  Ebersole 

Dr.  Ford 

Dr.  Geffen 

Mr.  Hough 

Dr.  Iglesias 

Mr.  Iskowitz 

Dr.  Knight 


Mr.  Clay,  Secretary 
Dr.  Fleischman 
Mr.  Fletcher 
Dr.  Jacques 


Curriculum  Committee 

Dr.  Lau 
Dr.  Mayer 
Dr.  Neidig 
Mr.  Petrofes 
Dr.  Rhodes 
Mr.  Thompson 
Dr.  Welch 
Dr.  Wethington 
Dr.  Wolf 


Dr.  Shay,  Advisory  Member 
Denise  Achey,  Student 
Eugene  Barry,  Student 
Joel  Deaner,  Student 
Margaret  Huml,  Student 
Gregory  Ilioff,  Student 
Gary  Whiting,  Student 


Academic  Life  Committee 

Mr.  Joyce  Mr.  O'Donnell 

Dr.  Kearney  Dr.  Pollack 

Dr.  Markowicz,  Chairperson  Mrs.  Saylor 
Dr.  Moe  Dr.  Wolf 


Dr.  Bailey,  Chairperson 
Dr.  Davidon 
Dr.  Ebersole 
Dr.  Fehr 


Faculty  Life  Committee 

Dr.  Geffen  Dr.  Tom 

Dr.  Krebs  Dr.  Troutman,  Secretary 


Dr.  O'Donnell 
Mr.  Satalin 


Dr.  Williams 


General  Campus  Life  Committee 

Dr.  Berger,  Chairperson        Dr.  Lau,  Secretary  Dr.  Sweigart 

Dr.  Wethington 


Miss  Burras 
Dr.  Curfman 
Dr.  Knight 


Mr.  Petrofes 
Mr.  Reed 
Mr.  Stone 


Mr.  Woods 


Dr.  T.  Albrecht 
Dr.  M.  Albrecht 
Mr.  Bell 
Mr.  Gorrell 


Student  Life  Committee 


Mrs.  Englebright 
Dr.  Hanes 
Miss  Harriger 
Mrs.  Herr 


Dr.  Mayer,  Chairperson 
Dr.  Richardson,  Secretary 
Dr.  Wolfe 


THE  BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES  1979-1980 

OFFICERS: 

President F.  Allen  Rutherford,  Jr. 

First  Vice  President Elizabeth  K.  Weisburger 

Second  Vice  President   Nicholas  Bova,  Jr. 

Secretary E.  D.  Williams,  Jr. 

Treasurer   E.  Peter  Strickler 

Assistant  Treasurer    Gerald  D.  Kauffman 

President  Emeritus E.  N.  Funkhouser 

President  Emeritus Allan  W.  Mund 


1981) 


Members: 

tEdward  H.  Arnold 

B.A. 

President.  New  Penn  Motor  Express, 
Inc. 

Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 
tjames  M.  Ault  (1980) 

A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

Resident  Bishop  of  the  Philadelphia 
Area 

Eastern  Pennsylvania  Conference  and 
Wyoming  Conference 

United  Methodist  Church 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
*George  W.  Bashore  (1982) 

A.B.,  M.Div.,  D.D.,  D.Min. 

Superintendent,   Lebanon-Reading 
District 

Eastern  Pennsylvania  Conference 

United  Methodist  Church 

Reading,  Pennsylvania 
tEdward  H.  Benson  (1981) 

Chairman  of  the  Board 

Lancaster  Leaf  Tobacco  Company 

Lancaster,  Pennsylvania 
^William  D.  Boswell  (1980) 

Ph.B.,  LL.B. 

Attorney — Berman  and  Boswell 

Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 
**Nicholas  Bova,  Jr.  (1981) 

B.S. 

Vice  President,  Avon  Products,  Inc. 

New  York  City,  New  York 


*Elected  by  Church  Conference 
*Trustee-at-Large 
tAlumni  Trustee-at-Large 
^Faculty  Trustee-at-Large 


*Mildred  Bowen  (1981) 

Manager  Cafeteria 

Northeastern  School  District 

Mt.  Wolf,  Pennsylvania 
*Jean  Buckley  (1982) 

1941  Guiner  Lane 

Jamison,  Pennsylvania 
tMichael  B.  Buterbaugh  (1980) 

Student,  Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 
tRaymond  H.  Carr  (1982) 

President,  Pickering  Creek 

Industrial  Park,  Inc. 

Lionville,  Pennsylvania 
*W.  Edgar  Gathers  (1980) 

B.A.,  B.D. 

Administrator 

Simpson  House 

The  United  Methodist  Church 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

*Ruth  S.  Daugherty  (1980) 
B.A. 

35  Wilson  Drive 
Lancaster,  Pennsylvania 

tCurvin  N.  Dellinger  (1982) 
B.S. 

President,  J.  C.  Hauer's  Sons,  Inc. 
Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 

tWoodrow  S.  Dellinger  (1981) 
B.S.,  M.D. 

General  Practitioner 
Red  Lion,  Pennsylvania 

tDeWitt  M.  Essick  (1980) 
Retired  Executive 
Armstrong  Cork  Company 
Lancaster,  Pennsylvania  (1981) 


117 


*Eugene  C.  Fish  (1981) 

B.S.,  J.D. 

President,  Peerless  Industries,  Inc. 

Boyertown,  Pennsylvania 

Chairman  of  the  Board — Eastern 
Foundry  Company 

Boyertown,  Pennsylvania 

Attorney — Romeika,  Fish  and 
Scheckter 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

Sr.  Partner,  Tax  Associates 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
*Daniel  W.  Fox  (1981) 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

Manager,  Central  Research 

Chemistry  Research  and 
Development 

General  Electric  Company^Plastic 
Division 

Pittsfield,  Massachusetts 
^*Murray  B.  Grosky  (1982) 

B.S.,  M.D. 

Physician — Internal  Medicine 

President,  Grosky  and  Druckman 
Associates 

Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 
*Kathryn  Mowrey  Grove  (1980) 

A.B. 

Homemaker 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
*Thomas  W.  Guinivan  (1982) 

A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D. 

Pastor,  Colonial  Park  United 

Methodist  Church 

Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 
tjohn  R.  Harper  (1981) 

President,  Pardee  Company 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
*Philip  C.  Herr,  II  (1982) 

A.B.,LL.B. 

Attorney — Herr,  Potts  and  Herr 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
*Earl  H.  Kauffman  (1982) 

A.B.,  M.Div.,  S.T.M. 

Pastor,  Highspire/Mt.  Zion 

United  Methodist  Church 

Highspire,  Pennsylvania 

*Elected  by  Church  Conference 
*Trustee-at-Large 
tAlumni  Trustee-at-Large 
^Faculty  Trustee-at-Large 


*Gerald  D.  Kauffman  (1982) 

A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D. 

Pastor,  Grace  United  Methodist 
Church 

Carlisle,  Pennsylvania 
tWalter  Levinsky  (1980) 

Free-lance  Musician,  Composer  and 
Conductor 

New  York  City,  New  York 
tKarl  L.  Lockwood  (1980) 

B.S.,Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 
*Thomas  S.  May  (1981) 

B.S.,  B.D.,  D.D. 

Retired  Pastor,  United  Methodist 
Church 

Palmyra,  Pennsylvania 
*Joan  C.  McCulloh  (1980) 

A.B.,  M.A.T. 

Chairperson,  Department  of  English 

Annville-Cleona  School  District 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 

tCharles  B.  Mershon  (1980) 
Student,  Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania 

tAllan  W.  Mund  (1981) 

L.L.D.,  D.B.A. 

Retired  Chairman,  Board  of  Directors 

Ellicott  Machine  Corporation 

Baltimore,  Maryland 
tHoward  A.  Neidig  (1979) 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

Chairperson,  Department  of 
Chemistry 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 

*Henry  H.  Nichols  (1981) 
B.S.,  B.A.,  B.D.,  S.T.B..  D.D.,  LL.D. 
Pastor,  Janes  Memorial  United 

Methodist  Church 
Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 

*John  D.  Norton,  III  (1980) 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor  of  Political 

Science 
Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania 


118 


4:Agnes  B.  O'Donnell  (1982) 

A.B.,  M.Ed.,  M.A..  Ph.D. 

Professor  of  English 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 
*Harold  S.  Peiffer  (1980) 

Retired  Pastor,  United  Methodist 
Church 

Lancaster,  Pennsylvania 
tBernardo  H.  Penturelli  (1981) 

Corporate  Consultant 

Laureldale,  Pennsylvania 
*Kenneth  H.  Plummer  (1981) 

Vice  President,  E.D.  Plummer  Sons, 
Inc. 

Chambersburg,  Pennsylvania 
*}essie  A.  Pratt  (1981) 

Homemaker 

Philadelphia,  Pennsylvania 
tRhea  Reese  (1982) 

Homemaker 

Hershey,  Pennsylvania 
*Mildred  M.  Reigh  (1981) 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  M.S. 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 

Indiana,  Pennsylvania 
tMelvin  S.  Rife  (1980) 

Retired  Executive 

Schmidt  and  Ault  Paper  Company, 
Div.  St.  Regis  Paper  Company 

York,  Pennsylvania 
tP.  Allen  Rutherford,  Jr.  (1981) 

B.S.,  C.P.A. 

Retired,  Principal,  Arthur  Young  and 
Company 

Richmond,  Virginia 

Frederick  P.  Sample 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  D.Ed.,  Pd.D. 

President  of  the  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 
*Daniel  L.  Shearer  (1980) 

A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D. 

Director-Program  Council 

Central  Pennsylvania  Conference 

United  Methodist  Church 

Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 


*Elected  by  Church  Conference 
*Trustee-at-Large 
tAlumni  Trustee-at-Large 
^Faculty  Trustee-at-Large 


**Harvey  B.  Snyder  (1980) 

B.S.,  M.D. 

Medical  Director — Exxon  Company 

U.S.A. 

Houston,  Texas 
*James  N.  Spencer  (1981) 

B.S.,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Lebanon  Valley  College 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 
^Arthur  W.  Stambach  (1982) 

A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D. 

Superintendent,  Chambersburg 
District 

Central  Pennsylvania  Conference 

United  Methodist  Church 

Chambersburg,  Pennsylvania 

*Paul  E.  Stambach  (1980) 
A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  Ph.D. 
Pastor,  Asbury  United  Methodist 

Church 
York,  Pennsylvania 

tSara  K.  Stauffer  (1981) 
B.S. 

Treasurer 
Leola  Supply  Company  of  Leola  and 

Maryland 
Leola,  Pennsylvania 

tE.  Peter  Strickler  (1980) 
B.S. 
President,  Strickler  Insurance 

Agency,  Inc. 
Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 

tSusan  E.  Verhoek 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor  of  Biology 
Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania 

^*Ronald  B.  Weinel  (1980) 
B.S.,  M.B.S.,  C.P.A. 
Assistant  Treasurer,  The  Bendix 

Corporation 
Southfield,  Michigan 

tElizabeth  K.  Weisburger  (1982) 
B.S.,  Ph.D. 
Chief  of  Carcinogen  Metabolism  and 

Toxicology  Branch 
National  Cancer  Institute 
Bethesda,  Maryland 


119 


tHarlan  R.  Wengert  (1981) 

B.S.,  M.B.A. 

President,  Wengert's  Dairy,  Inc. 

Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 
*Dennis  Williams  (1982) 

B.A.,  M.Div.,  D.Min. 

Pastor,  United  Methodist  Church  of 
West  Chester 

West  Chester,  Pennsylvania 
tE.  D.  Williams,  Jr.  (1981) 

Secretary,  Lebanon  Valley  College 

Board  of  Trustees 

Annville,  Pennsylvania 


HONORARY  TRUSTEES 

Jefferson  C.  Barnhart,  Esquire 

A.B.,  LL.B. 

Attorney — McNees,  Wallace  and 
Nurick 

Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 

Berthram  Brossman  Blair 

LL.D. 

President  and  Chairman  of  the  Board 

Denver  and  Ephrata  Telephone  Com- 
pany 

Ephrata,  Pennsylvania 

Horace  E.  Smith 

A.B.,  LL.B. 

Attorney — Smith  and  McCleary 

York,  Pennsylvania 

Woodrow  W.  Waltemyer 

Business  Executive 

York,  Pennsylvania 

Mrs.  Albert  Watson 

Homemaker 

Carlisle,  Pennsylvania 


Elmer  N.  Funkhouser 

A.B.,  LL.D. 

Retired  President,  Funkhouser 

Corporation 
Hagerstown,  Maryland 
Paul  E.  Horn 
A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D. 
Pastor,  Stevens  Memorial  United 

Methodist  Church 
Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 
Hermann  W.  Kaebnick 
A.B.,  B.D.,  S.T.M.,  D.D.,  L.H.D. 
Retired  Bishop,  Central  Pennsylvania 

Conference 
United  Methodist  Church 
Hershey,  Pennsylvania 
Robert  Lutz 
A.B. 

Retired  Executive 

Blumenthal-Kahn  Electric  Company 
Ow^ings  Mills,  Maryland 
Ezra  H.  Ranck 
A.B.,  B.D.,  D.D. 
Retired  Pastor,  United  Methodist 

Church 
Mt.  Joy,  Pennsylvania 
Robert  H.  Reese 
Retired  President 
H.  B.  Reese  Candy  Company,  Inc. 
Hershey,  Pennsylvania 
Ralph  M.  Ritter 
President,  Ritter  Brothers,  Inc. 
Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania 
Samuel  K.  Wengert 
B.S.,  LL.D. 

Chairman  of  the  Board 
Wengert's  Dairy,  Inc. 
Lebanon,  Pennsylvania 


TRUSTEES  EMERITUS 

William  D.  Bryson 

LL.D. 

Retired  Executive,  Walter  W. 

Moyer  Company 
Ephrata,  Pennsylvania 


*Elected  by  Church  Conference 
*Trustee-at-large 
tAlumni  Trustee-at-Large 
tFacuhy  Trustee-at-Large 


COMMITTEES  OF  THE  BOARD 

Executive  Committee 

Frederick  P.  Sample,  Chm. 
Nicholas  Bova,  Jr. 
Ruth  S.  Daugherty 
Thomas  W.  Guinivan 
Karl  L.  Lockv^ood 
Henry  H.  Nichols 
Rhea  Reese 


120 


F.  Allen  Rutherford,  Jr. 
Paul  E.  Stambach 
E.  Peter  Strickler 
Ronald  B.  Weinel 
Dennis  Williams 

Finance  Committee 

Eugene  C.  Fish,  Chm.  (1982) 
Harlan  R.  Wengert,  Vice  Chm.  (1981) 
E.  D.  Williams.  Jr.,  Sec.  (1980) 

E.  Peter  Strickler,  Treas. 

Gerald  D.  Kauffman,  Asst.  Treas.  (198i; 
Edward  H.  Arnold  (1982) 
Curvin  N.  Dellinger  (1980) 
Allan  W.  Mund  (1980) 
Bernardo  H.  Penturelli  (1981) 
Kenneth  H.  Plummer  (1980) 

F.  Allen  Rutherford,  Jr. 
Frederick  P.  Sample 
James  N.  Spencer  (1981) 
Sara  K.  Stauffer  (1982) 

Faculty-Administrative  Committee 

W.  Edgar  Gather,  Chm. 
George  W.  Bashore 
William  D.  Boswell 
Woodrow  S.  Dellinger 


Murray  B.  Grosky 
John  D.  Norton 
Frederick  P.  Sample 
Daniel  L.  Shearer 
Elizabeth  K.  Weisburger 

Auditing  Committee 

Melvin  S.  Rife,  Ghm. 
John  R.  Harper 
Joan  G.  McGulloh 

Buildings  and  Grounds  Committee 

E.  D.  Williams,  Jr.,  Ghm. 
Daniel  W.  Fox 
Philip  G.  Herr,  II 
Kenneth  Plummer 
Frederick  P.  Sample 
E.  Peter  Strickler 
Susan  E.  Verhoek 

Nominating  Committee 

Arthur  W.  Stambach,  Ghm. 
Gurvin  D.  Dellinger 
Murray  B.  Grosky 
Agnes  B.  O'Donnell 
Harold  S.  Peiffer 


m  ^v '  %.^ 


M 


N^ 


121 


CORRESPONDENCE  DIRECTORY 

To  Facilitate  Prompt  Attention,  Inquiries 
Should  be  Addressed  as  Indicated  Below: 

Matters  of  General  College  Interest    President 

Academic  Program  Vice  President  and  Dean  of  the  College 

Admissions Director  of  Admissions 

Alumni  Interests Director  of  Alumni  Relations 

Business  Matters,  Expenses  Vice  President  and  Controller 

Campus  Conferences Coordinator  of  Conferences 

Development  and  Bequests Executive  Director  of  Development 

Evening  School  and  Summer  Session Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

Financial  Aid  to  Students    Financial  Aid  Officer 

Placement: 

Teacher  Placement Director  of  Teacher  Placement 

Business  and  Industrial Director  of  Industrial  Placement 

Publication  and  Publicity Director  of  Public  Relations 

Religious  Activities Chaplain 

Student  Interests Dean  of  Students 

Teacher  Certification Assistant  Dean  of  the  College 

Transcripts,  Academic  Reports 

Assistant  Dean  of  the  College  and  Registrar 
Weekend  College Director  of  Weekend  College 

Address  all  mail  to: 

Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania     17003 

Direct  all  telephone  calls  to: 

Lebanon  Valley  College 
Annville,  Pennsylvania 
Area  Code  717         Local  Number  867-4411 

Regular  office  hours  for  transacting  business: 

College  office  hours  are  from  8:30  a.m.  to  12:00  noon  and  1:00  p.m. 
to  5:00  p.m.  Monday  through  Friday.  Members  of  the  staff  are  available 
for  interviews  at  other  times  if  appointments  are  made  in  advance. 


122 


^{IM 


■^^rr 


"  COLLFSE  M 


.">/■ 


sse 


>- 


x: 

o 

^_ 

CO     3 

N    SZ 

i5  O 

d  CD   • — 

2   _   —   =  C     O  CO 

^  <  ^  °^    c  ^  ^  I  X  X  =    ^ 

^  O   O   0  ^  .-=   o    c  .S^  5  ^  ^ 

©(§)  (g)(i)(§){8)(§)(§)  (g)  (§)(§)  i) 


E 


2  :? 


C 


Q.  :3  a>  .?  ?=5 

<  TO  D  •=  X 

S  «  =  "ale 

J-  O  m    ^    <l^ 

o        §^S|-iE2^^|||5 
©©©©©©  (g)  ©(§)(§)  (D  ©  (D 


CO 


0    0    0 

CO 

>     >     > 

0 

0 

<   <   < 

0 

c 

CO 

0     0     0 

0 

c 

O)  D)  D) 

O 

0 

0      0      0 

g^0 

'co 

000 

ig 

p  ^ 

E 

"^    CsJ    0 

'5 

■5  0 

CD  0 

0 

•4—' 

c 
0 

0 

0 

< 

0   -^   CO 

CD 

nistration 
W.  Mund 

■D 
0 

Ll 

■D 

0 
■♦-' 

■D 
DO 

0 

'cn 
0 

CO 

X 
0 

0 

0 

0 
0 

Ity  Offices, 
Ity  Offices, 
Ity  Offices, 
houser  Ha 

'0 

c 
0 

LL 
CO 

Eg 

0 

CO 

^ 

c 

+-> 

-»— « 

D     D     D   ^ 

■Q 

c 

CO 

^ 

c 

CO 

0    0    0   C 

CO 

■D  = 

^ 

1_ 

CO 

0 

CO 

CO    m    CO    13 

<  <   <   < 

S  0  0 

LU  LL   LL   LL   LL 

(5 

©®@©@@©@@(S)g)(g)@ 


INDEX 


Absences 31 

Academic  Classification  31 

Academic  Dishonesty   31 

Academic  Offices   113 

Academic  Probation 32 

Academic  Programs  and  Procedures 21 

Academic  Procedures    28 

Academic  Program 21 

Academic  Requirements 21 

Accounting,  Courses  in 48 

Accreditation 7 

Activities,  Student  35 

Actuarial  Science,  Outline  of  Program 95 

Actuarial  Science,  Plan  of  Study  in 69 

Administrative  Staff 113 

Administrative  Regulations 31 

Admissions  Deposit 15 

Admissions,  Requirements  and 

Information 13 

Advanced  Placement 15 

Advisers,  Faculty   29 

Aid,  Student 18 

Alpha  Phi  Omega 36 

Alpha  Psi  Omega   36 

Anthropology,  Course  in 92 

Application  Fee 16 

Application  for  Admission 13 

Art,  Courses  in 40 

Athletics  39 

Athletics,  Aims  and  Objectives 39 

Attendance,  Chapel-Convocation 31 

Attendance,  Class 31 

Auditing  Courses   29 

Auditions,  Department  of  Music 14 

Auxiliary  Schools 25 

Auxiliary  School  Fees 17 

Baccalaureate,  Attendance  of 23 

Balmer  Showers  Lectureship 35 

Band,  All-Girl    78 

Band,  Symphonic 37,  18 

Basic  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  19 

Baseball 39 

Basketball  39 

Biology,  Courses  in    41 

Biology,  Outline  of  Program   95 

Biology,  Marine 27 

Board  Fees   16 

Board  of  Trustees  117 

Board  of  Trustees,  Committees  120 

Board  of  Trustees,  Officers 117 

Business  Administration,  Courses  in 49 

Campus  Employment 19 

Campus  Map    124,  125 

Campus  Organizations 36 

Cars,  Student  Rules  Concerning 32 

Certification,  Requirements  for 

Teachers   104 


Change  of  Registration    28 

Chapel  Choir 37,  78 

Chapel-Convocation  Program  31,  35 

Chemistry,  Courses  in 44 

Chemistry,  Outline  of  Program 96 

Class  Attendance 31 

Clubs,  Departmental 36 

College  Calendar,  1979-1980 2 

College  Chorus  37,  78 

College  Entrance  Examination  Board 

Tests 13 

College  History  5 

College  Honors  Progam 25 

College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP)   15 

College  Profile 5 

Commencement,  Attendance  of   23 

Committees,  Board  of  Trustees  120 

Committees,  Faculty 116 

Computer  Programming   46 

Concert  Choir   32.  78 

Concurrent  Courses   29 

Contingency  Deposit  16 

Cooperative  Programs  98 

Correspondence  Directory    122 

Counseling  and  Placement 30 

Course  Credit 40 

Course  Numbering  System 40 

Courses  of  Study  by  Departments  40 

Credits  Earned  at  Another  Institution 14 

Cross  Country    39 

Cultural  Opportunities    37 

Degrees,  Requirements  for  21 

Delta  Tau  Chi 36 

Denominational  Organizations   35 

Departmental  Clubs  36 

Departmental  Honors 25 

Departmental  Honors,  Biology    42 

Departmental  Honors,  Chemistry 44 

Departmental  Honors,  Economics 47 

Departmental  Honors,  Elementary 

Education  51 

Departmental  Honors,  English 55 

Departmental  Honors,  Foreign 

Languages 57 

Departmental  Honors,  History 63 

Departmental  Honors,  Mathematics 69 

Departmental  Honors,  Music 74 

Departmental  Honors,  Philosophy 81 

Departmental  Honors,  Physics 83 

Departmental  Honors,  Political 

Science    65 

Departmental  Honors,  Psychology 86 

Departmental  Honors,  Religion 89 

Departmental  Honors,  Sociology   92 

Departments,  Courses  of  Study  by 40 

Directories   107 

Discontinuance  of  Courses 29 

Dismissal 33 


126 


Distribution  Requirements  24 

Double  Major 21 

Dramatic  Organizations 37 

Economics  and  Business  Administration, 

Outline  of  Program 97 

Economics,  Courses  in 50 

Education,  Courses  in  52 

Elementary  Education,  Courses  in  53 

Elementary  Education,  Outline  in 

Program 98 

Elementary  Education — 

Subject  Matter  Requirements 104 

Emeritus  Professors   107 

Employment 19 

Endowment  Funds 8 

Engineering,  Cooperative  Program, 

Outine  of  Program   98 

English,  Courses  in 54 

English,  Intern  Program    55 

Enrollment  Statistics   11 

Entrance  Requirements  13 

Environmental  Biology  Program 27 

Evening  Classes 25 

Examinations 22 

Examinations,  College  Entrance  Board 13 

Expenses 16 

Extension  Courses 26 

Extra-Curricular  Activities  35 

Faculty 107 

Faculty  Advisers 30 

Faculty  Committees  116 

Fees  and  Deposits 16 

Financial  Aid 18 

Football 39 

Foreign  Languages,  Courses  in 57 

Foreign  Language  Requirement    24 

Forestry,  Cooperative  Program, 

Outline  of  Program 100 

French,  Courses  in  58 

Freshman  Orientation  29 

Freshman-Sophomore  Honors 25 

Furnishings,  Residence  Halls    17 

General  Requirements  24 

Germantown  Metropolitan  Semester 26 

Geography,  Courses  in 62 

German,  Courses  in   59 

Golf 39 

Governing  Bodies 37 

Government,  Student 37 

Grade-Point  Average   22 

Grading  and  Quality  Points, 

System  of   22 

Grading,  Pass-Fail 23 

Grants-in-Aid 19 

Greek,  Courses  in  60 

Guild  Student  Group 37 

Hazing 31 

Health  Reports 13 

History  and  Political  Science, 

Courses  in 63 

History,  College 5 

History,  Courses  in 63 

Honorary  Organizations   36 

Honors  Program    25 

Honors  Studies    25 


Hours,  Limit  of  Credit 30 

Humanities 68 

Independent  Study.  Accounting 49 

Independent  Study,  Biology 43 

Independent  Study,  Business 

Administration    5Q 

Independent  Study,  Chemistry  45 

Independent  Study,  Economics 5^ 

Independent  Study,  Elementary 

Education  54 

Independent  Study,  English 57 

Independent  Study,  French  59 

Independent  Study,  German   60 

Independent  Study,  History 65 

Independent  Study,  Mathematics 72 

Independent  Study,  Music 80 

Independent  Study,  Philosophy  81,  82 

Independent  Study,  Physics 83,  85 

Independent  Study,  Political  Science 67 

Independent  Study,  Psychology 86,  88 

Independent  Study,  Religion 91 

Independent  Study,  Sociology    94 

Independent  Study,  Spanish  62 

Information  for  Prospective  Students 13 

Institutional  Rules    38 

Instructors 112 

Insurance  Plan  and  Fee 16 

International  Studies  Program 27 

Intercollegiate  Athletic  Programs 39 

Interdisciplinary  Courses  68 

Judicial  Appeals  Board  37 

Lacrosse 39 

Late  Registration 28 

Latin,  Courses  in 61 

Limit  of  Hours 30 

Loans  ;i9 

Major  Requirements 21 

Map,  Campus 124-125 

Mathematics  and  Actuarial  Sciences, 

Courses  in 69 

Meals  18 

Medical  Examinations 13 

Medical  Technology,  Cooperative 

Program,  Outline  of  Program 100 

Merrill-Palmer  Institute  Semester 27 

Metropolitan  Semester 26 

Metropolitan  Semester,  Courses  in 72 

Music,  Conducting 80 

Music,  Courses  in 72 

Music  Education,  Outline  of  Program   . .     73,  102 

Music  Fees   16 

Music  Instruction,  Applied    80 

Music  Instruction,  Individual   80 

Music,  Instrumental  Courses "71 

Music,  History  and  Appreciation  of 79 

Music,  Methods  and  Materials   76 

Music  Organizations 37,  78 

Music,  Outline  of  Program    74,  102 

Music,  Sacred,  Outline  of  Program 73,  102 

Music,  Special  Requirements 73 

Music,  Student  Teaching  17 

Music,  Theory  of 74 

National  Direct  Student  Loans    19 


127 


New  Student  Orientation  29 

Night  Classes 26 

Nursing,  Cooperative  Program, 

Outline  of  Program 104 

Offices  of  Administration 113 

Officers,  Board  of  Trustees 117 

Organizations 36 

Orientation 29 

Parking,  Student  Rules  on  32 

Part-Time  Student  Fees 16 

Pass/Fail  Grading    23 

Payment  of  Fees  and  Deposits 16 

Philosophy,  Courses  in  81 

Physical  Education,  Courses  in 82 

Physical  Education  Requirement   24 

Physical  Examinations 13 

Physics,  Courses  in 83 

Placement 30 

Policy  of  Non-Discrimination   8 

Political  Science,  Courses  in  65 

Position  Statement  38 

Pre-Dental  Curriculum 95 

Pre-Medical  Curriculum  95 

Pre-Registration ,.  28 

Presidents  of  the  College    6 

Presidential  Scholarships 19 

Pre- Veterinary  Curriculum 95 

Private  Music  Instruction 80 

Probation,  Academic  32 

Procedures,  Academic 28 

PROJECT 35 

Professional  Curricula,  Special  Plans 

for 95 

Professors   107 

Professors,  Assistant 110 

Professors,  Associate  109 

Professors,  Emeritus 107 

Psychology,  Courses  in 85 

Publications,  Student 36 

Quality  Points,  System  of 22 

Quittapahilla,  The  36 

Readmission 33 

Recitals,  Student 80 

Recognition  Groups  36 

Recreation 39 

Refund  Policy    17 

Registration    28 

Regulations,  Administrative 31 

Religion  and  Life  Lectureships 36 

Religion,  Courses  in 89 

Religious  Emphasis  Day 35 

Religious  Life 35 

Repetition  of  Courses 29 

Requirements,  Admission 13 

Requirements,  Degrees    21 

Requirements,  Distribution  and 

General    24 

Residence  Halls,  Regulations 17 


Residence  Requirement 22 

Rules,  Institutional 38 

Sacred  Music,  Outline  of  Program 102 

Schedules,  Arrangements  of   30 

Scholarships 18 

Scholarship  Funds  9 

Secondary  Education,  Courses  in 54 

Secondary  Education — Subject  Matter 

Requirements 105 

Semester  Hours 21 

Semester  Hour  Limitations 30 

Service  Organizations  36 

Soccer    41 

Social  Organizations   36 

Social  Sciences,  Major 91 

Sociology,  Courses  in    92 

Spanish,  Courses  in  61 

Special  Interest  Groups 37 

Special  Plans  of  Study 95 

State  Grants   19 

Statement  of  Purpose 7 

Student  Activities 35 

Student  Conduct  Code 38 

Student  Employment 19 

Student  Finances    16 

Student  Government   37 

Student  Judicial  Board    37 

Student  Loans   19 

Student  Publications  36 

Student  Recitals    80 

Student  Teaching 54,  77,  104,  105 

Summer  Session  26 

Sunday  Church  Services 35 

Supplemental  Educational 

Opportunity  Grants    19 

Support  and  Control    8 

Suspension 32 

Symphonic  Band   37,  78 

Symphony  Orchestra 37,  78 

Teacher  Placement  Bureau 30 

Teaching,  Certification 

Requirements 104 

Track   39 

Transcripts  32 

Transfer  Credit 14 

Transfer  Students  23 

Trustees,  Board  of 117 

Tu^o  Majors 21 

University  Center  at  Harrisburg   26 

Urban  Semester 26 

Washington  Semester  Program 28 

Weekend  College    26 

Withdrawal 33 

Withdrawal  from  Courses 22 

Withdrawal  Refunds    17 

Wrestling 41 


128 


'^'^ATIO^ 


Ki^